Home
GX Works3 Operating Manual
Contents
1.
2. Error Status Legend l Product Information List J Event History Ay Maior A Moderate A Mince Create File J Unit Base Access Error Close T r MWhen appears on an image of module appears on an image of a module when a connected module is in the following situation e A connected module is broken e Mounting status is different from the one set in I O Assignment Setting of the System Parameter e A control CPU is not mounted e Its profile is not registered The base unit configuration is not displayed in order of the connection if the number of extension base was set incorrectly Automatic diagnosis function This function starts up the System Monitor function automatically when connecting CPU module and a personal computer by USB connection Set whether to start up automatically on the task tray Check of module firmware version and product information The firmware version and product information can be checked by pressing the Product Information List button on the Product Information List screen 16 DIAGNOSING MODULE 1 16 1 Checking Module Status of System 3 3 16 2 Diagnosing CPU Module This section explains how to display the status and error codes of modules FX5SCPU only supports the following Diagnosing CPU modules Window Diagnosing CPU modules Diagnostics gt Module Diagnostics CPU Diagnostics HDiagnosing I O modules and Int
3. 0c c ce ee ee eee eee eee teen teens 182 6 8 Checking Prograinsia s 4 4240 0022 sass ea bt ttwese ews wee ee ee Saw E pet eee ees bees ee eA 183 6 9 Converting Programs sien s6 eink saw eee ee hae eee Reh ee eee ee 184 Converting converting all programS 2 ee eee eee eee 184 Performing online program change simultaneously with conversion 0 0 0 ee ee ee 189 Checking for errors and warningS 0 0 c cee eee eee eee eee teen neees 189 6 10 Calculating Memory Size 2664 621055 5eeagcins iraan TSS a ese aes e Phe a a SRS ee Be ered 190 CHAPTER 7 SETTING DEVICE MEMORY 191 7 1 AMADOU Device MEMO osi60i4 ode cue eee eew eee seta w eee eee Res Meera een eae ee eee 191 7 2 Configuration of Device Memory Editor 0 000 eee ee 192 ScunG display ommal 4 255 5ohe2002 nereye npada tee heoten does eee eho beSeeeree Ress beets ae 192 7 3 Setting Device Memory 00 ce es 193 Setting device values in units of points 6 anaana aaaeeeaeo 193 Setting values in batch 2256 00 e2eo6es eee neue teers heey ceo be ds oes eae se 25 ce 55 eeeee eee 194 Seng Character SWINGS issar acxdsedsd45Go5eene Shad RATELE 0400444065565 906540460 50582 ede 195 Clearing whole memory of device MEMOry 1 eee eee es 195 Interaction with device initial value 0 1 0 eee eee eens 196 7 4 Writing Reading Data to from CPU Module 2 0 0 cece ee 196 CHAPTER 8 SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES 197 8 1 About Device I
4. t Safety operation mode USER status ERROR status CPU operation status Connection status Connection status CPU operation status ERROR state USER state Safety operation mode Scan time state Monitor target selection Monitor mode mE a Eea When connected to a CPU module Displays the connection status between a CPU module and personal computer The Specify Connection Destination screen is displayed by clicking the icon For more details refer to the following section K5 Page 235 SETTING ROUTE TO CPU MODULE RUN STOP The Remote Operation screen is displayed by clicking the icon W For more details refer to the following section an PAUSE Displays the CPU module status operated by the key switch on the CPU module or the remote operation from GX Works3 K Page 326 CPU Module Remote Operation Displays the ERROR LED state of CPU module ERROR is OFF The Module Diagnostics screen is displayed by clicking the icon ERROR is ON For more details refer to the following section I Page 314 Diagnosing CPU Module ERROR is flashing USER is OFF 0 0 USER is ON Displays the USER LED state of CPU module B The Module Diagnostics screen is displayed by clicking this icon oo For more details refer to the following section LF Page 314 Diagnosing CPU Module USER is flashing Displays the safety operation mode Ss Safety mode The Switch Safety Operat
5. Bit type Select a cell of device label then press the hit Enter keys Word type Register the device label in the Watch window and change the value gt Page 277 Checking Current Values by Registering Devices Labels 14 CHECKING OPERATION OF PROGRAMS 269 14 2 Check Execution Programs on Program Editor ST The monitored values of bit type are displayed on a program and the monitored values of labels other than bit type and word devices are displayed on the right side of the split window The monitored value is displayed on the tooltip by placing the cursor on a device label name Monitored value of counterO _ amp Displays TRUE FALSE of bit oinkari i comtors i type label or bit device ELSE f e 1 counterO 1 LEND_IF TRUE M carm Poea U INEN Monitored value of DO 1 Countup a FALSE M0 8GFOR DO 0 TO 10 BY 2 DO DO 12 a DO DO counterO DO 12 DO 12 counterO 1 10 LEND_FOR 11 F END_IF TEE Data in the collapsed line is not monitored Current values can be changed by the following methods during monitoring Bit type Select a token of device label then press the Inte Enter keys Word type Register the device label in the Watch window and change the value L Page 277 Checking Current Values by Registering Devices Labels 270 14 CHECKING OPERATION OF PR
6. Converting blocks Check whether there is any problems on an activated SFC diagram The program in the Zoom will not be checked _ Operating procedure Select Convert gt Convert Block 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 1 1 6 6 Creating SFC Programs 7 Editing Step No Transition No Step No SO Transition No TRO in a block and its device comments can be checked changed in a list Window Edit gt Edit Step Transition Fait Step T ransition l m Data Name Step liana Device Comment Initial so Step1 51 TransitionO TRO TRUE Operating procedure Select a column of device to be changed then change the device and click the OK button Creating displaying Zooms action transition Programs of actions transitions can be created in languages corresponding to contents The method for entering programs is same as the one for each program language To display the SFC diagram which is to be the start source select View gt Open Zoom Source Block Operating procedure Double click an action name transition name on an SFC diagram 2 Set each item on the New Data screen then click the OK button The Zoom appears when the program has already been created Precautions Some instructions cannot be used to actions transitions For details refer to the following manual LA MELSEC iQ R Programming Manual Program Design Displaying a Zoom list Display a created Zoom in a list Displayin
7. Moi dule Name Data Name CPU Built in Memory E SD Memory Card Intelligent Function Module Last Change Size Byte S A Untitled Project o Parame ter GP System Parameter CPU Paramet ter i a Module Parameter 5 29 2015 4 04 50 PM 5 29 2015 4 04 49 PM Not Calculation Not Calculation i Simple Motion Module Setting 0010 R i a Memory Card Parameter 5 29 2015 4 04 45 PM 5 29 2015 4 03 27 PM Not Calculation Not Calculation fin Remote Passwor d Global Label e Global Label Setting O Global Label Initial Value 5 29 2015 4 03 28 PM Not Calculation GLBLINF 5 29 2015 4 03 28 PM Not Calculation Display Memory Capacity K emor IE GX Simulator3 ECE Tool 1 1 RO8CPU LED SWITCH READY M RUN ERROR B sToP P RUN i USER i RESET 1 1 0010 RD77M58 Free 320 320KB Free 5108 51 20KB Free 1024 1024KB Free O OKB Erecue Dose Display Setting Related Functions EAR ROR SPA 0 Parameter Program F Select all Legend Open Close AI T Deselect All N Module Name Data Name CPU Built in Memory E SD Memory Card fi Intelligent Function Module Last Ch
8. om Changing a normal step to an end step Select a step to be chenged then select Edit gt Modify gt End Step Jump All SFC diagram written below the changed step are deleted Entering comments of Step No Enter a comment on the Step Properties screen the device comment editor Creating a step that makes another block activated A step that activates another block when a step was activated block start step is creatable 1 inserta step 2 Specify BC or BS for the step attribute 3 Specify a block No to be activated for the step attribute target To check the step which is to be the specification source from the block specified as the step attribute target select View gt Open Start Source Block For details on the performance of step attribute BC BS refer to the following manual LA MELSEC iQ R Programming Manual Program Design 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 6 6 Creating SFC Programs 163 Creating a step that makes a step being held deactivated A step that deactivates a step being held when a step was activated reset step is creatable 1 inserta step 2 Specify R for the step attribute 3 Specify a step name to be deactivated for the step attribute target When S999 is specified to a step name all steps being held will be the target For details on the performance of step attribute R refer to the following manual A MELSEC iQ R Programming Manual Program Design Ins
9. 00 0 cc ees 340 Appendix 5 Using Simulation Function 0 0 0c ccc ees 342 Supported CPU module functions 0 0 0 ee ee eee eee eens 343 Supported deVICES 2 ee ee eee ee eee eens 345 Supported INSWUCHONS va cdo asierea ect ededd tie twde dddowddae bas bene ede a bead eens 351 Enabled disabled parameter items 1 nnana nananana eee ee ee ee ees 353 Module buffer memory 0 0 ee ee ee eee nent e eee ens 354 Link devices of network module 1 0 ee eee ee eee eens 354 COINS TSN AOI S Ge sod cae ccc er Ge vb ats ata anki ncn ce A a quake Se ects A essere gsc BS a ee a E a ees ati ue meee F 355 Appendix 6 USB Driver Installation Procedure 0 0 00 ccc ees 357 INDEX REVISIONS TRADEMARK Ss 634 424 rra RETE obese eee ees ee eae ee eee geese ober es eee ee a CONTENTS 11 12 RELEVANT MANUALS Manual name manual number Available form GX Works3 Operating Manual SH 081215ENG this manual Poin tr Explains the system configuration of GX Works3 parameter e Manual setting and operation method for the online function EPUB PDF e Manual refers to the Mitsubishi FA electronic book manuals that can be browsed using a dedicated tool e Manual has the following features e Required information can be cross searched in multiple manuals e Other manuals can be accessed from the links in the manual e The hardware specifications of each part can be found from the product fi
10. Common element Execution 7 E order Grid Automatic ADD lt When the element is selected gt connector moh i WT xxBe Smart tag CA 12 14 Tool hint Dispi io Comment A comment set to a device label WShow Hide View gt Comment Display LD element An element that constitutes a ladder program Element type KL Page 152 LD element FBD element An element that constitutes an FBD program Element type L Page 153 FBD element Common element A common element used regardless of program language Element type L Page 153 Common element Connector A line that connects the connection points between elements It is displayed by placing an element to be connected closer to the connection point on the connection target 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 1 1 6 5 Creating FBD LD Programs 5 Network A single network a single block composed of all elements connected MlReleasing from a network together Select the element to be released and move it with the key held down Execution order The execution order of a program is displayed Show Hide View gt Display Execution Order Automatic When a connector cannot be displayed due to the conditions where an connector element is placed a number is displayed automatically The same number of automatic connector indicates that they are connected Connection point A terminal point to connect elements with a connector Winverting contact By adding an element while
11. Label Name Data Type nea 5 etting_A Change the array to a two or Enter the array declaration directly in text three dimensional array For details refer to the following manual MELSEC iQ R Programming Manual Program Design Label Name Data Type Class 3 Initial Setting C Bit O 2 0 2 0 2 C VAR GLOBAL 5 Select the class from the pull down list of Class Safety global labels standard safety shared global labels local labels of a safety program and local labels of a safety FB do not support the latch type class a class of which name includes RETAIN For details on the classes refer to the following manuals MELSEC iQ R Programming Manual Program Design MELSEC iQ F FX5 Programming Manual Program Design Assignment devices labels en the arbitrary devices labels to the global labels Undefined labels can also be assigned The devices labels which can be assigned differ depending on the assignment target label O Can be assigned x Cannot be assigned A digit specified bit device K4M0 and digit specified word device D0 1 can be specified The module labels can also be assigned as a label If do not assign a device label to the label a label memory is assigned instead For details on the label memory refer to the following manuals MELSEC iQ R CPU Module User s Manual Application MELSEC iQ F FX5 User s Manual Application e When specifying a timer or
12. Project gt Security gt User Management User Management User List Number of Registration 1 128 User Name Access Level zm i a aimee Sox Gee Adding changing users Add change a user information user name password to from a project Operating procedure 1 Click the Add Change button 2 Set the items on the Add New User screen Change User screen and click the OK button Deleting users Delete the user information registered in a project Operating procedure Select the user name to be deleted and click the Delete button 15 PROTECTING DATA 30 15 4 Preventing Illegal Access to Project 5 15 5 Preventing Illegal Access to CPU Module To prevent an illegal access to the project written to a CPU module use the User Authentication function Only RnSFCPU supports the function For details on the User Authentication function refer to the following section KL Page 303 User Authentication function How to use the User Authentication function access prevention 1 Register the user information in the project which is to be written to a CPU module Page 305 User management 2 Write the user information to a CPU module Page 306 Writing reading user information to from CPU module 3 Write programmable controller data to a CPU module Page 250 Writing data to programmable controller Once this procedure has done logging on is required to access to the CPU module in
13. The display format can be selected per row from the pull down list displayed when selecting the display format Operating procedure 1 Register devices labels to be monitored Page 277 Register to Watch window 2 Select Online gt Watch gt Start Watching Watching is added on the Watch window title during monitoring Register to Watch window Register devices labels to be monitored on the Watch window Operating procedure mEnter to register 1 Display the watch window 2 Enter a device label to be registered to Name and press the Enter key The input format of devices labels are as follows e Global device Device name e Local device Program name Device name is not necessary for index register Z e Global device Label name e Local device Program block name label name e Step relay BLO SO When registering structures function blocks or arrays specify them as follows Type Target Specification method Structure Label Structure Label name Structure element Label name Element name Function block Label Function block Label name Label in the function block Label name Label name in the function block Array Label Array Label name excluding array notation Array element and the specific dimension part of Label name one dimensional element number two dimensional array more than two dimensional element number three dimensional element number 14 CHECKING OPERATION OF PROGRAMS 2
14. To access to a project logging on with the registered user information user To access to a CPU module logging on with the registered user information name password is required user name password is required Logged on user Logged on user Project programmable controller Data access Reading writing User information User information KL Page 304 How to use the User Authentication function access KL Page 306 How to use the User Authentication function access prevention prevention The user information registered in a CPU module needs to match with the user information of a project An access level is an operation authority given to a user who logs on to a project CPU module Higher Administrators Administrator level All operations such as user management of projects and CPU modules are performable Developers MDeveloper level Operations except for the user management and the security setting are performable Users MOperator level Lower Referring to a project and monitoring of CPU modules are performable BAvailability of project function Operations required the user authentication The following table shows the functions restricted in projects depending on the access level O Available x Not available i x x Save User management Project revision ee ee x 15 PROTECTING DATA 303 15 4 Preventing Illegal Access to Project BAvailability of CPU module function Operations
15. shirt A keys To select whole The operation is same as the one for selecting multiple Press the ctl A keys elements elements 166 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 6 6 Creating SFC Programs Deleting cutting copying pasting moving SFC elements Some elements cannot be used by itself on the SFC editor When SFC elements were deleted cut pasted the other elements that is not the target for this change may be deleted pasted to make a normal SFC diagram For the following elements the previous elements of them also are deleted For other elements the next elements are deleted together e End step e Step transition that are placed immediately before a branch e The last step transition in a branch A selected element cannot be pasted onto the other place where is not connected with a line on an SFC diagram For copying FBD LD elements between editors only pasting from the FBD LD editor to the SFC diagram editor is available _ Precautions When a Zoom has already been created the Zoom will not be deleted if a step transition action is deleted on an SFC diagram Delete it on the Zoom List screen lt Page 172 Displaying a Zoom list If the action that the Zoom has been created is copied the Zoom is not copied to the destination mStep e When deleting an end step the transition placed immediately before the end step also is deleted Thereby the step that connects to the above transition is changed to an end step If the
16. BE ne Element4 Element5 4 m b Extended Display Automatic e Click the Display Setting button to select the items to be displayed e Click the Check button to check errors before converting programs Importing exporting files Import export the data of the label editor to from a file Operating procedure 1 Open the label editor 2 Select Edit gt Import File f Export to File 2 Formatting CSV files The header titles Class Label Name Data Type etc of a label editor and a CSV file are linked e The data of which header title matches with that of the CSV file is imported to the label editor When excluding the specific data delete the column from the CSV file e When importing the CSV file exported from GX Works3 with different language edit the header title name of the CSV file to match to the header title displayed on the label editor of the import target GX Works3 e The data can be imported even when the column order in CSV file does not match with that in the label editor e When Access from External Device is selected 1 is output As for it is not selected 0 is output When editing a CSV file set 1 or 0 Point The files exported from GX Works2 can be imported to GX Works3 Before importing the CSV file exported from GX Works2 edit the header title name of the CSV file to match the header title on the label editor of GX Works3 114 5 REGISTERING L
17. Detailed display list format e The cursor is jumped to a corresponding instruction on the FBD LD editor by double clicking an instruction on the list e When the program which includes functions function blocks is verified the result is displayed as follows Function A row of FUN BLK START to FUN BLK END Function block A row of FB BLK START to FB BLK END SFC programs The details of the verification target SFC program is displayed in a list format by double clicking the displayed program on the Verify Result screen It is not possible to verify in a Zoom and display the details in a list format when verifying with a programmable controller or the SFC program which has been read from a CPU module without converting all program Precautions Even if the SFC diagram displayed for the verification destination looked totally same as the one for the verification source the verification results may mismatched because a difference will occur to the internal data depending on the creation procedure Block information is excluded from the target of verification Parameters The verification results may mismatched when the same profiles are not registered to the verify destination and the verify source The details of verification target parameter are displayed in a table format by double clicking the displayed parameter on the Verify Result screen MDetailed display table format The cursor is jumped to a corresp
18. Precautions e The exported security key files should be tightly controlled e The security key files created with GX Works3 are not compatible with that of GX Works2 Import Import the exported security key file in a personal computer and register the security key Operating procedure 1 Click the Import button on the Security Key Management screen 2 Selecta file ity on the Import Security Key screen and click the Open button 3 Enter the password set when the security key was exported on the Password Authentication screen and click the OK button MExpiration date e If the expiration date of the security key registered in a personal computer is expired accessing programs re exporting security keys registering security keys in program files and writing security keys to CPU module cannot be performed e To use the same security key after the expiration date export the security key from the exported personal computer again and import it to the personal computer 2 15 PROTECTING DATA 98 15 2 Preventing Illegal Access to Program Protected by Key Registering security key in program file Create a security key on the Security Key Management screen in advance A security key can be registered in program file unit however the same security key will be set to the program files in the project Window Project gt Security gt Security Key Setting Security Key Setting Security Key M
19. Setting Target Data Module Name Data Name Legend CPU Built in Memory Memory Card Type E SD Memory Card g Detail Title Last Change Size Byte dh PROJECTI o Parameter W System Parameter CPU Parameter 6 4 2015 4 55 00 PM 968 f t Module Parameter 6 4 2015 5 01 17 PM 1036 G Memory Card Parameter 6 4 2015 4 55 00 PM Not Calculation i fin Remote Password 6 4 2015 4 55 00 PM 200 Global Label i amp Global Label Setting 6 4 2015 4 55 13 PM 640 ae Global Label Initial Yalue K K S K K oa Be 6 4 2015 4 55 13 PM 108 GLBLINF k Memory Capacity Legend Program Memory Used BO S Es or lies Data Memory Device Label Memory File Storage Area Od Device Label Memory Local Device Area me SD Memory Card mQperating procedure Free 317 320KB Free 4966 5118KB Free 136 200KB Free 812 824KB Free 0 0KB 7 When the data to be written to an SD memory card is included select the corresponding SD memory card from the pull down list of Memory Card Type 2 Select the file to be written then click the Calculate button The methods of the detailed setting for a target file or each data are same as the one on the Online Data Operation screen Refer to the following section K Page 248 WRITING READING DATA TO CPU MODULE 6 CREATI
20. aad i n y eae AUIS l ws E NJE JE 2 gt j m Restrict the operations by detecting mismatches of the security key between Restrict the operations by detecting mismatches of the security key between the program file written in a CPU module and CPU module a Program file IN KeyA the program file and personal computer Program execution O Program execution x a Program file Key A No key or key B The programs are not executed if any of the programs of which security key is unmatched in the CPU module exist The security key written in the CPU module is retained after powering OFF KL Page 296 How to use the Security key authentication function access K Page 300 How to use the Security key authentication function execution prevention prevention Copy of security key The security key registered to a personal computer can be copied by exporting importing it from to other personal computer In addition the expiration date of the security key can be set Writing security key Writing security key Data access unlock Data access unlock Key distribution e NWS amp oe _ f key A Setting method k Page 298 Copying security key 15 PROTECTING DATA 29 15 2 Preventing Illegal Access to Program Protected by Key 9 Precautions The security key registered to a personal computer is not deleted even if GX Works3 is uninstalled Delete the security key on the Security Key Manag
21. Delete the comments set to device comment data in a batch Operating procedure WDelete all device data in the device comment data Select Edit gt Clear All All Devices MDelete device data being displayed on the device comment editor Select Edit gt Clear All Displayed Devices 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 180 6 7 Registering Device Comments Importing to exporting from files Export import device comments from to file When multiple comments are set the comments selected in Available on the Multiple Comments Display Setting screen are output Operating procedure 1 Open the device comment editor then select Edit gt Import File Export to File In another way select data of device comment on the Project view then right click and select Import File Export to File from the shortcut menu 2 Click the Extended Setting button 3 Set the items on the Device Comment Extended Setting screen and click the OK button 4 Click the Yes button Precautions When a device comment that exceeds the applicable number of characters is set on the device comment editor a warning message appears on the Output window and excessive characters are deleted Formatting CSV files The column headers of device comment editor and header names of a CSV file are linked e On the device comment editor only the data of which column titles matches with header names in the CSV file is imported e Data can be impor
22. MITSUBISHI vT A ELECTRIC iig Engineering Software GX Works3 Operating Manual SW1DND GXW3 E SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Read these precautions before using this product Before using this product please read this manual carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product only For the safety precautions for the programmable controller system refer to the user s manual for the module used and the MELSEC iQ R Module Configuration Manual In this manual the safety precautions are classified into two levels A WARNING and A CAUTION WARN NG Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in death or severe injury A CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage Under some circumstances failure to observe the precautions given under JN CAUTION may lead to serious consequences Observe the precautions of both levels because they are important for personal and system safety Make sure that the end users read this manual and then keep the manual in a safe place for future reference Design Precautions N WARNING When data change program change or status control are performed from a personal computer to a running CPU module create an interlock circuit outside the programmable controller to ensure that the
23. cee eee eee 254 Deleting data in CPU module 0 0 ccc eee ee eee nee een eens 256 Considerations for Online data operation 0 0 0 cc ee eee eee ee ees 256 13 2 Verifying Programmable Controller Data 0 0c es 257 13 3 Writing Programs While CPU is in RUN 0 0 cee 258 GOMSIGCRANONG pace gee8eeso54 SoU E ees pbacetea E sees Fe bbe EET EEEE EEE tue 258 Writing data after changing programs partially while CPU module is in RUN Online program change 259 Writing data in units of files while the CPU module is in RUN file batch online change 261 13 4 Reading Writing Deleting User Data 0 ces 262 13 5 Deleting All Files Initialization ss 0cses5 d0c55u co ae ae ee eis ow hoe Me eee eile eed ee dob ern oe eae 263 13 6 Writing Reading Data to from Memory Card 0 00 es 264 Configuration of Memory Card Operation Screen 1 0 ee eee eens 264 Writing to Reading from memory Card n a anaana aaaea eee eee eee 264 CHAPTER 14 CHECKING OPERATION OF PROGRAMS 265 14 1 14 2 14 3 14 4 14 5 14 6 14 7 14 8 14 9 Momor SAS 24 nc eeepc san see tes del emer euew tase oes eer ne sane ease an cee as 266 Check Execution Programs on Program Editor 000 cece ee 268 Edao Sth 5 6a ee ee Sc se ae oe es oe ee ee ee be ee eee bea e ease ee 269 Ol poe eueeeeee sesh eos s eos E bees ems ee ere bees shee oe eneena ee a a een seeneeeu eee ose 270 PRO ED suede eee ue oe
24. character string Label label row number 2 Automatic synchronization When label names alias names are changed on the label editor the changed label names alias names used in a program editor or each editor will also be replaced automatically The labels are distinguished between global labels and local labels in the automatic synchronization Page 120 Entering global labels local labels The programs in which the replaced labels are used will be in the unconverted state If labels names alias are changed check if the change affects control programs using the Cross Reference function 1 4 0 5 REGISTERING LABELS 5 2 Registering Labels Data type A data type can be selected on the Data Type Selection screen displayed by clicking in the data type column on each label editor as well as the direct input There are three kinds of data types Simple Types Structured Data Type and Function Block The data types that can be specified differ Array can be set for the specified data type For details on the data types structures and arrays refer to the following manuals LA MELSEC iQ R Programming Manual Program Design LA MELSEC iQ F FX5 Programming Manual Program Design Simple type Specify a data type in Data Type Labels of the following data types can be used for safety programs e Bit e Word Unsigned Bit String 16 bit e Double Word Unsigned Bit String 32 bit e Word Signed e Double
25. eee eee eens 151 ENGNG HOJ A 4244 neare se aetes doesent bees comers oc bee Obes Sees ee ee eee Sees scat xs 154 Searching for replacing data in prograMS 1 eee eee ees 157 DisMlaViING NESS eect Saket ede ha eek E ee ee Me mee ee E as Gabe eee a beeen ced 157 6 6 Creating SFC Program 0 6 ais4s000 vob ERRAN ee hae oe ee ew RARAN 158 Configuration of SFC diagram editor 2 6 ee ee eee ees 159 Creating SFC diagrams cus 2ecedc ses ea Sb iaden idaraan eeeeun dices vbS400ue obese seer ed dee es 163 Creating displaying Zooms action transition 0 0 0 eee eee 172 Displaying an SFC block liSl ccs ase seneseheetmbes eea ahs ade hae ee Dede Red eee eh aee eae ae 173 Searching for replacing prograMS 1 ce eee eee 175 Displaying the Help nnan ed eace oe oe ed e b clan vad ress ee a amp waa Bee eee oh dere Sel oe aime PA 175 6 7 Registering Device Comments 6 2 ies ccaeie ds Geb eee edb eee eee ee oe ee Se Oe 176 DC VICE CONME 224 6 oo 4a Ae ok ba be hee oe Ge Eee eee oe Beek OS ee eee 176 Configuration of device comment editor 0 0 eee ee ees 178 Creating device comments 0 0c ee ee eee ee eens 179 Deleting unused device comments 00 ccc ee eee eee teen eee eee ees 180 Clearing all device comments 00 ce eee eee eee eee eens 180 Importing to exporting from files eee ee eee 181 Searching device commentS 2 0 0 0 ee eee e nee nee 181 Reading sample comments
26. gt Block Password Setting e Select a POU on the Project view then right click and select Block Password Setting from the shortcut menu Block Password Setting Register change authenticate or delete the passwords for POU POU List Data Name Registration Status ae are i fh ProgPou Registered ets tape Program Language Path Name v Registration Status 15 PROTECTING DATA 293 15 1 Preventing Illegal Access to Program Protected by Password Registering changing block password Register change a block password to POUs Operating procedure 1 Select a POU to set a block password and click the Register Change button 2 Enter the password on the Register Password screen Change Password screen and click the OK button When a block password is registered the icons are displayed on the Project view as shown below Registered Authenticated E fe ProgPou f Local Label MP ProgPou Local Label RE Program fF Program Poin tr By selecting multiple POUs in Data Name a block password can be registered to the selected POUs in batch Authenticating block password Unlock the POU temporarily by authenticating the password which has been set to it Once the password is authenticated the data can be accessed until the project is closed Operating procedure 1 Select the POU to authenticate the block password and click the Authentication button 2 Enter
27. gt Options gt Program Editor gt Ladder Editor gt Ladder Diagram gt Display Format 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 6 3 Creating Ladder Programs 125 126 Read mode Write mode Monitor read mode Monitor write mode The program cannot be edited directly when the mode is switched to the Read mode Monitor read mode However performing any of the following operations changes the programs e When the source function block name is changed or the function block is deleted e When input output labels of the source function block are changed and converted e When the devices labels are replaced with the replacement function by specifying the whole project To prohibit editing the program use the security function Poin tr e The mode can be changed from the pull down list on the mode display area e When No is selected in the following option the ladder editor can be edited directly same as Write mode in Read mode Tool gt Options gt Program Editor gt Ladder Editor gt Ladder Diagram gt Display Format gt Use the Switching Ladder Edit Mode Read Write Monitor Monitor Write 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 6 3 Creating Ladder Programs Entering ladder programs This section explains how to enter a ladder program For details of ladder symbols refer to the following manuals LA MELSEC iQ R Programming Manual Program Design LA MELSEC iQ F FX5 Programming Manual Program Design Inserting contacts coils
28. 1 to 8 optional Data Record 2 the value indicates the data record is displayed Setting No required Specifies the setting number 1 to 1023 in ascending order When specifying the multiple output on one condition set the same number to each of them Conditions Specifies delimited conditions up to 256 characters in space Only the first line in the setting Up to six conditions can be combined in logical operation number needs to be set Timer ms Specifies the delay time 1 to 1000 until the output is performed since the conditions Only the first line in the setting have been satisfied number needs to be set e 1 Output one per line for every scan when it is specified with the reserved word CONTINUE Output required Specifies the output formula up to 100 characters When specifying the multiple output up to 50 in one setting number specify them in the next line Reserve End Record Record Type required 3 the value indicates the end record is displayed Reserve 230 11 SIMULATING PROGRAM 11 3 External Device Operation Simulation Ex Setting examples to CSV file 1 Basic device setting When Y0 is turned ON and Y1 is turned ON or Y2 2 1 YO TRUE AND Y1 TRUE OR LDP TRUE rises XO will be turned ON after 100ms Y2 100 X0 TRUE 100 is assigned to DO 2 1 D0 100 2 Label specification When Label1 is turned ON and Label2 also is 2 2 Label1 TRUE A
29. 9 1 Search for replace devices labels in the program Supported editors Ladder editor ST editor FBD LD editor SFC diagram editor and label editor When searching a device name the global label to which the device is assigned will also be found Window Find Replace gt Find Device Label Replace Device Label E Searching Replacing Devices Labels Find Device Find Device Label v Entire Projects Find Device Label Find Next Find Replace Options Find Find Direction peca All Find Device Point 1 E Digit Replace Device Entire Projects Find Device Label Replace Device Label Find Next All Find Replace All Replace Find Replace Options Find E Multiple Word Find Direction 1 pec Replace Device Point Device Comment Not to Change E Digit E Multiple Word Replace Device Comment Not to Change z Set the items on the screen and click the Find Next button Find Replace Search Options Device point Enter the number of points to be searched replaced counted from the device entered in the Find Device Label field When a label is entered for Find Device Label or Replace Device Label enter 1 Example When X50 for Find Device X100 for Replace Device 3 for Device Point and DEC for entered value are set The devices are replaced as follows X50 gt X100 X51 gt X101
30. ANY_REAL ARRAY ASIN AT ATAN BOOL BY BYTE CAL CALC CASE CONCAT CONFIGURATION CONSTANT COS CTD CTU CTUD D DATE DATE_AND_TIME DELETE DINT DIV DO DT DWORD ELSE ELSIF END_ACTION END_CASE END_CONFIGURATION END_FOR END_FUNCTION END_FUNCTION_BLOCK END IF END_PROGRAM END_REPEAT END_RESOURCE END_STEP END_STRUCT END_TRANSITION END_TYPE END_VAR END_WHILE EN ENO EQ EXIT EXP EXPT FALSE F_EDGE F_TRIG FIND FOR FROM FUNCTION FUNCTION_BLOCK GE GT IF INITIAL_STEP INSERT INT INTERVAL JMP JMPC JMPCN L LD LDN LE LEFT LEN LIMIT LINT LN LOG LREAL LT LWORD MAX MID MIN MOD MOVE MUL MUX N NE NEG NOT OF ON OR ORN P PROGRAM R R1 R_LTRIG READ_ONLY READ_WRITE REAL REPEAT REPLACE RESOURCE RET RETAIN RETC RETURN RIGHT ROL ROR RS R_LEDGE S S1 SD SEL SHL SHR SIN SINGLE SINT SQRT SR ST STEP STN STRING STRUCT SUB TAN TASK THEN TIME TIME_OF_DAY TO TOD TOF TON TP TRANSITION TRUE TYPE UDINT UINT ULINT UNTIL USINT VAR VAR_ACCESS VAR_EXTERNAL VAR_GLOBAL VAR_INPUT VAR_IN_ OUT VAR_OUTPUT WHILE WITH WORD XOR XORN Code Device A B BL C CC CN CS D DX DY E F FD FX FY GLP H I J K L LC LCC LCN LCS LLP LSC LSN LSS conversion LST LSTC LSTN LSTS LT LTC LTN LTS LZ M N P PH R RD S SB SC SD SM SN SS ST STC STN STS SW SZ T TC TN TR TS U V VD W X Y Z ZR ZZ Others Maker defined F
31. D20 1 2 3 4 101 118 105 39 1 For device memory use the characters in the Unicode Basic Multilingual Plane If the characters outside the Unicode Basic Multilingual Plane are specified they may not be edited in the program Clearing whole memory of device memory Clear the data set to device memory data to 0 in batch in the project Select Edit gt Clear All All Devices WDelete the devices displayed on the Device Memory editor Select Edit gt Clear All Displayed Devices 7 SETTING DEVICE MEMORY 7 3 Setting Device Memory 195 Interaction with device initial value Device memory function registers utilizes values to from the device initial value Create a device initial value data to be registered in advance Operating procedure 1 Click the Detailed Conditions button 2 Select Specify Range in the detailed conditions of Device Initial Value 3 Select Edit gt Register Import Device Initial Value The Device Initial Value editor is displayed For details on the Device Initial Value editor refer to the following sections e Registering the value of the device memory to device initial value K Page 199 Setting device initial values e Utilizing values from device initial values to device memory K Page 199 Registering to device memory 7 4 Writing Reading Data to from CPU Module When writing reading the value of device memory to from the CPU module
32. Deselect All N CPU Built in Memory SD Memory Card Module Name Data Name g Last Change Size Byte TT E a a Oo mem o omas e O i LoggingD ata CSW 5 28 2014 3 08 49 AM 690939 T MAINT txt 572272014 6 11 28 PM 34365 Display Memory Capacity Memory Capacity Program Memon ppp Fe Size Calculation Legend Data Memory Free m Increased Device Label Memory File Storage re Fe Deceased a 5 or Less SD Memory Card Free 1 Select Write Read or Delete tab on the User Data Operation screen 2 Select the target files and a write target or read source 3 Click the Execute button 2 2 13 WRITING READING DATA TO CPU MODULE 6 13 4 Reading Writing Deleting User Data Creating deleting folders changing folder name Folders can be created in the CPU built in memory or SD memory card The created folder name can be changed and deleted Create delete a folder or change a folder name on the Browse Folders screen displayed by clicking the Browse button on the User Data Operation screen Creating folders Select the place in which the folder is to be created on the Browse Folders screen right click it and select Create Folder from the shortcut menu Deleting folders changing folder name Select the target folder on the Browse Folders screen right click it and select Delete Folder Change Folder Name from the shortcut menu 13 5 Deleting All Files Initialization
33. File Register File Name Monitor Target List File Name Last Change MEMDUMP_00 DPD 5 13 2015 4 25 32 PM MEMDUMP_01 DPD 5 13 2015 4 26 03 PM MEMDUMP_02 DPD 5 13 2015 4 28 00 PM Precautions If the project that outputs the memory dump result file differs from the one for executing the offline monitor function the device value may not be obtained e Same project Since the number of device points are same the device to be monitored exists in the memory dump result file e Different project When the device to be monitored does not exist in the memory dump result file the value is displayed as an indefinite value Online operation while the offline monitor function has been executed While the offline monitor function has been executed the following online functions are available e Monitor on a program editor e Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor e Watch 288 14 CHECKING OPERATION OF PROGRAMS 14 9 Checking Sampled Data on Program Editor Executing the offline monitor function Operating procedure 1 Click the Add button on the Offline Monitor screen 2 Select the memory dump result file on the Open File screen then click the Open button Multiple selections allowed 3 Select the file to be monitored from the list on the Offline Monitor screen then select Start Monitoring Monitoring the files is executed on the program editor It is also executed on the Watch window and th
34. GX Works3 is an engineering tool for configuring the settings programming debugging and performing the maintenance for programmable controllers such as MELSEC iQ R series MELSEC iQ F series The usability is much better than the existing GX Works2 because the functions and their operability have been improved 1 1 Main Functions of GX Works3 GX Works3 manages programs and parameters in each project for each CPU module GX Works3 has the functions shown below tion function lt Ladder program gt Programs can be created in proper programming languages depending on the processing contents lt ST program gt PB2 Output_Enable lt FBD LD program gt A SS E A PE A ES DA_convett n i MV Set value Storage register D Head No Ko Storage register K1 Dee Storage register Analog value END SFC program Module READY UNITOO1READY SM402 SM400 RETURN 1 BEFORE USING THIS PRODUCT 1 1 Main Functions of GX Works3 EFOR counter 0 TO 10 BY 2 DO IF Yari gt 12345 THEN Yarl Vari counterl ELSIF Yarl lt 22500 THEN Yarl Varl Yar2 ELSE TO 123 DO 15 LEND_FOR 16 Steps 5 512 Transitions 6 512 Actons 1 4 Parameter setting function Parameters of CPU module I O module and Intelligent function module can be set by using this function Setting Item List Input the Setting Ite
35. Labels in which the I O signals and buffer memory of Add module labels when adding the module Page 115 Registering Module a module to be used are already defined information Labels By using the module labels easy to use programs Module labels are created as standard can be created without considering the internal global labels address in the module This label can be used in standard programs only Labels that can be shared among iQ Works Register standard global labels as system Page 116 Registering System supported products These labels are controlled by labels on the global label editor Label MELSOFT Navigator For details on the label types classes and data types refer to the following manuals LA MELSEC iQ R Programming Manual Program Design LA MELSEC iQ F FX5 Programming Manual Program Design 5 REGISTERING LABELS 1 0 6 5 1 About Labels 5 2 Registering Labels This section explains how to register the labels Configuration of label editor This section explains the configuration of the label editor The editor to be displayed will differ depending on the label types Poin tr The display format and details of operation settings for each function can be set by setting the following option Tool gt Options gt Other Editor gt Label Editor Common Global label Project view gt Label gt Global Label gt global label MiLocal label Project view gt Program
36. Library By selecting the Library tab the POUs which have been registered in the library file are displayed For details on how to register POUs refer to the following section KL Page 221 Registering to library list 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS 2 3 Screen Configuration 2 4 Menu List Basic menus Project gt New gt Open gt Close gt Save gt Save As gt Delete gt Project Verify gt Project Revision gt Register Revision gt Project Revision gt Revision List gt Change Module Type gt Data Operation gt New Data gt Data Operation gt New Folder gt Data Operation gt Rename Data gt Data Operation gt Delete Data gt Data Operation gt Copy Data gt Data Operation gt Paste Data gt Data Operation gt Add New Module gt Data Operation gt Property gt Intelligent Function Module gt Module Parameter List gt Open Other Format File gt GX Works2 Format gt Open Project gt Open Other Format File gt GX Works2 Format gt Open User Library gt Open Other Format File gt GX Works3 Format gt Open User Library gt Library Operation gt Export Library gt Library Operation gt Register to Library List gt Library Operation gt Delete from Library List gt Library Operation gt Update the Display Information of Library gt Security gt User Mana
37. Perform initialization to delete files in a CPU module or a memory card This function is used to use the CPU module and the memory card for the first time or to clear all data stored in them Once initialized the following processing is performed to each memory e Data memory Delete all folder all files in the program memory and data memory e Device label memory Delete all files in the file storage area in the device label memory e SD memory card Delete all folders all files in the SD memory card Operating procedure Delete all files on the CPU Memory Operation screen Refer to the following section K Page 331 Initializing Clearing Memory 13 WRITING READING DATA TO CPU MODULE 2 13 5 Deleting All Files Initialization 63 13 6 Writing Reading Data to from Memory Card This section explains how to writing reading data to from a memory card attached to a personal computer This operation is used for example when data can not be written read by attaching a memory card to a CPU module However this writing reading function cannot be used in a safety project For details on the writing reading data to a CPU module attached a memory card refer to the following section K Page 248 Writing Reading Programmable Controller Data Configuration of Memory Card Operation screen Window Tool gt Memory Card gt Write to Memory Card Read from Memory Card The following screen is an example when writing data Memory
38. Property from the shortcut menu 4 CREATING MODULE CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM AND SETTING PARAMETERS 88 4 1 Creating Module Configuration Diagram Setting parameters on the Module Configuration Diagram Set the parameter of the control CPU and module on the Module Configuration Diagram Operating procedure 1 Select the module to edit the parameters 2 Set the items on the Input the Configuration Detailed Information window 3 Select Edit gt Parameter gt Fix i When setting details of the module click the Detailed Setting button to display the parameter editor MFixing parameters After editing an object on the Module Configuration Diagram the parameters of the edited object will be undefined status The operations that the parameters become undefined are as follows e Adding or deleting a module e Removing a module from the slot or placing the removed module on the slot For FX5CPU removing connecting a module from to the CPU module e Cutting and pasting modules e Connecting modules e Performing undo redo e Changing property of a module e Performing the Start XY Batch Input function e Performing the Default Points Batch Input function e Setting the Module status setting empty e Operations on the Input the Configuration Detailed Information window The fixed parameters are reflected to the following screens e Project view For a new module information the module information is added to the Project view e
39. RAD P RADD P SIN P SIND P TAN P TAND P UDINT2DBL P UDINT2FLT P UINT2DBL P UINT2FLT P RND P SRND P ZPOP P ZPUSH P UDCNT1 UDCNT2 STMR TTMR ROTC RAMPQ PLSY PWM SPD MTR ZRRDB P ZRWRB P ADRSET P DUTY TIMCHK DFROM P DFROMD P DTO P DTOD P FROM P FROMD P TO P TOD P TYPER D UNIINFRD P LOGTRG LOGTRGR S 2PID S O S ABS S ADD S AMR S AT1 S AVE S BC S BPI S BUMP S D S DBND S DED S DIV S DUTY S ENG S FG S FLT S HS S I S IENG S IFG S IN S IPD S LIMT S LLAG S LS S MID S MOUT S MUL S ONF2 S ONF3 S OUT1 S OUT2 S PGS S PHPL S PID S PIDP S PSUM S R S SEL S SPI S SQR S SUB S SUM S TPC S VLMT1 S VLMT2 APPENDICES APPENDIX Appendix 5 Using Simulation Function Enabled disabled parameter items The Simulation function does not support some parameter setting items The following shows the parameter setting items that are supported by the Simulation function system parameter Slots Base Power Extension Cable Setting I O Assignment Setting I O Assignment Setting Module Name Module Status Setting Module Points Start XY Control PLC Setting Setting of Points Occupied by Empty Slot Multiple CPU Setting Number of CPU modules Communication Setting between CPU Fixed Scan Communication Function Fixed Scan Communication Area Setting CPU parameter Operation Related Timer Limit Setting Setting RUN PAUSE Contact
40. The cursor is jumped to the corresponding row of the inline structured text by double clicking the STB e When the program which includes functions function blocks is verified the result is displayed as follows Function A row of FUN BLK START to FUN BLK END Function block A row of FB BLK START to FB BLK END ST programs Detailed display The cursor is jumped to a corresponding row on the ST editor by double clicking a row on the verification result 3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 78 3 5 Verifying Projects FBD LD programs The details of verification target FBD LD program is displayed in a list format by double clicking the displayed program on the Verify Result screen It is not available to display the details in a list format when verifying with a programmable controller or an FBD LD program which has been read from a CPU module without converting all program Precautions The verification results may mismatched because a difference occurred to the position information of elements if the version of GX Works3 which were used for converting the program files of the verify destination was different from the one of the verify source In this case edit convert and save the programs in both the verify source and the verify destination with the same version of GX Works3 and perform the verification again When verifying with a programmable controller perform the Write to PLC or Online Program Change in advance
41. USB miniB type SANWA SUPPLY INC USB adapter USB B type USB miniB type ELECOM Co Ltd For any considerations when accessing a CPU module refer to the following section K Page 247 Considerations of communication with the CPU module using a USB cable Configuration of USB connection Only one CPU module can be connected to a personal computer at the same time Connection to a CPU module is not applicable for the following configuration lt Inapplicable configurations gt e Connection to several programmable controller CPUs from the personal computer with several USB ports CPU module USB cable CPU module U SB Cable e Connection to several programmable controller CPUs via USB hub CPU module USB cable CPU module 1 BEFORE USING THIS PRODUCT 1 5 Connection Configurations between Personal Computer and CPU Module 25 26 nnection via Ethernet board RCPU FX5CPU GX Works3 SW1DND GXW3 E OOI l Driver Programmable controller on Programmable controller on own other station own station GX Works3 SW1DND GXW3 E FX5 232ADP A RS 232 cable E FX5CPU GX Works3 SW1DND GXW3 E RS 232 cable FX5CPU FX5 232 BD RCPU does not support this connection RS 232 cable FX 232CAB 1 Mitsubishi Electric Corporation 1 BEFORE USING THIS PRODUCT 1 5 Connection Configurations between Personal
42. Winitial values of local labels The operation differs between writing to and reading from the programmable controller FX5CPU does not support it e When writing data to a programmable controller write the local labels as Local Label Initial Value e When reading data from a programmable controller read the program to read Initial Value of local labels WExecution type which is overwritten at reading program e When reading CPU parameters and program file at once The program file is overwritten with the execution type in accordance with the program setting of the read CPU parameter e When reading only a program file The program file s overwrite in accordance with the parameter settings in GX Works3 e When the CPU parameter setting does not exist in both CPU module and GX Works3 The program file is overwritten with No Execution Type MSetting read range Set the range of a program program file to be read from a CPU module on the Program Detail Setting screen displayed by clicking the Detailed button In addition the secured steps for online program change can be obtained from CPU module FX5CPU does not support it 2 4 13 WRITING READING DATA TO CPU MODULE 9 13 1 Writing Reading Programmable Controller Data Global label Winitial value accessing from external device The operation differs between writing to and reading from the programmable controller FX5SCPU does not support the initial value of labels nor the setting
43. gt Ladder Editor ST Editor gt Setting for Automatic Registration to Watch Window 2 During monitoring select the range included in devices labels to be registered to the Watch window 278 14 CHECKING OPERATION OF PROGRAMS 14 4 Checking Current Values by Registering Devices Labels Changing current values The value can be entered directly in the Current Value column during monitoring For a bit device select a row and double click with pressing the key or press the snit Erter keys to change the current value For SO BLO SO BLO steps blocks are activated deactivated by changing the current values L Page 273 Changing active status Precautions When Use File Register of Each Program is selected in File Setting of the CPU parameter the file register file that is available at END is changed Therefore changing the current values while specifying file registers for each program cannot be performed Importing to exporting from file Export import the information displayed on the Watch window to from a file Operating procedure Select Edit gt Import File Export to File 14 CHECKING OPERATION OF PROGRAMS 279 14 4 Checking Current Values by Registering Devices Labels 14 5 Checking Processing Time of Program Check the processing time of the program being executed using the Program List Monitor function FX5CPU does not support this function Window Online gt Monitor gt Program Lis
44. instructions arguments Operating procedure inserting from the element entry dialog Enter an instruction and arguments on the element entry dialog displayed by selecting a cell to be entered or edited and double clicking or pressing the Erter key For the Insert mode press the key to switch to the Overwrite mode instructions are inserted on the cursor position Therefore if an instruction is already inserted in the selected cell the existing instruction will be moved back 2 The cursor position on the ladder editor can be moved by pressing the EVENE keys To select an instruction argument press the At e E keys Options of instructions labels can be displayed by pressing the ctl Bee keys inserting from the Enter Ladder screen with description Select an instruction and enter arguments on the Enter Ladder screen displayed by clicking the Extd Dspl button on the element entry dialog The frequently used instructions can be registered as Favorites by right clicking and selecting Add to Favorites from the shortcut menu The instructions added to Favorites can be selected in the lowest cell of List in the pull down list Binserting from the menu toolbar Select a cell to where an element is added on the ladder editor then select Edit gt Ladder Symbol gt element It can also be added by selecting from the toolbar Binserting from the Element Selection window Select a
45. it may be divided into several pages and printed out as shown below Check the layout in the print preview before printing The shaded area indicates the partially overlapped area between the pages TIMER 100 FB TIMER_100 FB X2 oil Vake D rd Nese t EPrinting SFC programs e Statements and notes in a Zoom are excluded from the print target of Statement Note e For the SFC diagram editor SFC elements may be divided into several pages and printed out as shown below Check the layout in the print preview before printing The shaded area indicates the partially overlapped area between the pages Printing the product information list The information in the specified CSV file is printed out within the range of 500 rows x 20 columns 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS 2 9 Printing Data 53 MEMO 4 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS 5 2 9 Printing Data SYSTEM DESIGN AND SETTINGS This part explains the system design such as project management and parameter label settings 3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 4 CREATING MODULE CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM AND SETTING PARAMETERS 5 REGISTERING LABELS 99 3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT This chapter explains the basic operations and the project management 3 1 Project File and Data Configuration The projects created in GX Works3 are saved in workspace formats or single file formats The data created in the project is
46. restore after reading sample comment Precautions When reading sample comments of Intelligent function module the data size may exceed the memory capacity of the CPU module and data may not be written to a CPU module In this case prepare an SD memory card For FX5CPU the writable capacity is the same as that of the CPU module even when data is written to an SD memory card 1 89 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 6 7 Registering Device Comments 6 8 Checking Programs This section explains how to check if improper input or inconsistency of programs exists FX5CPU does not support this function Window Tool gt Check Program bea ge E Check Content Y Instruction Check I V Duplicated Coil Check D V Ladder Check L V Device Label Check V Consistency pair CheckfC Check Target C Target the Whole Program W Target the Current Program P Program Namet MAIN SFC Check Target All Blocks 4 Current Block B Sai When the check result has an error the error message is displayed on the Output window Take corrective actions according to the displayed contents Check targets for duplicated coil WTarget instruction The following instructions are checked as targets EGP EGF OUT OUTH SET PLS PLF FF DELTA DELTAP SFT SFTP MC Pointer BLKMOVB MOVB CMLB When the device is T C ST TL LC LST it is excluded from the check MiTarget device list The following de
47. then select Edit gt Modify gt Switch between Jump Symbol and Connection Line 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 1 6 6 Creating SFC Programs 69 HEnd step jump After switching an end step to a jump on the selection branch delete the unnecessary step Ex 1 Select an end step to be changed Step3 and select Edit gt Modify gt End Step Jump Then select a jump destination Step0 2 Delete the unnecessary step Step3 Jump end step ex Select a step which places before a jump then select the Edit gt Modify gt End Step Jump 1 70 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 6 6 Creating SFC Programs For a jump on a selection branch insert a step before a jump to be changed and change the step to an end step Ex 1 Insert a step Step3 before a jump to be changed 2 Select the inserted step then select Edit gt Modify gt End Step Jump Jump selection branch connection Change a jump destination to the step which is immediately after the branch to be connected then switch it to a connection line 1 Select the transition Transition5 that places immediately before a jump to be changed and select Edit gt Modify gt Switch between Jump Symbol and Connection Line Then select the step Step4 which will be connected with the connection line 2 Select the jump and select Edit gt Modify gt Switch between Jump Symbol and Connection Line Step4 C TransitionS
48. this time 3 Close the screen once writing data has been completed The SMM Simulator screen is displayed 4 Select Online gt Write to PLC to display Online Data Operation screen again 5 Select the checkbox of the Simple Motion Module Setting to be written on the Online Data Operation screen displayed and click the Execute button 6 When the Write to Module screen is displayed and the message to confirm whether or not to overwrite the contents in the flash ROM appears click the Yes button f Click the RESET button on the GX Simulator3 screen The cooperative simulation is started 11 3 External Device Operation Simulation This section explains how to debug by using the I O System Setting function I O System Setting function The I O System Setting is a function that enables to debug without changing programs by simulating operations of input output devices Precautions e The simulator is in STOP state the I O System Setting function will not operate When the state is changed STOP RUN it will operate from the beginning of I O system setting data e Labels are obtained from a project that is open at the first execution of the I O System Setting If the labels are edited and written to a simulator after startup they are not reflected Close the I O System Setting screen and start it again Execution procedure of I O System Setting function Start GX Simulators Pag
49. 15 3 Preventing Illegal Program Execution To prevent an illegal execution for programs STOP PAUSE RUN written in a CPU module use the Security authentication function For details on the Security key authentication function refer to the following section K Page 295 Security key authentication function How to use the Security key authentication function execution prevention Procedure to enable security 1 Create a security key Page 297 Creating deleting security key 2 Register the security key in the program file to be written to the CPU module Page 299 Registering security key in program file 3 Write the program files to the CPU module Page 250 Writing data to programmable controller A CPU module which does not have the same security key as the one registered in the program file cannot execute the programs Procedure to make locked programs executable 1 Setthe Specify Connection Destination to access to the CPU module L Page 235 Specification of Connection Destination 2 Write the same security key as the protected program file to the CPU module Page 301 Writing deleting security key to from CPU module The programs can be executed unless otherwise the security key set to the program file or CPU module is changed 15 PROTECTING DATA 300 15 3 Preventing Illegal Program Execution Writing deleting security key to from CPU module By writing the same security key to the CPU module execution
50. 22 16 DIAGNOSING MODULE 3 16 4 Checking Error History Operation History 1 l SAMPLING DEVICE DATA For MELSEC iQ R series CPU modules data can be sampled by using the data logging function 17 1 Data Logging Function This section explains the label and device data logging methods How to use the data logging function 1 Set the internal buffer capacity of the CPU module which is used for the data logging function Page 323 Setting internal buffer capacity for the data logging function 2 Configure the data logging settings with CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool and write the setting to the CPU module 3 Start data logging with CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool 4 Check the data logging results with GX LogViewer For information on how to use CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool refer to the following manual TI MELSEC iQ R CPU Module User s Manual Application For information on how to use GX LogViewer refer to the following manual LA GX LogViewer Version 1 Operating Manual Setting internal buffer capacity for the data logging function Set the internal buffer capacity for the data logging function using Internal Buffer Capacity Setting in Memory Device Setting of the CPU parameter Write the parameter to the CPU module after the setting is configured However set the capacity within the range that meets the following conditions when the data logging function is used with the Memory
51. 3E30 Address Enter the address of buffer memory to be monitored in decimal nexadecimal format Monitoring blocks steps in an SFC program in batch Enter BLO in Device name when monitoring blocks and enter BLO O there when monitoring steps Point Fonts can be changed KL Page 48 Checking and Changing Colors and Fonts 14 CHECKING OPERATION OF PROGRAMS 2 14 3 Checking Device Buffer Memory in Batch 735 Changing current values The current value can be changed by double clicking the cell of the device or pressing the during monitoring For word devices change the current values by registering the target device to be changed into the Watch window Page 277 Checking Current Values by Registering Devices Labels e For TC devices only contacts and current values can be changed e Since the digit specification Example K4DX0 cannot be used for the following devices the current values can be changed only when Bit and Word or bit order of 0 F is specified in Display Format E9 DX DY FX FY JO XO JO O JO BO JO SBO e Since the bit specification example Z0 0 cannot be used for Z device the current values cannot be changed when Bit and Word in Display format or bit order of 0 F is specified in Display Format E3 e For SO BLO SO BLO blocks steps are activated deactivated by changing the current values 1 gt Page 273 Changing active status Considerations when monitoring file registers The operation of file re
52. 5 30 2014 4 34 50 6 28 2014 Enable Enable Disable sorma aana enable fie O ee daci Creation Date Displays the registered date of the security key Expiration Date Displays the expiration date set when the security key was exported Export Displays Enable Disable that indicates whether re exporting the security key is enabled disabled set when the security key was exported Protection Target Selection Displays Enable Disable that indicates whether selecting data to be protected is enabled disabled set when the security key was exported Key Registration to CPU Displays Enable Disable that indicates whether writing data to CPU module is enabled disabled set when the security key was exported Creating security key Create a security key and register it to the personal computer Number of security key registration The security keys can be created for each logon user Up to 128 security keys combined with the created security keys and imported ones can be registered for each logon user 1 Click the New button 2 Enter the security key name on the New Security Key screen and click the OK button Deleting security key Delete the security key registered to the personal computer If the security key used to lock the project is deleted the locked data in the project cannot be accessed edited After deleting the security key even when the security key with the same name as the deleted one is recrea
53. 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 119 172 1713 114 115 116 11 136 137 157 158 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 17 198 199 218 213 D w an e ard tod eed os Ean u n oo 5 co uf onf oo I Active Block E Non Active Block Uncreated Block Monitoring active steps Display current active inactive status of all steps that exist in a specified block in a list Up to five monitor screens can be displayed at once Move the cursor on a block to be monitored on the Block Batch Monitor screen then click the Active Step Monitor button 274 14 CHECKING OPERATION OF PROGRAMS 14 2 Check Execution Programs on Program Editor 14 3 Checking Device Buffer Memory in Batch Check the devices and buffer memory using the Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor function When the multiple monitoring screens are opened lead time to start monitoring and monitoring intervals may become longer Multiple CPU shared memory buffer memory of multiple CPU system can be monitored only by the Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor function Online gt Monitor gt Device Buffer Memo
54. 7 2 Configuration of Device Memory Editor This section explains the screen configuration of the Device Memory editor Project view gt Device gt Device Memory gt data name Toolbar imde 16 wi O oP Device memory editor WAIN Device Memon Device Name DO v Detailed Conditions Detailed Condition Device Initial Value Do Not Specify Range X Device Comment Display MAIN Z a 7 D0 i i E D8 i D16 0 Q D 0 0 0 0 O gt j m Separation bar Device Name x0 v Detailed Conditions Device Name 0 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 String a x0 i i i i E 80 x100 x180 X Only the range of the device initial value is displayed when selecting Specify Range from Device Initial Value Poin tr Fonts can be changed KL Page 48 Checking and Changing Colors and Fonts Setting display format Set the display format Display Unit Format Data Display Format String Display Format Value Bit Order Switch No of Points of the device value being displayed 1 Select View gt Display Format Detailed Setting H 2 Set the items on the Display Format screen and click the OK button The setting can be performed by clicking 18 w D S 1 92 7 SETTING DEVICE MEMORY 7 2 Configuration of Device Memory Editor 7 3 Setting Device Memory This section ex
55. Analog output 131072 Simple motion 131072 Pulse I O Positioning 131072 Serial communication 65536 Ethernet 2097152 CC Link 32768 CC Link IE Field Network 65536 CC Link IE Controller Network 2097152 Information module Network module Q series Analog input 131072 Analog output Pulse I O and Positioning Information module Network module Analog I O Temperature input Temperature control module Loop control Energy measuring module Link devices of network module The following shows the link devices and the number of points for network module supported by the Simulation function MELSEC iQ R series Network module Ethernet 512 When CC Link IE Field Network is used 512 CC Link IE Controller Network 512 Ox JO SW 512 J 8192 JO Y 8192 CC Link IE Field Network 512 JO X 16384 3 4 APPENDICES APPENDIX 5 Appendix 5 Using Simulation Function Considerations The following describes the considerations on debugging programs using the Simulation function Simulation time Since the instruction processing speed differs between the Simulation function and CPU module the simulator operates as follows e The simulation time is calculated by adding the average execution time per one instruction which is calculated based on the PC MIX value at every internal instruction execution of a CPU module The simulator operates behind the actual time when the simulation time takes longer than the actual time due to the perf
56. CC of the counter device i Word Unsigned Bit String 16 bit The same operation as the current value CN of the counter device Each of timer retentive timer and counter requires 2 words Lower address Upper address 09 Mi Retentive timer Counter 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 4 6 9 Converting Programs 87 Long timer long retentive timer long counter Long timer type long retentive timer type and long counter type are the maker defined structures that have the same data type as MELSEC 32 bit timer device LT bit retentive timer device LST and bit counter device LC The member configurations of each data type are as follows Long timer Bit type The same operation as the contact LTS of the timer device Bit type The same operation as the coil LTC of the timer device Double Word Unsigned Bit String 32 bit The same operation as the current value LTN of the timer device Bit type The same operation as the contact LSTS of the retentive timer device Bit type The same operation as the coil LSTC of the retentive timer device The same operation as the current value LSTN of the retentive timer device Long retentive timer Long counter Bit type The same operation as the contact LCS of the counter device Bit type The same operation as the coil LCC of the counter device Double Word Unsigned Bit String 32 bit The same operation as the current value LCN of the counter device Each of
57. CREATING MODULE CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM AND SETTING PARAMETERS 4 2 Setting Parameters Poin tr e The arbitrary slave station can be displayed on top of the cell by right clicking on the list of link devices and selecting Select Slave Station from the shortcut menu Input Remote Rx Output Remote RY Input Remote RX hallo gt Host STA Target STA Host STA Target STA Host STA Target 5 Refresh Link Refresh Link Refresh Link Explanation STA Explanation eee SERRE Device Rx0 Device Device Device Display Slawe Station List M2 Display Link Device List M3 Select Start I O No gt RXS M4 rs ae l Select Slawe Station gt 01 RIG1BT11 M6 Display Detailed Information 02 AJ65VBTCE3 8D Mz Display Option 03 GT27 X Ma Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor 04 SC GU3 01 Select the station number 4 The station number 4 is displayed of the slave station at the top e The Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor screen is displayed by right clicking a refresh device or buffer memory from the list of link devices and selecting Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor from the shortcut menu Checking changing the number of Intelligent function module parameters Display the setting information of the start XY addresses initial settings and auto refresh settings of Intelligent function modules in a list Intelligent function module parameters
58. Card Operation Display Setting Drive Path Parameter Program F Select All Legend Open Close AI T Deselect All N E Memory Card Module Name Data Name Detail Last Change Size Byte Untitled Project o Parameter p System Parameter CPU Parameter 5729 2015 4 48 42 PM Not Calculation B Module Parameter 5729 2015 4 45 13 PM Not Calculation E Memory Card Parameter 5 29 2015 4 29 47 PM Not Calculation tin Remote Password 6 29 2015 4 29 47 PM Not Calculation o Global Label amp Global Label Setting 5 29 2015 4 29 51 PM Not Calculation o Global Label Initial Value The data name in gray indicates that it is in the unconverted state Writing to Reading from memory card Write Read data to from a memory card The file which is in the SMELPRuJ folder of the specified drive path is the target to be read written Operating procedure 1 Select the Write tab Read tab on the Memory Card Operation screen 2 Set the drive path of the write target read source then click the Execute button 2 4 13 WRITING READING DATA TO CPU MODULE 6 13 6 Writing Reading Data to from Memory Card 14 CHECKING OPERATION OF PROGRAMS This chapter explains how to check the execution status of Intelligent function modules and CPU modules connected to a personal computer The functions to check the execution status are as follows Purpose Function name
59. Computer and CPU Module 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS This chapter explains the screen configuration and basic operations of GX Works3 2 1 Starting and Exiting GX Works3 This section explains the operation methods for starting and exiting GX Works3 Start Operating procedure Select MELSOFT gt GX Works3 gt GX Works3 from Windows Start 7 1 Select All apps on the Start screen or Start gt All Programs Exit Operating procedure Select Project gt Exit GX Works3 Point GX Works3 can also be started exited from MELSOFT Navigator 2 2 Switching Displayed Language Since GX Works3 supports displaying in multiple languages switching the language such as on the menu bar is available on a personal computer Window View gt Switch Display Language Switch Display Lanquage Display Lanquage pea seas posesses sneneauee secsneusesnss seasessed sesseesedssod suonesoce basqueseseasuoossnsbes vaspeseesssu seeeetsvessonsessosooesscoss i It will be valid From next start Precautions If the display language differs from the one for the operating system the text may get cut off 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS 27 2 1 Starting and Exiting GX Works3 2 3 Screen Configuration This section explains the screen configuration that is displayed of GX Works3 starts up Main frame The main frame configuration is shown below The follo
60. Data Reading Writing 30 15 7 Restricting Access from Other Than Specific Communication Route To restrict the access from other than specific communication route use the Remote password function Remote password function By setting a password for the CPU module accessing via the specified RJ71EN71 serial communication module and built in Ethernet CPU is limited For the modules that support remote password setting and details on the remote password setting refer to the user s manual used How to use remote password Procedure to enable security 1 Set the remote password Page 311 Setting remote password 2 Specify Remote Password and write the data to the CPU module Page 250 Writing data to programmable controller The access to the CPU module will be restricted Procedure to access CPU module locked by the security function Entering the password is required in order to access the CPU module The access is permitted when the entered password is correct 1 Access to the CPU module writing or reading operation Page 250 Writing data to programmable controller Page 254 Reading data from programmable controller 2 Unlock the remote password by following the message L Page 311 Setting remote password When the entered password is correct the access to the CPU module will be permitted 1 15 PROTECTING DATA 3 0 15 7 Restricting Access from Other Than Specific Communication Route Setting remote passwo
61. Dump function and the realtime monitor function of CPU module The total of data logging buffer capacities Memory dump buffer capacity Realtime monitor buffer capacity lt 3072 KB Each buffer capacity can be checked with the following e Data logging buffer capacity Memory dump buffer capacity CPU parameter e Realtime monitor buffer capacity The realtime monitor setting of GX LogViewer 17 SAMPLING DEVICE DATA 2 17 1 Data Logging Function 3 3 MEMO 17 SAMPLING DEVICE DATA 324 17 1 Data Logging Function 18 CHECKING CHANGING CPU MODULE OPERATION Check the operation status and change the operation of CPU module with GX Works3 Set the clock on CPU module Clock setting Page 325 Setting Clock in CPU Module RUN STOP PAUSE RESET the CPU module connected to GX Works3 Remote operation Page 326 CPU Module Remote Operation To perform the functions of RnSFCPU Switch Safety Operation Mode Page 327 Operations of RnSFCPU Check Safety Data Identity Check the usage of data memory Memory management Page 330 Checking Memory Usage Clear the values of data memory Clear value Page 331 Initializing Clearing Memory 18 1 Setting Clock in CPU Module This section explains how to set the clock on a CPU module Window Online gt Set Clock PLC Time Zone Time Zone UTC 09 00 Comment Date Time Specify Execution Target Curren ecified Station v 4 May 2014 gt th Sp Specify Target Specify Group No Netwo
62. HEJPROJECT2 ROS Select the project to be deleted and click the Delete button When the project file does not exist after deleting a workspace format project the message to confirm whether to delete the workspace itself is displayed If the project is deleted the workspace folder is deleted but workspacelist xml remains 3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 3 2 Creating Project File 70 3 3 Creating Data This section explains how to create each data Project data Character strings that cannot be used Refer to the following section KL Page 334 Unusable Character String Reserved Word Maximum number of data that can be created in one project The number of data that can be created in each data type is as follows Program block 2048 Function block and function 960 Precautions For data names use the characters in the Unicode Basic Multilingual Plane If the characters outside the Unicode Basic Multilingual Plane are specified they may not be edited in the program 3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 71 3 3 Creating Data 72 Creating projects Create new data in a project Window Select the data on the Project view then select Project gt Data Operation gt New Data right click and select New Data CP from the shortcut menu a New Data ese Basic Setting Data Type H Program Block Data Name ProgPoul Detail Setting Program Configuration Program Language w Lad
63. Ladder placing and connecting an element LD Programs Diagram SFC Sequential A graphic language for clarifying execution orders and Page 158 Creating SFC Function Chart execution conditions Programs 1 Safety programs are supported Features and types of POU The POUs which can be used in a program are as follows Function block Outputs an operation result in accordance with values of the internal memory Page 214 Creating Function Blocks Function Always outputs the same operation result against the same input value Page 217 Creating Functions Inputting global devices local devices To use global devices and local devices individually enter the devices as follows Note that FX5CPU does not support local devices e Standard global device Enter a device name Example D10 Safety global device Prefix SA to the device name Example SA D10 e Standard local device Prefix to the device name Example D10 Safety local device Prefix SA to the device name Example SA D10 For details of the global device local device refer to the following manual MELSEC iQ R CPU Module User s Manual Application Entering global labels local labels When a label with the same name exists in both global labels and local labels the label in a program is handled as follows e After a global label and a local label are registered the label names are entered in the program Treated as a local label e After a global label is registered
64. Line 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 165 6 6 Creating SFC Programs Inserting adding selection branches and simultaneous branches inserting a branch below a step transition Select a step transition then select Edit gt Insert gt Selection Branch Simultaneous Branch When a selection branch simultaneous branch was inserted the lacking SFC elements are inserted automatically to make it be a proper SFC diagram MAdding a selection branch on the right side of a transition selection condition Select a transition selection branch to which a new one will be added then select Edit gt Insert gt Selection Branch Leg Multiple selections allowed MAdding a simultaneous branch on the right side of a step simultaneous branch Select a step simultaneous branch to which a new one is added then select Edit gt Insert gt Simultaneous Branch Leg Multiple selections allowed SoSPeaxxhe Common operations of SFC elements Select To select a single Click an element to be selected Move the cursor on an element to be selected element To select multiple e Click multiple elements with the Init key held down Select multiple elements by moving the cursor with elements e Click the background of the SFC diagram editor and drag the Shift key held down it diagonally To select a network Click an element then select Edit gt Select Network Select an element then press the ctrl
65. MAX MID MIN MOD MOVE MUL MUX N NE NEG NOT OF ON OR ORN P PROGRAM R R1 R_LTRIG READ_ONLY READ_WRITE REAL REPEAT REPLACE RESOURCE RET RETAIN RETC RETURN RIGHT ROL ROR RS R_LEDGE S S1 SD SEL SHL SHR SIN SINGLE SINT SQRT SR ST STEP STN STRING STRUCT SUB TAN TASK THEN TIME TIME _OF_DAY TO TOD TOF TON TP TRANSITION TRUE TYPE UDINT UINT ULINT UNTIL USINT VAR VAR_ACCESS VAR_EXTERNAL VAR_GLOBAL VAR_INPUT VAR_IN_ OUT VAR_OUTPUT WHILE WITH WORD XOR XORN Code Device A B BL C CC CN CS D DX DY E F FD FX FY GLP H I J K L LC LCC LCN LCS LLP LSC LSN LSS conversion LST LSTC LSTN LSTS LT LTC LTN LTS LZ M N P PH R RD S SB SC SD SM SN SS ST STC STN STS SW SZ T TC TN TR TS U V VD W X Y Z ZR ZZ Others Maker defined FB FUN MELSEC instructions APPENDICES APPENDIX 33 Appendix 2 Unusable Character String Reserved Word 5 ter strings for path name Invalid Symbol h lt gt OXOO7T AARSE 0xD800 to 0xDBFF 0xDC00 to 0xDFFF U 0000 to U 001F U 0080 to U 009F U 00A0 to U 00BF U FFFE U FFFF Windows reserved word COM1 COM2 COM3 COM4 COM5 COM6 COM7 COMB COM9 LPT1 LPT2 LPT3 LPT4 LPT5 LPT6 LPT7 LPT8 LPT9 AUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK END_ MARK ter string for library name Invalid Symbol Space amp VG thasebnSs gt 2 LVLS l 0x007f onaracer 0xD800 to 0xDBFF 0xDC00 to OxDF
66. Only data of which components match with the filtering conditions are displayed in the tree format when filtering display is performed for the structure data names or the instance names of the function block Deleting filtering condition Filtering display of the column can be canceled by deleting the keyword entered in each filtering condition column HKeywords for filtering condition The wild card characters can be used in a filtering condition as shown below When the filtering condition is set for the device label column l Specify any one of characters except for the characters in the K4X 3 0 K4X40 bracket Specify character strings within the range in the bracket D 0 2 DO D1 D2 9 SEARCHING DATA 21 1 9 6 Displaying Reference Information List of Devices Labels 9 Displaying Device Usage List Display the usage of the specified devices Supported editors Ladder editor ST editor FBD LD editor SFC diagram editor label editor and parameter editor Window Find Replace gt Device List Device List Eal Mo bp Entire Projects D Setting lt gt J Right click Device Contact Count Coil Count Parameter Count Comment A v Jevice M1 Contact Count M2 Coil Count M3 Parameter Count M4 Comment Operating procedure Set the items and press the Enter key To specify the range to be searched select the search location of devices labels by cli
67. Page 192 Setting display format MAIN Device Memory Device Name D8 v Detailed Conditions Device Name 0 1 2 3 4 D8 0 0 D 0 D16 D24 4 2 Enter D8 to Device Name and select the range of the device value to be set 3 Select Edit gt FILL 4 Set the items on the FILL screen and click the OK button 1234 Device Name D8 v Detailed Conditions saree Name D24 I lt nm J a i 1 94 7 SETTING DEVICE MEMORY 7 3 Setting Device Memory Setting character strings Set a character string to a device Set the following value in a word multi point format Device D20 Character string Device memory 1 Setthe display format Page 192 Setting display format MAIN Device Memory Device Name D20 2 Enter D20 to Device Name and select Edit gt Enter Device Name Character String 3 Enter a character string on the Enter Character String v Detailed Conditions screen and click the OK button Device Name D20 Device Name D20 D28 D36 4 Poin tr e Character string can be entered to String column directly e Click the Read button on the Enter Character String screen to read the set device values string one by one MAIN Device Memory Ed Device Name D20 Dd Detailed Conditions Device Name
68. R16CPU R32CPU R120CPU RnPCPU RO8PCPU R16PCPU R32PCPU R120PCPU e Supported modules Even if the following modules exist in the system configuration of the project the simulation is performed without being an error MELSEC iQ R series Programmable controller CPU Motion controller CPU Input Output I O Analog input Analog output Simple motion Pulse I O Positioning Information module Serial communication Ethernet Network module CC Link CC Link IE Field Network CC Link IE Controller Network Q series Analog input Analog output Pulse I O Positioning Information module Network module Analog I O Temperature input Temperature control module Loop control Energy measuring module 42 APPENDICES APPENDIX 3 Appendix 5 Using Simulation Function Supported CPU module functions The Simulation function of GX Works3 does not support some CPU module functions The following shows the functions that are supported by the Simulation function CPU module Function name Remarks Basic function Program related function Executing a program ladder ST and FBD LD Scan time monitoring time WDT setting The operation is not performed in actual time Clock function Clock function The clock data is written to the internal time of a simulator It differs from the time of a personal computer Clock function Time zone setting The clock of a personal computer is copied to the internal time and used System c
69. Range gt Disable Comment Out of Selected Range gt Register Label gt Display Template gt Mark Template Left gt Mark Template Right gt Jump gt Toolbar gt ST gt Open Label Setting of Selected Element gt Open in Front gt Open Label Setting of Selected Element gt Tile Horizontally gt Open Program of Selected Element gt Open in Front gt Open Program of Selected Element gt Tile Horizontally gt Open Label Setting gt Open in Front gt Open Label Setting gt Tile Horizontally gt Open Zoom Source Block gt Outline gt Expand Collapse of Outlines gt Outline gt Expand Collapse of All Outlines gt Outline gt Show Hide of Outlines Page 149 Batch comment out uncomment of a program Page 149 Registering undefined labels Page 149 Displaying syntax templates Page 150 Jump Page 172 Creating displaying Zooms action transition Page 145 Configuration of ST editor 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS 2 4 Menu List 41 42 Applicable menus for FBD LD editor gt Delete gt Select Network gt Insert Row gt Delete Row gt Insert Column of Network gt Delete Column of Network gt Add Element gt Open Contact gt Add Element gt Close Contact gt Add Element gt Open Branch gt Add Element gt Close Branch gt Add Element gt Coil gt Add Eleme
70. Retry Times 0 time For FX5CPU these setting items are not available Point 7 For FX5CPU the Ethernet adapter at the personal computer side which is used for the Ethernet port direct connection can be specified Click the CPU Module Direct Coupled Setting button on the Specify Connection Destination screen and select an adapter displayed on the CPU Module Direct Coupled Setting screen Windows Vista or later A warning message may appear Click the Unblock button for Windows Vista and click the Allow access button for Windows 7 or later to unblock the program permit the access and continue the operation 12 SETTING ROUTE TO CPU MODULE 2 12 2 Direct Connection 37 When the same IP addresses are displayed When the Find button is clicked on the PLC side I F Detailed Setting of PLC Module screen the same IP addresses may be displayed in the list of the connection destination CPU Two or more IP addresses may be set to the IP Settings tab on the Advanced TCP IP Settings screen of Windows network settings Set only one IP address MWhen the personal computer does not allow to communicate with GX Works3 by the Windows Firewall When the Windows Firewall is enabled and not allowed to communicate with GX Works3 a timeout may occur To allow the communication set the personal computer as shown below When using other software with a firewall function refer to the manual of the software and allow
71. Select Online gt CPU Memory Operation 5 Page 330 Checking Memory Usage 2 Select Device Label Memory on the Memory Management screen and click the Clear Value button 3 Set the items on the Clear Value screen and click the Execute button Poin tr When the device initial value file label initial value file is written in the CPU module it can be initialized by resetting the CPU module 18 CHECKING CHANGING CPU MODULE OPERATION 1 18 5 Initializing Clearing Memory 33 APPENDIX Appendix 1 Functions Added to Changed from Previous Version The table below shows the main functions added changed along with the upgrades Supported Added changed contents Reference version Version 1 001B e The problems causing an error when Version 1 000A is used have been solved Online program change e Online program change on an instruction basis in ladder Page 258 Writing Programs programs is supported While CPU is in RUN e Online program change for ST programs is supported e Online program change after changing deleting label initial values is supported Version 1 005F Switching displayed language e Chinese Simplified is supported Page 27 Switching Displayed Language Checking program e The Check Program function is supported Page 183 Checking Programs Online program change e Performing not performing the device comment difference check Page 258 Writing Programs before online program change can be selected with o
72. Sequence program MAIN gt x1 0 Initial Start a Instruction The local device comment Stop Device 1 is displayed as a device comment for M1 lf a comment does not exist in the device comment set for Device Comment Reference Reflection Target the other comment is displayed Applicable devices For the device types and comment setting availability refer to the following section KL Page 337 Applicable Devices in GX Works3 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 6 7 Registering Device Comments 177 Configuration of device comment editor e For common device comment Project view gt Device gt Device Comment gt Common Device Comment e For device comment for each program Project view gt Device gt Device Comment gt Each Program Device Comment gt data name Device Name DO v Detailed Conditions Japanese BSE English Dispizy Target Chinese P Derice Name Jos ros es C a 002 Separation bar Device Name D20 v Detailed Conditions Filtering Condition Used Unused All Devices Display Registered Comment only Used Devices Display Only the Mismatched Comment Unused Devices e The hidden comment is displayed by double clicking in the device name column Device Name DO y Detailed Conditions Device Nam Comment N o N Double click Device Name DO v Detailed Conditions Device Nam Comment bo Line feed i D1 e Fonts can b
73. Setting Remote Reset Setting Output Mode Setting of STOP RUN Clock Related Setting Interrupt Settings Fixed Scan Interval Setting Fixed Scan Execution Mode Setting Interrupt Enable Setting in Executing Instruction Block No Save Recovery Setting Service Processing Device Label Access Service Processing Setting Setting File Setting File Register Setting Initial Value Setting File Setting for Device Data Storage Memory Device Setting Device Label Memory Area Setting Extended SRAM Cassette Setting Device Label Memory Area Capacity Setting Device Label Memory Area Detailed Points Setting Local Device Index Register Setting Refresh Memory Setting Pointer Setting Internal Buffer Capacity Setting RAS Setting Scan Time Monitoring Time WDT Setting Constant Scan Setting Error Detections Setting CPU Module Operation Setting at Error Detected LED Display Setting Event History Setting Program Setting Program Setting Program Setting Program Name Execution Type Detailed Setting Information Fixed Scan Detailed Setting Information Event Device File Use or not FB FUN File Setting APPENDICES APPENDIX Appendix 5 Using Simulation Function 353 Module buffer memory The following shows the number of points of buffer memory UO CGO for a module supported by the Simulation function MELSEC iQ R series Programmable controller CPU 524288 Motion controller CPU 524288 Input 512 Output 512 I O 512 Analog input 131072
74. Specify the project to Verify Destination in Verification Data Selection 2 Select the data to be verified and click the Verify button Point The target project file can be specified by dragging and dropping it Precautions e Verification with GX Works2 GX Developer project cannot be performed e Projects to which the security is set can be verified when both verify source data and verify destination data are not read protected Parameters HVerification levels Select the parameter verification level from Options tab on the Project Verify screen 3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 77 3 5 Verifying Projects Checking verification result Check the details of mismatched data on the Verify Result screen Updated verify source data is displayed in the verification results Therefore the verification result of updated verify source data can be checked without performing the Project Verify function again after mismatched data is modified Operating procedure 1 Select and double click the row of data to be displayed in detail on the Verify Result screen 2 Select Find Replace gt Next Unmatched Previous Unmatched E Point Font color background color and fonts can be changed KL Page 48 Checking and Changing Colors and Fonts Precautions For verification of program files the verification results may mismatched because a difference occurred to the conversion results if the version of GX Work
75. Symbol gt Falling Pulse Close gt Ladder Symbol gt Pulse Contact Symbol gt Rising Pulse Close Branch gt Ladder Symbol gt Pulse Contact Symbol gt Falling Pulse Close Branch gt Ladder Symbol gt Invert Operation Results gt Ladder Symbol gt Operation Result Rising Pulse gt Ladder Symbol gt Operation Result Falling Pulse gt Inline Structured Text gt Insert Inline Structured Text Box gt Inline Structured Text gt Display Template gt Inline Structured Text gt Mark Template Left gt Inline Structured Text gt Mark Template Right gt Inline Structured Text gt Register Label gt Inline Structured Text gt Comment Out of Selected Range gt Inline Structured Text gt Disable Comment Out of Selected Range gt Edit FB Instance gt Change FB FUN Data gt I O Argument gt Increment Argument gt I O Argument gt Delete Argument gt Documentation gt Edit Device Label Comment Documentation gt Edit Statement gt Documentation gt Edit Note gt Documentation gt Delete Device Label Comment gt Documentation gt Statement Note Batch Edit gt Documentation gt Show Hide of Navigation Window gt Easy Edit gt Connect Horizontal Line to Right Side Ladder Symbol gt Easy Edit gt Connect Horizontal Line to Left Side Ladder Symbol gt Easy Edit gt Enter Delete Horizontal Line to
76. System Diagnosing CPU module Page 314 Diagnosing CPU Module Diagnosing network Page 316 Ethernet diagnostics Page 317 CC Link IE Controller Network diagnostics Page 319 CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics Page 320 MELSECNET diagnostics Page 321 CC Link diagnostics 1 Not supported by FX5CPU 16 DIAGNOSING MODULE 312 16 1 Checking Module Status of System The System Monitor function displays the module configuration of the system in operation and detailed information of each module In addition the error status can be checked and the module in which the error occurred can be diagnosed FX5CPU does not support this function RUN g 3600 00000020 0040 0060 0080 o o 32 Point 32 Point 32 Point 32 Point 32 Point Start I O No Module configuration Base configuration RUBIBT RJ7IGP RU7IGF RUTIEN7 Module Name R6IP Ropu TPT Sisk Teta ideve RYPICZ Error Status Uninstall Uninstall Uni Il Control GPU _ Network Infor mation Port 1 IP Address Uninstall Port1 IPv4 Uninstall Uninstall e For Q series power supply the model name is displayed as Power instead of their model name Additionally when using Q series module the network information and IP address are not displayed e To display the network information and IP address of the port 2 of the modules who have two ports click the Display Setting button Module Configuration
77. TETEE na E FLOAT Single Precision p g L FLOAT Double Precision Label name S String Initial value FB_public 10 The initial values set on the label editor when creating FB program are also displayed The initial values set to each FB instance are not displayed WEditing FB instance names Operating procedure 1 Move the cursor on an FB instance 2 Select Edit gt Edit FB Instance 3 Enter a new FB instance name 6 Point f e The name can be changed directly by moving the cursor on the FB instance and pressing the IF2 key e The data of the function block can be edited directly by moving the cursor on the FB instance and pressing the L key MReplacing FB instances Operating procedure 1 Move the cursor on an FB instance 2 Select Edit gt Change FB FUN Data aan conan 3 Scroll the displayed screen and select the function block to be replaced and click the OK button 1 30 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 6 3 Creating Ladder Programs Creating input and output circuits of FB instances Create input and output circuits of the FB instance pasted to a sequence program index_te FbPou m oo NN ee tuannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnanan hee tet rr rere rrr errr rr rrr errr rr rrrrrrrerrrrrrerererrrrrrirerrrrrrrrn hd Input circuit Output circuit The number of contacts occupied by input circuits output circuit
78. Unicode Basic Multilingual Plane are specified they may not be edited in the program e File Register Setting in File Setting File Name e Initial Value Setting in File Setting Global Device Initial Value File Name e Program Setting in Program Setting Program Name e FB FUN File Setting in Program Setting FB FUN File Name 4 CREATING MODULE CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM AND SETTING PARAMETERS 4 2 Setting Parameters Setting parameters of I O module and Intelligent function module Set the parameters of MELSEC iQ R series Q series I O module and Intelligent function module supported by GX Works3 Set the switch settings and refresh settings of MELSEC Q series module on the parameter editor For details of the items for parameters refer to the user s manual of each module Setting parameters Operating procedure 1 Select Parameter gt Module Information on the Project view and select Project gt Data Operation gt Add New Module right click and select Add New Module from the shortcut menu 2 Select the items on the Add New Module screen 3 Double click the created parameter Setting network configuration and target devices Set the network configuration and the target device of Ethernet CC Link IE Field and CC Link on the configuration setting screen For details on the settings refer to the user s manual of each network Window The configuration setting screen is displayed from one of the following module par
79. Used for searching for replacing devices or labels ina program Page 208 Batch Replacing of e ST editor in batch Devices and Labels e FBD LD editor Cross Reference e Ladder editor Used to check the device and label declaration location and Page 210 Creating displaying e ST editor referenced location in a list cross reference information Device List FBOED editor l Used to check the usage of devices Page 212 Displaying Device e SFC diagram editor Usage List e Label editor e Parameter editor Search Replace in a e Ladder editor Used to search for devices and labels or move to the Page 143 Searching for replacing program corresponding row by specifying a Step No in a ladder data in program program e ST editor Used to move to the corresponding row by specifying a line Page 150 Searching for replacing number on an ST editor data in program e SFC diagram editor Used to search for devices and labels or move to the Page 175 Searching for replacing corresponding row by specifying a block number or a block programs name in an SFC block list The Find Replace window can also be displayed by selecting View gt Docking Window gt Find Replace e Search replace can also be switched by selecting from the pull down list on the Find and Replace screen One point of device can be searched replaced when searching replacing labels e The search starts from the top of the program in the inline structured text box regardle
80. Word Signed e Time e Timer e Counter e Retentive Timer Point Enter the data length of the string data type directly Label Name Data Type Class 1 L stringi 2 L string 3 Change these values directly The initial value of the data length of a string data type can be set in the option setting e Tool gt Options gt Other Editor gt Label Editor Common gt Data Type Setting Structure When specifying a structure data as a data type creating a definition of the structure is required in advance Page 114 Creating structure definition After creating a structure definition specify the structure name in Data Type Function block When specifying a function block data as a data type creating a function block is required in advance For details refer to the following section K Page 214 Creating Function Blocks After creating a function block specify the function block name in Data Type 5 REGISTERING LABELS 111 5 2 Registering Labels MSetting arrays for data type Select ARRAY and enter the number for Element Set the data type of the array element in the same manner as setting the normal data type The method of how to edit the arrays on each editor is as follows Change the offset To change the offset Array start value Array end value to a value other than 0 edit the offset value by entering the array declaration directly in text Minus values can be set for offset
81. a connection point is being selected the K Page 154 Switching methods for contacts instructions element can be added with it connected already Grid A grid line that serves as makers to place the elements Show Hide View gt Grid Display Smart tag An operation button displayed around the selected element Show Hide Relevant functions can be performed by clicking the button Tool gt Options gt Program Editor gt FBD LD Editor gt Smart Tag Tool hint The information on device label and FB FUN where the mouse cursor MChanging display contents is placed over is displayed Tool gt Options gt Program Editor gt FBD LD Editor gt Tool Hint Point A font color and fonts can be changed However this dose not apply to the comment elements KL Page 48 Checking and Changing Colors and Fonts Elements The elements that can be used in FBD LD program are shown below MLD element Left power rail element 1 Output connection point The position of a left power rail can be placed at will and it will be the 2 Left power rail starting point for creating a ladder program Contact element 1 Input connection point Specify the device label 2 Output connection point It transmits the ON OFF signal according to the specified information alpen a 3 Label comment device comment For details on the element refer to the following manuals i j 4 4 Device label MELSEC iQ R Programming Manual P
82. a multiple CPU configuration the CPU number of a CPU module is set in order from left on the base unit When changing the CPU number change the position of the CPU module Operation for single CPU system Move the CPU module placed on the CPU slot to an empty slot and place a new CPU module on the empty slot Bn a a i Ee ed Move the host CPU module to slot 0 on the main base unit roy ceva cE Place a new CPU module on the CPU slot u in app CPU No 1 Other CPU CPU No 2 Host CPU Ailill Operation for multiple CPU configuration Exchange the CPU module on the CPU slot and the CPU module on other slot Since the parameter information of the modules removed from the base unit is retained the retained information is succeeded when the removed modules are placed again D MM CPU module CPU No 1 host CPU Module controlled by host CPU module CPU No 1 CPU module CPU No 2 other CPU Module controlled by other CPU module CPU No 2 POW ARA 1 2 3 4 5 6 fi 8 T 10 11 Mhiti the host CPU module from the slot Control CPU is changed to the host CPU No Module controlled by host CPU module CPU No 2 Module controlled by host CPU module CPU No 2 If the CPU No of Control CPU for the module which has been controlled by other CPU results in the same number as the host CPU the module will be controlled by the host CPU CPU No is reassigned CPU module CPU No
83. a project Start GX Works3 Create a new project Ks Page 27 Start K Page 61 Creating project 2 Set the parameters L Page 93 Setting Parameters 3 Create a program Create a Program Organization Unit POU Set an execution order and an execution type Set the global labels local labels Edit the program of each POU Perform conversion KL Page 72 Creating projects KL Page 121 Program execution order execution type settings K Page 107 Registering Labels KL Page 123 Creating Ladder Programs Page 145 Creating ST Programs Page 151 Creating FBD LD Programs Page 158 Creating SFC Programs Page 214 Creating Function Blocks Page 217 Creating Functions KL Page 184 Converting Programs 4 Perform debugging with the simulator KS Page 226 SIMULATING PROGRAM 1 FXSCPU does not support it 5 Connect a personal computer to a CPU module and set the connection destination Page 235 SETTING ROUTE TO CPU MODULE 6 Write parameters programs to the CPU module 1 BEFORE USING THIS PRODUCT 21 1 3 Procedure from Project Creation to CPU Module Operation 22 KL Page 250 Writing data to programmable controller UG 7 Check the operation Monitor the execution status and device contents of the sequence program to check the operation Check the error occurrence in the CPU module KL Page 268 Check Execution Programs on Program Editor KL Page 314 Diag
84. background color Setting ltem List Setting Item ltem Setting Device Labei Memos Area Seting Extended SRAM Cassette Setting Not Mounted OF Device Label Memory Area Capacity Setting Name Setting Standard Device Area E Operation Related Setting Standard Device Area Capacity 40 K Word E Interrupt Settings E Standard Label Area cAra Service Processing Setting Standard Label Area Capacity 40 K Word os ae FE Standard Label Area Capacity 2K Word a Device Label Memory Area Se o Safety Device Label Area ndex Register Setting Safety Device Label Area Capacity Refresh Memory Setting Safety Device Area Capacity Device Latch Interval Setting Safety Label Area Capacity Pointer Setting 1 Internal Buffer Capacity Setting i Standard Saiet Shared Labial Area Canaciy Input the Setting Item to Search 457 K Word Setting for safety The data category standard safety can be checked on the Properties screen for each data gt Page 74 Property 1 BEFORE USING THIS PRODUCT 1 2 RnSFCPU Supported Functions 1 3 Procedure from Project Creation to CPU Module Operation The operating procedure from program creation to a CPU module operation in GX Works3 is shown below For the operation methods of CPU modules refer to the following manuals LA MELSEC iQ R CPU Module User s Manual Application LA MELSEC iQ F FX5 User s Manual Application Standard project Start U 1 Create
85. be Gr mes ae aw 322 Stalerm nt 136 Execution count of interrupt program 281 Synchronous setting 95 System monitor 0 0 00 eee eee 313 F File password onanan aaa 307 T FON oered Scan wae oho ELARA 48 VG 2 Gen ee ew Se E E EEEE 14 Function 0 cccceeeeceeee 133 148 217 oe Function block 128 148 214 U G USB driver 0 0 0 0 cc eee eee ee eee ae 357 8 User authentication 20 303 Global device 0 000 eee eee eee 120 Ue oe 262 W VO assignment setting 1 2 6 95 Watch ooo e cece cece cece eee ee eee 277 Initialization a pees ae ee ee 331 Workspace format ccceceeeeeeee 56 Inline structured text 0000 eee 134 L Latch clear 00000 ee eeueeuae 331 Local device 00 00 eee eee eee 120 M MCO ces ce cee ee etecow erni oh Sk nee ath woe Sarid ah ed sw eo 135 Memory dump 0000 cece eee 284 Module FB 00 00 eee eee eves 216 Module label 00 000 eee eens 115 Mo ItONNO seseina ce in ak os So he ae a ee 266 Multiple CPU setting 0 95 N Network configuration 052005 97 NOP aooaa ee ee ee 139 359 MEMO 360 REVISIONS The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Revision date June 2014 July 2014 October 2014 January 2015 April 2015 July 2015 Manual number SH NA 081215ENG A SH N
86. bob eet de ede the heb encie Chane bbe ewadu Sat 293 15 2 Preventing Illegal Access to Program Protected by Key 0 2 0 cece eee ees 295 Security key authentication function 2 0 0 0 06 cc eee ee eee ees 295 How to use the Security key authentication function access prevention 0 0 0 e ee ene 296 Creating deleting security key 0 2 eee ee een eee eee eens 297 Copying security key 2 0 0 ee ee eee ee nent eee e cette nee eens 298 Registering security key in program file 1 0 ee eee eee eae 299 15 3 Preventing Illegal Program Execution 0 0 cee ee 300 How to use the Security key authentication function execution prevention 0002 ee eee 300 Writing deleting security key to from CPU module 0 0 ccc eee eee 301 15 4 Preventing Illegal Access to Project 0 0 cece nenna 303 User Authenticatiori TUNCION lt asss eieae ioa bdleeciateteeu bbe eaten eee btent a ehhh see 303 How to use the User Authentication function access prevention 0 00 eee 304 Logging on 10 DIOlGG nes n5 446s eee ead hee eee oes 6 aS N HRSG heee ee seuaeestee ees 304 Changing password of logon USEr naaa aaae eee eee ees 304 User manage MEIN aan oe eee ea eee desea oe tice wees OR oe 2 ees oe ed bees bee ee ce eee 305 15 5 Preventing Illegal Access to CPU Module 0 0 eee 306 How to use the User Authentication function access prevention 0 000 ee 306 Writing re
87. component POU created by segmenting a program which always outputs the same operation results against the same input value without internal memory It is classified into the following two types POU Description Reference Function A function block which is created from a program using the labels which are defined as Page 217 Creating Functions User created input labels and output labels Standard function A function which can be used in general It is prepared in GX Works3 in advance Page 32 Element Selection window Library Library is an element collection of multiple POUs and structures The elements in the library can be used in multiple projects FX5CPU does not support it WUser library User library is an element collection which is composed of created POUs and structures For details refer to the following section KL Page 219 Enhancing Use of User Library BApplication library sample library MELSOFT Library MELSOFT Library Sample Library is an element collection that has been prepared by maker in advance To obtain the application library sample library MELSOFT Library please consult your local Mitsubishi representative For details refer to the following section K Page 223 Enhanced Use of Application Library Sample Library 10 SEGMENTING PROGRAMS 213 10 1 Creating Function Blocks This section explains how to create sequence programs using function blocks Function blocks For details of the function b
88. contact coil or instruction displayed in the Element Selection window and drag and drop it on the ladder editor After that edit the arguments BEditing arguments directly Select a cell where an argument is inserted and press the key to edit the argument Poin tr e The labels to be input as an argument can also be input using aliases A device number label name can be incremented 1 decremented 1 by pressing the At keys e When inserting an instruction without entering the arguments is added automatically can be entered as an argument The arguments can be entered later 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 127 6 3 Creating Ladder Programs Switching methods for contacts instructions Select a contact instruction to be switched and select Edit gt Easy Edit gt Switch Ladder Symbol Invert Switch Pulse Switch SET and RST Instructions or follow the methods shown below Switching open close contact raising falling pulse Select a symbol from the pull down list displayed ae A a when clicking the blue triangle at the bottom left in Ea A Ea A the cell e A e A or or S Ni YTTT LIEL ae TUCUTTTTT LCELCLLLL eTe Switching operation result rising falling pulse ar 2 e Switching SET RST instructions ae L Draw a line in the program If a line has already been drawn the line will be deleted Drag
89. conversion Applies function block program codes using the CJ instruction to each location where instances are used at conversion Use EN ENO Yes Becomes a function block with EN ENO EN ENO labels can be used in projects without registering in the local labels For details on EN ENO refer to the following manuals LA MELSEC iQ R Programming Manual Program Design LA MELSEC iQ F FX5 Programming Manual Program Design Becomes a function block without EN ENO FB File FB Type Macro Type Stores the program of a function block to the FB file to which the call source program block or program of the function block is stored Subroutine Stores the program of a function block to an FB file Type FB File of Add Destination Select a storage destination file of a function block to be created The storage destination files can be created by entering file name directly This item can be selected only when both Yes is selected to Use EN ENO and FB Type is Macro Type 21 4 10 SEGMENTING PROGRAMS 10 1 Creating Function Blocks Precautions If the function block in which the MC MCR instruction is used is not executed the outputs and the current values of timers in the function block will be reset If the instruction is not used the current values are retained Setting labels Set the labels to be used in the program on the label editor The operations on the screen is the same as that of other label editor For det
90. counter device to Assign Device Label the assigned device is regarded as a contact TS STS CS if a bit type device is specified to Data Type When Data Type is a word type the specified device is regarded as a current value TN STN CN e When specifying the step relay S which does not specify a block No BLO in Assign Device Label the assigned label operates the same as the step relay S which does not specify a block No BLO Therefore the same labels operate differently depending on the location of use For details on the step relay S refer to the following manual MELSEC iQ R Programming Manual Program Design 1 12 5 REGISTERING LABELS 5 2 Registering Labels When data type is structure A device can be assigned to the structure element on the Structure Device Setting Window displayed when clicking the Detailed Setting button The color of Detailed Setting is displayed in pink when no setting exists and is displayed in blue when the items have been set When the structure array is specified device numbers can be set in a fixed interval for each element of the structure array by specifying offset When 0 is specified for the offset the same device number set to the start device data is set to all data in the array Initial value Set an initial value to the label FX5CPU does not support it However if a device is assigned to a global label the label does not operate with the initial v
91. database Operating procedure 1 Select Edit gt System Label gt Execute Verification Synchronous with System Label 2 Check and correct information on the Execute Verify and Synchronize with system label screen 3 Click the Reflection button Importing the changes of system label database Import the changed contents to the GX Works3 projects when the system labels used in a project have been changed in other projects Importing the changes automatically Operating procedure Click the Yes button on the message to confirm whether or not import the changed contents which appears when any of the following operations is performed in a state where a system label change notification has been received e Opening a project e Saving a project e Reflecting labels to system label database e Displaying the Online Data Operation screen e Starting the Simulation function Click the No button to import them after checking the changed contents Page 118 Importing after checking the changes Importing after checking the changes When the system label information in the GX Works3 projects is different from the system label database the icon to notify the changes is displayed at the lower left corner of the GX Works3 screen Check the contents that have been changed when the icon is displayed In addition import the changed contents to the GX Works3 projects Operating procedure 1 Select Edit gt System Label
92. displayed on the Project view File format Workspace format A workspace manages multiple projects at once When configuring a system composed with multiple CPU modules a project file needs to be created for each CPU module Multiple project files in a same system can be managed by saving in workspace format lt System configuration example gt First stage construction for company A lt Alarm processing A gt allle E ul N Ethernet lt Control B gt CC Link IE Field Network cs r 1m 1 Pi alls al lt Conveyor control C gt lt Additional processing D gt Batch manage projects in the workspace format lt GX Works3 project management gt ic First stage construction for company A Workspace Alarm processing A Control B megjs Project Conveyor control C Additional processing D 3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 56 3 1 Project File and Data Configuration Configuration of workspace project Name Type Folder configuration GXW 2 data File folder A 0w3 data File folder 2 i 1 i Va Type a m First stage construction for company A File folder ne Workspace WD Second stage construction for company A File folder Name bs Type Pie workspacelist KML Document 408 ee AN _ projectlist XML Document 3 4 HE Conveyor control C GX3 File HE Control B GX3 File A Alarm processing A GX3 File 5 ie Additional processing D 6X3 File eo MMMM i l 1 Save destination folder l l 2 Works
93. does not match with the program on the CPU module the online program change function cannot be performed Perform the function in file units Page 261 Writing data in units of files while the CPU module is in RUN file batch online change 2 Modify a program 3 Select Convert gt Online Program Change 4 Select the target program and click the OK button Check the processing procedure and precautions for the online program change function by clicking the Notes button 13 WRITING READING DATA TO CPU MODULE 2 13 3 Writing Programs While CPU is in RUN 59 Online program change after editing device comments When the online program change function is performed after editing device comments the device comments are written after writing programs The operations below can be chosen for writing device comments by selecting Tool gt Options gt Convert gt Online Program Change Item Description Check Device Comment Difference The confirmation message does not appear and all device comments are written Yes The confirmation message appears and whether or not to write device comments can be selected Note that the online program change function cannot be performed even if only device comments were edited with the program or labels unchanged When writing only device comments while the CPU module is in RUN write data to the programmable controller from the Online Data Operation screen Online program change
94. e WSUMP gt WSUMP_U e DGBIN gt DGBIN_U DINC gt DINC_U DLIMITP gt DLIMITP_U e DMINP gt DMINP_U DMULTIP gt DMULTIP_U e DSCL2 gt DSCL2_U e DSTR gt DSTR_U e DWSUM gt DWSUM_U e GBIN gt GBIN_U INC gt INC_U e MEAN gt MEAN _U e MINUSP gt MINUSP_U e PLUSP gt PLUSP_U e SCLP gt SCLP_U e VAL gt VAL_U e ZONE gt ZONE _U e DGBINP gt DGBINP_U DINCP gt DINCP_U e DMAXP gt DMAXP_U e DMINUS gt DMINUS_U e DPLUS gt DPLUS_U e DSCL2P gt DSCL2P_U e DSTRP gt DSTRP_U e DWSUMP gt DWSUMP_U e GBINP gt GBINP_U e INCP gt INCP_U e MEANP gt MEANP_U e MULTI gt MULTI_U e SCL gt SCL_U e SORTD gt SORTD_U e VALP gt VALP_U e ZONEP gt ZONEP_U WDevices that are not supported by MELSEC iQ R series MELSEC iQ F series module e When the devices which are not supported by MELSEC iQ R series MELSEC iQ F series module are used in a program created with GX Works2 they are changed to SM4095 SD4095 In addition when GX Works2 project consists of ladder programs the devices which are changed to character string by an instruction are changed to SM4095 SD4095 To search character strings refer to the search function Page 205 Searching Replacing Character Strings e When S devices or R devices have been set to the device memory data device initial value data created with GX Works2 they are deleted Number of device points and start end device The setting
95. eeus eee 321 16 4 Checking Error History Operation History 2 00 cc es 322 CHAPTER 17 SAMPLING DEVICE DATA 323 17 1 Data Logging FUNCHON 64 62664 i eicee tase Sidintose thst dtdatdes ec beendeadea a eka baw Sd woes 323 How to use the data logging function 0 0 eee eee ee nes 323 Setting internal buffer capacity for the data logging function aasa anaa cc ee eee 323 CHAPTER 18 CHECKING CHANGING CPU MODULE OPERATION 325 18 1 Setting Clock in CPU NOdUIC 60650 cescavedceus sae Seer enen ie ae cena eee eee ee cane E i 325 18 2 CPU Module Remote Operation 000 ee 326 18 3 Operations of RnSrCPU 2 22i2ccnuctoncteete he O86 855500400108 SSeS ceca se HARASS Seed wee de 327 Switch Safety Operation Mode 0 0 eee eee ees 327 Check Safety Data Identity 0 0 0 eee een eee e eee eens 329 184 Checking Memory Usage ccccaienecteea een seas ee ae suerte cea eee eee TERREN 330 18 5 Initializing Clearing Memory 00 ees 331 APPENDIX 332 Appendix 1 Functions Added to Changed from Previous Version 00 0c eee ees 332 Appendix 2 Unusable Character String Reserved Word 000 cece ees 334 Appendix 3 Applicable Devices in GX WorkS3 0 00 ees 337 PORRCrY cecereacnseedmyecteeueeeod aad Geese een ee Gas een enode ee cates ene EERE 337 FOr PAOGEW 2c pees chee Gece ne aee hs wa wade eyo we dedi es oad oh EE E owes E E bes 339 Appendix 4 Use Project in Different Version
96. element above of the end step is a branch the branch also is deleted e Operation examples of cutting pasting If the step 1 was cut the next transition 2 is deleted together If the step is pasted with selecting the step 3 the lacking transition 4 of the step 3 will be inserted SEepeasxx Bie TRO ee e Duplicate step names and Step No cannot exist on an SFC diagram When copying a step of which the step name is Step0 and the Step No is S1 on a same SFC diagram the step is pasted with a different name Step1 and without the Step No S1 Step No S2 is assigned again by convention SSSeepeaxxhe MiTransition Duplicate Transition No cannot exist on an SFC diagram When copying a Transition No on a same SFC diagram the Transition No is pasted without Transition No Transition No TRO is assigned again by convention 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 1 67 6 6 Creating SFC Programs BAction Cut copy an action and paste it selecting a step action of the destination Actions can be copied moved by dragging and dropping Note that the methods are different depending on the place where it will be dropped Drag and drop an action Action3 onto a target action Action1 The orders of those actions will be switched Drag and drop an action Action3 to the same height of a target action Action1 The action Action1 will be overwritten Drag and drop an action Action2 onto a target step Step1 The ac
97. ewes E ES oe ee ee oo ed ee eee eee eee eee ee ee eee 271 Oe oe a A ay Oe here ee Gene e a oben Cee ener oa cies Sona een oe Boe ee ee eee eee 272 Checking Device Buffer Memory in Batch 0 000 cece es 275 Checking Current Values by Registering Devices Labels 0 0 0 es 277 Checking Processing Time of Program 2 00 cece ee 280 Checking Execution Counts of Interrupt Programs 0 0 00 ees 281 Checking Current Values in Intelligent Function Module 0 00 cee eee ee 282 Saving and Checking Device Value 2 0 cece ee 284 How to use the Memory Dump function 0 20 0 cc eee eee eens 284 Setting internal buffer capacity for the Memory Dump function 2 0 0 0 ce ee eee 284 Writing memory dump settings 0 0 eee eee eee eee 285 Reading memory dump results 06 25204364 22eed eee donee eevee Eee dob 2G S4o9 4 ov hee ca ee eae 286 Displaying memory dump results 0 0 eee eee tenes 287 Checking Sampled Data on Program Editor 0 2 cee es 288 PART 5 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION CHAPTER 15 PROTECTING DATA 292 15 1 Preventing Illegal Access to Program Protected by Password 0 cece eee eee ees 293 Block password UNCU sssr sredio e 5 be ee ee oe eee eee eee eee eee we be eee eee 293 How to use block password a a anaana dace tueda tases eagedecetducttnn ce cde bets et aceddewdd s 293 Setting block password 2s 0cccdadeed da dete 40 tee
98. file Online Data Operation Display Setting Related Functions CPU SD memory card module Module Navigation a ag a am Parameter CPU built in memory SD memory card g System Parameter me n ROSCPU l Parameter Program F Select All System parameter Open Close All T Deselect All N Module Name Data Name Untitled Project CPU parameter o Parameter g CPU Parameter p CPU Parameter a Module Parameter Module Parameter Memory Card Parameter Module Extended Parameter 0000 R m Module Information E Module Extended Parameter 0020 R Memory card parameter m fr 0000 RD75D2 g Module Parameter g Module Extended Parar Module POU Shortcut m f 0020 RD75P2 g Module Parameter g Module Extended Parar Module POU Shortcut Remote Password 8 Memory Card Parameter gt ie Remote Password B Module extented parameter 0000 RD75D2 Module extented parameter 0020 RD75P2 Remote password Therefore when module parameters exist in the CPU module the parameter file is overwritten Ex When writing four module parameters to the CPU module in which module parameters of five modules exist the settings of five modules are overwritten with the settings of four modules and one setting that does not exist in the project will be deleted 250 13 WRITING R
99. for accessing from external device e When writing data global labels are written as Local Label Initial Value and Global Label Assignment Information e When reading data the information of Initial Value and Access from External Device of local labels are read with global labels by reading programs When reading only a program in which global labels are used the label definitions used in the program may not exist in the project This may cause the disappearance of the labels on the ladder editor In this case read the global label and program together Device memory The device memory which have the same name as the program will be read as a file for a local device The device memory which have the different name as the program will be read as a file for a global device Only one device memory for a global device can be selected FX5CPU does not support local devices The device memory is read as a file for a global device regardless of whether or not it is consistent with the program name MSetting read target devices and their read ranges Set the type and range of device memory to be read from a CPU module on the Device Data Detail Setting screen displayed by clicking the Detailed button Device memory can be read from link memory or buffer memory The devices that can be read are as follows Readable No corresponding device Device Global device Local device M V T ST C D R2 SAWM SA
100. for and replaces a device name label name instruction name and character strings e Changes open close contact e Replaces devices in a batch Precautions e When a Zoom has been created the data name of Zoom will not be changed if the character strings of transition name action name are replaced on an SFC diagram Change them on the Zoom List screen Page 172 Displaying a Zoom list e Block information is not searched in the cross reference device list search and replace Use Block Information Find Device L Page 174 Searching for block information when searching for block information Displaying the Help Check the elements used in the SFC program on the e Manual Viewer To check files of the corresponding programming manuals requires to be registered in e Manual Viewer Operating procedure 1 Select a check target element 2 Press the key 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 1 6 6 Creating SFC Programs 75 6 Registering Device Comments This section explains the features and setting methods for device comments Device comments There are two types of device comments Common device comment and device comment for each program Each program device comment GX Works3 supports the global device comment local device comment of GX Works2 and the common comment comment by program of GX Developer Up to 16 comments can be set for one device Page 49 Setting Comment Display Set the comments in Japanese Engli
101. function block on the inserted row B inl outl B Place the cursor in the row on which the second FB instance exists and insert a row e To insert a row above an FB instance function select a cell on the row with the definition name as shown below and select Edit gt Insert Row i l a FbPou 1 _ FbPou Undo i edo 3 0 D ut opy taste Ia Bi mK 2 5 oOo Continuous Paste Q Paste after Inserting L r Convert B Delete Row Find b e To insert a row when either of the input argument or output argument for FB instance function is other than BOOL data type convert the argument to BOOL data type and insert a row and then return the data type to the one other than BOOL Pasting a function block to a sequence program causes the file size to increase Pasting the same function blocks to one sequence program repeatedly also causes the size increase of the sequence program in accordance with the number of pasted function blocks 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 1 29 6 3 Creating Ladder Programs Displaying FB instance On the pasted FB instance label names of I O variables and their corresponding data types are displayed FB instance name conveyor 01 1 FbPou B FB_EN FB_ENO B The following are the representation of data types Data type _7 Data type B Bit Bf_sensor_01 Fe_ K 8 W Word Label name E Label name D Double word signed
102. gt Delete Unused Device Comment gt Clear All All Devices gt Clear All Displayed Devices gt Import File gt Export to File gt Hide All Bit Specification Information gt Show All Bit Specification Information gt Cut the Range Including Hidden Bit Specification Information gt Copy the Range Including Hidden Bit Specification Information gt Paste the Range Including Hidden Bit Specification Information Result screen Page 195 Setting character strings Page 195 Clearing whole memory of device memory Page 194 Setting values in batch Page 196 Interaction with device initial value Page 179 Detecting devices with empty cell Page 182 Reading sample comments Page 180 Deleting unused device comments Page 180 Clearing all device comments Page 181 Importing to exporting from files Page 179 Creating device comments gt Export to File Page 79 Exporting data to file gt Next Unmatched gt Previous Unmatched gt Return to Result List gt Close Detailed Result gt Close All Detailed Result Page 78 Checking verification result 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS 2 4 Menu List 45 ffer Memory Batch Monitor screen gt Display Format Detailed Setting _ 46 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS 2 4 Menu List 2 5 Checking and Changing Shortcut Keys The shortcut keys of each function can be checked and changed on the Sho
103. in GX Works3 of which version is not supported by Writing reading data to from a programmable controller the module type Verifying a project verifying with a programmable controller ts with later versions Library operation Even if the library that contains the global labels created in Version 1 010L is registered into the library list in Version 1 015R or later the global labels are not displayed in the Library tab on the Element Selection window The global labels called by the utilized elements are changed to the undefined labels without being utilized Using the projects which were created in Version 1 011M or earlier in Version 1 015R or later Option setting For the project created in Version 1 011M or earlier the following option is set to No if it was opened read in Version 1 015R or later For verification the verification result is inconsistent due to the difference of the option settings e Tool gt Options gt Convert gt Basic Setting gt Operational Setting gt Minimize the Temporary Area Verifying with a The verification result may mismatch when verifying the project created in Version 1 011M or earlier with the global label setting programmable controller in the CPU module In this case re read re write from to the CPU module and then verify with the programmable controller again with earlier versions BUsing the projects which were created in Version 1 005F or later in Version 1 002C or ea
104. in a program using the Interrupt Program List Monitor function FX5CPU does not support this function Window Online gt Monitor gt Interrupt Program List Monitor Interrupt Pointer I J x Interrupt Pointer Execution Count Input the interrupt pointer number of which execution counts are to be displayed in Interrupt Pointer Displayed Execution Count Starts counting when the CPU module turns to the RUN state and displays the execution counts When reaching 65536 it returns to 0 14 CHECKING OPERATION OF PROGRAMS 281 14 6 Checking Execution Counts of Interrupt Programs 14 7 Checking Current Values in Intelligent Function Module Check the I O signals and the current values of buffer memory using the Intelligent Function Module Monitor function FX5CPU does not support this function Window View gt Docking Window gt Intelligent Function Module Monitor gt Intelligent Function Module Monitor 1 to Intelligent Function Module Monitor 10 Intelligent Function Module Monitor 1 0000 R60DAV8 Watching J Right click Name Current Value Assign Device Label Data Type A Q Setting Value Change Re OFF YC Bit D Name G Warning Output Clear Re OFF YE Bit v Current Value C Error Clear Request OFF YF Bit Assign Device Label Buffer Memory Monitor Data Type y Latest Error Code H0000 UO G0 Detail Dialog Comment y Latest Alarm Code Ho000 U0 G2 Detail Dialog a Range Setting M
105. in batch active steps Page 277 Checking Current Values by Registering Devices Labels Page 306 Logging on to CPU module Page 306 Changing password Page 306 Writing reading user information to from CPU module Page 306 When a user name and a password used in the User Authentication function are lost Page 227 Starting Stopping Simulation Page 227 Environmental setting Page 265 Changing current values Page 284 Saving and Checking Device Value Page 288 Checking Sampled Data on Program Editor 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS 2 4 Menu List 37 gt System Monitor Page 313 Checking Module Status of System gt Module Diagnostics CPU Diagnostics Page 314 Diagnosing CPU Module gt Ethernet Diagnostics Page 316 Ethernet diagnostics gt CC Link IE Control Diagnostics Optical Cable Page 317 CC Link IE Controller Network diagnostics gt CC Link IE Control Diagnostics Twisted Pair Cable gt CC Link IE Field Diagnostics Page 319 CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics gt MELSECNET Diagnostics Page 320 MELSECNET diagnostics gt CC Link Diagnostics Page 321 CC Link diagnostics gt Memory Card gt Read from Memory Card Page 264 Writing to Reading from memory card gt Memory Card gt Write to Memory Card gt Check Program Page 183 Checking Programs gt Check Parameter Page 94 Checking parameters gt Confirm Memory Size Offline Page 190 Calculating Memory Size gt Modul
106. instruction Logging instruction Process control instruction RnPCPU only 1 O indicates an operator Symbol 4 LEDR P MOV P MOV P _ WS AND O BCDDA P BINDA P _U BINHA P DBCDDA P DBINDA P _U DBINHA P DSTR P _U ESTR P INSTR P INT2ASC P LD O LEFT P LEN P MIDR P MIDW P OR O RIGHT P SJIS2WS P SUIS2WSB P STR P _U STRDEL P STRINS P WS2SJIS P BAND P _U DBAND P _U DLIMIT P _U DSCL P _U DSCL2 P _U DZONE P _U LIMIT P _U SCL P _U SCL2 P _U ZONE P _U ADRSET P QDRSET P RSET P ZRRDB P ZRWRB P ANDDTO ANDTMO DATE P DATE P DATERD P DATEWR P LDDTO LOTMO ORDTO ORTMO S P DATE S P DATE S P DATERD SEC2TIME P TIME2SEC P POFF P PSCAN P PSTOP P PIDCONT P PIDINIT P PIDPRMW P PIDRUN P PIDSTOP P S P PIDCONT S P PIDINIT S P PIDPRMW S P PIDRUN S P PIDSTOP S P DEVLD SP DEVST SP FREAD SP FWRITE ACOS P ACOSD P ANDED ANDEDO ASIN P ASIND P ATAN P ATAND P BACOS P BASIN P BATAN P BCOS P BDSQRT P BSIN P BSQRT P BTAN P COS P COSD P DBL2FLT P DEG P DEGD P DINT2DBL P DINT2FLT P E P E P E P E P ED P ED P ED P ED P EDMAX P EDMIN P EDMOV P EDNEG P EDSQRT P EMAX P EMIN P EMOV P ENEG P EREXP P ESQRT P EVAL P EXP P EXPD P FLT2DBL P INT2DBL P INT2FLT P LDEO LDEDO LOG P LOG10 P LOG10D P LOGD P OREO OREDO POW P POWD P
107. instruction STOP No operation instruction NOP NOPLF c instruction Comparison operation ANDO _U ANDDO _U BKCMPO P _U DBKCMPO P _U LDO _U LDDO _U ORO _U ORDO _U instruction Arithmetic operation P _U P _U P _U P _U B P B P B P B P BK P _U BK P _U D P _U D P _U D P _U D instruction P _U DB P DB P DB P DB P DBK P _U DBK P _U DDEC P _U DEC P _U DINC P _U INC P _U Data transfer instruction BLKMOVB P BMOV P BMOVL P BXKCH P CML P CMLB P DCML P DFMOV P DFMOVL P DMOV P DXCH P FMOV P FMOVL P MOV P MOVB P SWAP P XCH P Logical operation instruction BKAND P BKOR P BKXNR P BKXOR P DAND P DOR P DXNR P DXOR P WAND P WOR P WXNR P WXOR P Data shift instruction BSFL P BSFR P DSFL P DSFR P SFL P SFR P SFTBL P SFTBR P SETWL P SETWR P Bit processing instruction BKRST P BRST P BSET P DTEST P TEST P Data conversion instruction ASC2INT P BCD P BIN P BKBCD P BKBIN P BTOW P DABCD P DABIN P _U DBCD P DBIN P DBL2DINT P DBL2INT P DBL2UDINT P DBL2UINT P DDABCD P DDABIN P _U DECO P DGBIN P _U DGRY P _U DHABIN P DINT2INT P DINT2UDINT P DINT2UINT P DIS P DNEG P DVAL P _U EMOD P ENCO P FLT2DINT P FLT2INT P FLT2UDINT P FLT2UINT P GBIN P _U GRY P _U HABIN P INT2DINT P INT2UDINT P INT2UINT P NDIS P NE
108. is displayed to the transition name that is not connected with an FBD LD element 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 162 6 6 Creating SFC Programs Creating SFC diagrams This section explains how to create an SFC diagram Elements which can be inserted are different depending on selected places Since the size or place of each element connection line are placed automatically it cannot be freely changed Precautions When the contents shown below were entered selected a red frame appears in the edit box and the settings cannot be configured e Duplicate step name Step No Transition No e Unusable step attribute e Step name which cannot be specified as a jump destination Inserting editing steps Minserting a step Select a step transition jump then select Edit gt Insert gt Step Changing a step name step No step attribute step attribute target e Using a shortcut key Step names only can be changed Select a step and press the key e On the Step Properties screen Select a step then select Edit gt Properties e From the menu Select a step then select Edit gt Modify gt each item e Double click Double click a step The target to be changed is different depending on the place double clicked Page 161 SFC element Poin tr By entering a Step No number to the edit box for changing a step name the entered number is set as the step name or the Step No BESpeaxxhe s Action gt
109. library file was edited while GX Works3 is running updating the display information of library is necessary Operating procedure MRegistering library to be referenced 1 Select the Library tab on the Element Selection window 2 Select User Library then select Project gt Library Operation gt Register to Library List Ly 3 Select a file on the Register Library to Library List screen then click the Open button For the library element which is protected by password the icon will be displayed in a pale color on the Library tab 10 SEGMENTING PROGRAMS 221 10 3 Enhancing Use of User Library Deleting library updating display information 1 Select the Library tab on the Element Selection window 2 Select the library to be deleted updated then select Project gt Library Operation gt Delete from Library List Lx Update the Display Information of Library Utilizing elements The element registered in the library on the Element Selection window can be utilized in other projects To utilize POU that was set the read protection at the time of library export entering password is required before editing Operating procedure mPasting elements onto the Project view Drag and drop an element onto the project view from the Library tab on the Element Selection window The elements can be dropped only to the place which is able to create the same kind of data The read protected POU is displayed on the Pro
110. list to monitor MAIN PRG Block List Monitoring Read Only 266Step E3 No Data Name Title Conversion Status Block START END Step Transition Block Block Stop Mode Number of Active Steps Continuous Comment a Block First Process M1 M M3 1 M Block Comment 1 Block Second Process MIO MTD M2 MTS Mlk Comment E iS E E a eS een ae aie WW Poin tr The SFC diagram of specified block can be displayed by double clicking the block column during monitoring 14 CHECKING OPERATION OF PROGRAMS 2 14 2 Check Execution Programs on Program Editor 73 Monitoring all SFC blocks in batch active steps Active status of all blocks steps can be displayed Active status of blocks steps are not changed if the status of a CPU module is switched from RUN to STOP Thereby the active status when the CPU module was changed to STOP state is displayed on a monitor screen This monitoring function may not work properly when there is a difference between the program written in a CPU module and program in a project Monitoring SFC blocks in batch Display current active inactive status of all blocks in a list Window Select Online gt Monitor gt SFC All Blocks Batch Monitoring 3 Block No 0 Monitoring Data Name Block Stop Monitoring Title First Process Active Step Monitor Mm 2 fats fet ea 9 of 12 13 14 34 35 36 37 38 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
111. mounting status Mounting status Number of CPU modules the I O Assignment Setting module name point Base Power Extension Cable Setting cannot be read properly to the extension base units where its number is incorrectly set Point Mounting status can be read to the I O Assignment Setting by clicking the Read Mounting Status button 4 CREATING MODULE CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM AND SETTING PARAMETERS 4 2 Setting Parameters 95 96 Setting parameters of control CPU Set the parameters related to CPU module the host CPU for a multiple CPU configuration For details on the setting items of the parameters refer to the following manuals e CPU parameters memory card parameters LA MELSEC iQ R CPU Module User s Manual Application MELSEC iQ F FX5 User s Manual Application e Module parameters MELSEC iQ R Ethernet User s Manual Application MELSEC iQ F FX5 User s Manual Application Setting parameters Operating procedure 1 Double click Parameter gt PLC type of the project gt CPU Parameter Module Parameter Memory Card Parameter on the Project view 2 Set the items on the parameter editor 3 Click the Apply button or OK button Point The setting screen can also be opened by double clicking the object of a module on the Module Configuration Diagram Precautions For the setting values of the parameters use the characters in the Unicode Basic Multilingual Plane If the characters outside the
112. occurred extend the timeout time on the Specify Connection Destination screen The online program change function will continue performing if a warning occurred at conversion When the online program change function is performed after changing the label names which can be accessed from external devices the data before the change is remained in the global label assignment information To delete the remaining data write the global label assignment information from the Online Data Operation screen When global labels are changed programs using the global labels will be a writing target for performing the online program change function Design instructions A WARNING MWhen data change program change or status control is performed from a personal computer to a running programmable controller create an interlock circuit outside the programmable controller to ensure that the whole system always operates safely Furthermore for the online operations performed from a personal computer to a CPU module the corrective actions against a communication error due to such as a Cable connection fault should be predetermined as a system 258 13 WRITING READING DATA TO CPU MODULE 13 3 Writing Programs While CPU is in RUN laintenance Instructions CAUTION MT he online operations performed from a personal computer to a running CPU module program change while a CPU module is in RUN state operating status change such as RUN STOP switching
113. oe bh ab ns See wees eee oo eee eee bos 217 10 3 Enhancing Use of User Library ii16 oie eet cede eed Pose deed choad Oh ee eee eae wee 219 USC NDVANY 2c 6 odtse doe te a ood e Cees ee eee AS eee ee bee dhe ee oe E eee eA Es 219 Creating libraries nnna e Gan ee ee oee Bea beeen ean seae PhGee ae heen ehes eames eoe 220 Enhanced use of libraries 1 0 ee ee eee eee eee e nee e nes 221 10 4 Enhanced Use of Application Library Sample Library 0 0c eee es 223 CONTENTS PART 4 DEBUGGING AND OPERATION CHAPTER 11 SIMULATING PROGRAM 226 TI Simulation FUNGON lt 2 ois oe holt cee e bbe chee obser bide dete be bee Peers Cid bedded oes 226 Safety and handling consideration 0 0 0 0 ee ee eee eee ees 226 T2 Staring Stopping SIMUlANON 603 dod carecee eh eee Cee eee een eee eae Sees oe ee eee ee ee 227 Cooperative simulation 0 0 0 0 0 eee eee ee eee een 227 11 3 External Device Operation Simulation 00 ccc ee 229 VO System Setting MUNCHON 226 eccse hes mbes ahi ienai we Genk Gee Rew es ehh od AR PSS ate eee E a 229 Execution procedure of I O System Setting function 2 0 0 0 eee eee 229 Executing I O System Setting function 1 0 0 oc ene tenets 229 Supported device label 0 0 0 ee eee ee ee eee eens 233 CHAPTER 12 SETTING ROUTE TO CPU MODULE 235 12 1 Specification of Connection Destination 0 0 2 eee 235 122 Direct CONNCCHON 14 c42005044 5500005005 4006040SE04 sen t
114. of global label local label initial values Version 1 000A only After adding modifying global label initial values or local label initial values writing the label initial value file to CPU module is required FX5CPU does not support the initial value of label When clearing all initial values deleting the label initial value file to CPU module is required Furthermore under booting writing the label initial value file to SD memory card is required and deleting the label initial value file is also required from the Boot File Setting of the Memory Card Parameter when clearing all initial values If do not write delete the label initial value file to from the CPU module an error occurs at powering ON resetting or changing the status from RUN to STOP of the CPU module Online program change with the smallest configuration The data with the smallest configuration can be written by setting the option as shown below Set the option for saving the data capacity Note that however when the project with the smallest configuration is read from the programmable controller the project cannot be restored completely Always save the recent write source project e Tool gt Options gt Convert gt Online Program Change gt Operational Setting Writing range for online program change The range to be written differs depending on the editing methods of programs When a new ladder block is inserted or a ladder block is deleted the inser
115. of points for the module becomes equivalent to one specified for Setting of Points Occupied by Empty Slot of system parameter Network The Simulation function does not support the network Watchdog timer It operates in accordance with the simulation time Attachment of extended SRAM cassette The simulator operates as if an extended SRAM cassette 8 MB was attached Parameter error will occur when specifying the capacity more than 8 MB on the Extended SRAM Cassette Setting of CPU parameter APPENDICES APPENDIX Appendix 5 Using Simulation Function 355 Drive usage The data in the ROM drive of CPU module program memory data memory is stored in a temporary folder in the hard disk of a personal computer The ROM drive usage per data depends on the hard disk of a personal computer Enabling the remote RESET The simulator operates as if Enable was set to Remote Reset in the Simulation function regardless of Remote Reset Setting under Operation Related Setting of the CPU parameter Writing parameters to Intelligent function module When writing parameters on the Online Data Operation screen the availability differs according to the interaction with an Intelligent function module O Writable x Not writable Not supported Parameter Cooperated Not cooperated Simple motion module setting x Other than above x CPU number The Simulation function only supports CPU No 1 The Simulation function is perfo
116. password setting register change authentication deletion Read protected password write protected password Delete data in a programmable controller Write protected password CPU memory operation initialization E Target file Available x Not available File name Availability System parameter CPU parameter module parameter module extended parameter memory card parameter O Remote password Global label setting xI OI x Global label assignment information Global label initial value Local label initial value Program file POU FB file FUN file File register Device initial value Common device comment Each program device comment OP OPO OKO Or X X Firmware update prohibited file MWhen accessing from external devices using function other than GX Works3 A file password is validate when accessing a file using the FTP server function For details refer to the following manual MELSEC iQ R Ethernet User s Manual Application A file password is validate when accessing a file using MC protocols For details refer to the following manual LA MELSEC iQ R Serial Communication Module User s Manual Application 15 PROTECTING DATA 15 6 Preventing Illegal Data Reading Writing 307 Precautions Keep passwords in a secure place If the registered password is lost or Permanent PLC Lock set in FXSCPU is needed to be cancelled initialize the CPU module using the CPU Memory Operation function Page 330 C
117. program of GX Works2 For details refer to the following manual LA MELSEC iQ R Programming Manual Program Design 3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 68 3 2 Creating Project File Saving project Save the project on the personal computer or another data storage device Saving projects under the specified name Window Project gt Save As Savein J GXW3 project O i EP E P Name s Date modified Type Size ay HB PROJECT1 gx3 5 26 2014 6 48 PM G File Recent Places H pROJECT2 gx3 5 26 2014 6 10PM G File Desktop Libraries LY Computer 1 Network Save as type GX Works3 Project gx3 X Title A a Other Format a Please change the windows with this button to use workspace Format project x MELSOFT Navigator supports this Format When saving the project with the workspace format click the Save as a Workspace Format Project button to switch the screen Set the items and click the Save button e ate Overwriting projects Select Project gt Save FA 3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 69 3 2 Creating Project File Deleting project Delete the project saved on the personal computer or another data storage device Window Project gt Delete Save Destination Path E C Users Administrator Documents GxW3 project Project List Name HEJPROJECTI Workspace Name Module Type ROB Browse Title File Type Move up GX Works3 Project GX Works3 Project
118. project in the personal computer Hereinafter called Project A 2 Start GX Works3 and write the programs and parameters of a safety project to CPU module K Page 250 Writing data to programmable controller 3 Test the programs fully in the application environment 4 Start another GX Works3 and connect it to RnSFCPU to read the programs and the parameters Page 254 Reading data from programmable controller Hereinafter called Project B 5 Visually check that there is no difference between Project A and Project B 1 gt Page 327 Checking programs Page 328 Checking module parameters Safety Communication Setting Page 328 Checking parameters of safety remote I O slave station of CC Link IE Field Network Checking programs Select Project A as the verify destination at Project B Compare Verify Source on the detailed display of the Verify Result screen with the program editor of Project A to confirm whether the intended program has been written properly Edited safety project Project A Safety project in the CPU module Project B I I I I ss SafetyPoul PRG LD 6Step 1 Resutebist B safetyPoul aa oiimi sella iat I I I List Verify Source Step Verify Destination LD SAXO Oo LD SAXO OUT SAYO OUT SAYO LD SAx10 OUT SAiy10 END LD SAX10 OUT SAW10 END wh 18 CHECKING CHANGING CPU MODULE OPERATION 2 18 3 Operations of RNSFCPU 3 7 Chec
119. required the user authentication The following table shows the functions restricted in CPU module depending on the access level Available x Not available od OO od Security Writeldeleteasecuity 00000 JO S e E M OT e e SO C Safety function Switch Safety Operation Mode User authentication is not required to write read a device memory except for the file register How to use the User Authentication function access prevention 1 Create a safety project and add a user of Administrators to the project Page 61 Creating project 2 Add the users who are allowed to operate the project lt Page 305 User management 3 Save the project Page 69 Saving project Once the above procedure has done logging on is necessary to access to the projects Logging on to project For the project that the user information is registered logging on is required to perform the operations such as opening a project Enter the user name and the password that are registered in the project to log on Changing password of logon user Change the password of the user who is logging on to a project mi PEtaliNg PLOCe IS Select Project gt Security gt Change User Password 4 15 PROTECTING DATA 30 15 4 Preventing Illegal Access to Project User management Manage the user registration status of a project to which the security is set A User of the Administrators can change all user s passwords Window
120. setting of CPU parameter to use the device initial values Select Online gt Write to PLC to write the device initial values and the parameter to the CPU module Completed 1 98 8 SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES 8 3 Setting Device Initial Values Setting device initial values Set the device values set in the device memory as device initial values Create a device initial value data in advance Page 72 Creating projects Operating procedure 1 Set the items on the Device Initial Value editor 2 Select the data to be utilized from the pull down list in Device Memory for Register Diversion and click the Register to Device Memory button 3 Click the OK button Using device initial values If using the device values of which ranges have been set as initial values at the CPU module startup specify the file name to be used for the initial values in the File Setting tab of the CPU Parameter MDevice range The devices that can be set for device initial values are within the range set to Memory Device Setting of the CPU Parameter Registering to device memory The data range set on the Device Initial Value editor is registered to device memory Operating procedure 1 Select Device Memory for Register Diversion 2 Click the Register to Device Memory button If the registered data is modified on the device memory it will not be applied to device initial values Click the Device Memory Dive
121. so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller systems ex Instance name _ Module number Label name GF11_1 zReserveAreaSBO0007 Editing module labels The editing on the label editor of the module label M Global which has been registered into the global label only the deletion with selecting the row is applicable Do not edit or add labels on the label editor Re registering deleted module labels When registering the module labels which are once deleted from the global label editor select a module name displayed in the Module tab of the Element Selection window and right click it and select Add Module Label from the shortcut menu Editing structures When module labels are registered the definition of the structure in the module labels are registered in Structured Data Types of the Project view A defined structure can be copied on the Project view The copied defined structure name of the module label is changed from a to 4 5 REGISTERING LABELS 11 5 3 Registering Module Labels 5 5 4 Registering System Label This section explains how to register the global labels as the system labels Only standard global labels support system labels System label Using the system labels controlled by MELSOFT Navigator enables programming with the same label names among the iQ Works supported products GX Works3 MT Developer2 GT Designers Once a workspace is saved with MELSOFT Navigator a database to mana
122. the label name is entered in the program and then a local label with the same name is registered Treated as a global label e After a local label is registered the label name is entered in the program and then a global label with the same name is registered Treated as a local label The global labels and local labels can be distinguished by setting the different color on the Color and Font screen 120 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 6 1 Programming Functions Creation procedure 1 Create data of program block Page 72 Creating projects 2 Setan execution order and an execution type Page 121 Program execution order execution type settings 3 Create a program K Page 123 Creating Ladder Programs Page 145 Creating ST Programs Page 151 Creating FBD LD Programs Page 158 Creating SFC Programs 4 Check the created program Page 183 Checking Programs 5 Convert the created program K Page 184 Converting Programs 6 2 Program execution order execution type settings This section explains how to set an execution order and an execution type for a program Program execution order settings Set an execution order of program block in a program file An SFC program is executed according to the block No Check the block No on an SFC block list Window e Convert gt Program File Setting e Select a program file on the Project view then right click and select Program File Setting from the shortcut menu fa
123. the number of global labels in the copy destination and the copy source and retry pasting data Program file When copying a program file the program blocks under the selected program file will be copied When pasting data to other project the common device comments can also be copied by setting the following option Tool gt Options gt Edit gt Copy gt Operational Setting Deleting data Delete the data of the project that is opened Operating procedure 1 Select the data to be deleted on the Project view 2 Select Project gt Data Operation gt Delete Data right click and select Delete Data from the shortcut menu 3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 3 3 Creating Data 73 Property Display the properties of data such as folders parameters and programs Titles and comments can be added to each data Select a data on the Project view then Project gt Data Operation gt Properties right click and select Properties from the shortcut menu General E Data Name Data Name Project Title Last Change 5 27 2014 5 27 01 PM mQperating procedure Set the items and click the OK button Titles The title set to a data is displayed with a data name on the Navigation window The title is also displayed on the Online Data Operation screen when writing reading data to from the programmable controller Og Se k zl Module Configuration Prop
124. unused devices e Set the write target of device comments to SD memory card For FX5CPU the writable capacity of SD memory card is the same as that of CPU module e Set the range to be written 13 WRITING READING DATA TO CPU MODULE 2 13 1 Writing Reading Programmable Controller Data 53 Reading data from programmable controller Read data from a CPU module For the considerations for reading data refer to the following section K Page 256 Considerations for Online data operation Operating procedure Select the Read tab on the Online Data Operation screen Select the files to be read and read target Click the Detail button to set the details such as a range to be read NRWhD Click the Execute button Point Data can be read when a project is not opened L Page 62 Creating new project by data read from programmable controller Precautions When accessing SD memory card frequently using the data logging function or database function the reading operation from the programmable controller to open the Online Data Operation screen may be slow Parameters WUnsupported modules The module parameters that are not supported by GX Works3 cannot be read EModel name in Safety Communication Setting The model name of Safety Communication Setting of the module parameter is not written to CPU module The item will be blank if it is read Program When reading a program local labels program read Program
125. using program editors not a Zoom 2 Same value as N current value is displayed 268 14 CHECKING OPERATION OF PROGRAMS 14 2 Check Execution Programs on Program Editor mQperating procedure Open the ladder editor and select Online gt Monitor gt Start Monitoring 4 Stop Monitoring 4 FA Ld a Read Mntr v Displays ON OFF status of contact coil M2 ON Baii M2 OFF pt x2 x3 em O x4 Displays current value of word device DO INCP 20210 M10 M11 x10 x5 i L mm When any values other than fixed value are specified to the element of an array an indefinite value is displayed as the monitored value of the array WON OFF state display During monitoring the ON OFF state is displayed as shown in the following figure on i 4 Oo Ey TT oF 4 H 4p 4h 5 e 1 Only comparison instructions that are equivalent to contacts and the instructions that are equivalent to coils are supported Comparison instructions equivalent to coil BIN16 bit data comparison BIN32 bit data comparison floating point data comparison 64 bit float data comparison Instructions equivalent to coil SET RST PLS PLF SFT SFTP MC FF DELTA DELTAP Monitoring FB programs Double click the FB instance to monitor the FB program Changing current values Current values can be changed by the following methods during monitoring
126. was used for converting all programs Version 1 011M of earlier and Version 1 015R or later In that case convert all programs using the same version of GX Works3 e For the version of GX Works3 is 1 015R or later the macro subroutine type function blocks will be an error when the multiple coils exist on the left side of VAR_IN_ OUT in a program FbPousto FbPow D abe Label B bLabel 1 39 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 6 3 Creating Ladder Programs Inserting functions Insert a function in a ladder program For the creation methods of functions refer to the following section K Page 217 Creating Functions Operating procedure 1 Drag and drop a function element to an arbitrary cell on the sequence program from the Project view or Element Selection window 2 Connect an input and an output to the function Poin tr e By entering fun in the element entry dialog the options of function elements are displayed A function element can be entered by selecting it from the options e To insert a row after a function was inserted refer to the point in Inserting function blocks Page 128 Inserting function blocks BAdding deleting arguments Only for functions of which number of arguments can be changed the arguments can be added deleted Operating procedure 1 Move the cursor on a function 2 Select Edit gt I O Argument gt Increment Argument 4 Delete Argument 8 Replacing functions Opera
127. whole system always operates safely Furthermore for the online operations performed from a personal computer to a programmable controller CPU the corrective actions against a communication error due to such as a cable connection fault should be predetermined as a system Startup and Maintenance Precautions N CAUTION The online operations performed from a personal computer to a running CPU module program change while a CPU module is in RUN operating status changes such as RUN STOP switching and remote control operation must be executed after the manual has been carefully read and the safety has been ensured When changing a program while a CPU module is in RUN online program change it may cause a program corruption in some operating conditions Fully understand the precautions before use The positioning test functions such as OPR JOG inching or testing positioning data for positioning module must be executed with the CPU module set to STOP after the manual has been carefully read and the safety has been ensured Specially when executing the function on the network system ensure the safety thoroughly since the machinery whose operation cannot be checked by an operator may be activated The operation failure may cause the injury or machine damage CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT 1 Mitsubishi programmable controller the PRODUCT shall be used in conditions where any problem fault or failure occurring in the PR
128. 10 3 Enhancing Use of User Library Editing library Elements in a library file can be edited added and deleted same as projects The password authentication is required when editing the library protected by password Besides the user registration is required for the library file exported from a safety project I Page 305 User management For details on the maximum number that can be created for each data refer to the following section KL Page 71 Maximum number of data that can be created in one project Operating procedure 1 Select Project gt Open Other Format File gt GX Works3 Format gt Open User Library 2 Edit POUs The editing method is same way as elements of the project Enhanced use of libraries Element in a library can be utilized by registering the library into the library list The reference to the library file is registered in the library list The information of library file is saved not in a project unit but in a logon user unit on personal computer Library 1 Librarie Element 1 Element 3 Project c Element 2 Element 4 Utilize Copy For the considerations for utilizing the library file created in the different version of GX Works3 refer to the following section K Page 340 Use Project in Different Version Registering to library list Register the library which contains the elements to be utilized to the list Up to 64 libraries can be registered When the registered
129. 2 Host CPU CPU module CPU No 1 Other CPU 4 CREATING MODULE CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM AND SETTING PARAMETERS 91 4 1 Creating Module Configuration Diagram 92 Inputting start XY in batch Set the start XY of each module in order of the slot number in a batch FX5CPU does not support it Operating procedure Select Edit gt Start XY Batch Input fy Inputting default points in batch Change the points points occupied by empty slot and empty slot side points for a module occupies two or more slots in all the modules and empty slots on the Module Configuration Diagram to default in a batch FX5CPU does not support it Operating procedure Select Edit gt Default Points Batch Input Checking power supply capacity and I O points Check if the power capacity and I O points in the configuration on the Module Configuration Diagram exceed the upper limit FX5CPU does not support it Operating procedure 1 Select Edit gt Check gt Power Supply Capacity and I O Points 7 2 Check the result displayed on the Result of Power Supply Capacity and I O Points Check window Checking system configurations Check if the layout of each module on the Module Configuration Diagram is proper The result is displayed on the Output window Operating procedure 1 Select Edit gt Check gt System Configuration 4 2 Check the result displayed on the Output window Operation for Write to PLC Read from PLC Only parame
130. 2 3 Screen Configuration 9 30 Customizing resetting toolbars Set the types of tool buttons to be displayed on each toolbar The selected tool buttons on the list are displayed on the tool bar Operating procedure Customizing toolbar 1 Click on the toolbar and select Show Hide Buttons gt toolbar name 2 Select the tool button to be displayed from the list Resetting toolbar Click on the toolbar and select Show Hide Buttons gt Reset 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS 2 3 Screen Configuration Navigation window Navigation window is the screen that displays the content of a project in a tree format Operations such as creating new data and displaying editing screens can be performed on the tree For details refer to the following section K Page 56 PROJECT MANAGEMENT Window View gt Docking Window gt Navigation EE Module Co nfiguration E n Program Status icons fEl Initial m fI Scan fil Standby HEL No Execution Type US Unregistered Program FB FUN E fia Label fia Global Label z Global ie Structured Data Types E Device m WR Device Comment Each Program Device Commen E Common Device Comment fe Device Memory ve MAIN fez Device Initial Value eS m Parameter The character color on the Project view displays red when the program is not converted Displays icons which indicate status of the project Status icons Pag
131. 210 SD1211 SD1212 SD1213 SD1214 SD1215 SD1216 SD1220 to SD1226 D1230 to SD1236 SD1240 to SD1246 SD1250 to SD1256 SD1260 to SD1266 Minimum scan time Maximum scan time END processing time Constant scan waiting time Scan program execution time Memory card mounting status SD memory card drive 2 usage status SD memory card drive 2 capacity SD memory card drive 2 free space Device label memory drive 3 usage status Device label memory drive 3 capacity Device label memory file storage area capacity Data memory drive 4 usage status Data memory drive 4 capacity Extended SRAM cassette capacity identification information Specification of the number of write instruction executions to data memory Execution cycle Bumpless function availability setting for the S PIDP instruction Data logging setting No 1 Latest storage file number Data logging setting No 1 Oldest storage file number Data logging setting No 1 Internal buffer free space Data logging setting No 1 Number of processing overflow occurrences Data logging setting No 1 Data logging error cause Data logging setting No 2 Data logging setting No 3 Data logging setting No 4 Data logging setting No 5 Data logging setting No 6 APPENDICES APPENDIX Appendix 5 Using Simulation Function Description Minimum scan time unit ms Minimum scan time unit us Maximum scan time unit ms Maximum scan time
132. 3 Section 16 4 Section 18 1 Section 18 2 Section 18 4 Appendix 1 Appendix 3 Appendix 4 MAdded or modified parts TERMS Section 2 3 Section 2 4 Section 2 9 Section 3 2 Section 3 3 Section 3 4 Section 3 5 Section 3 6 Section 4 2 Section 4 3 Section 4 4 Section 6 1 Section 6 2 Section 6 3 Section 6 7 Chapter 10 Section 10 1 Section 10 3 Section 10 4 Section 13 2 Section 15 4 Chapter 16 Section 16 2 Section 16 3 Appendix 1 Appendix 4 MAdded or modified parts TERMS Section 1 2 Section 1 3 Section 1 4 Section 2 1 Section 2 3 Section 2 4 Section 2 7 Section 2 9 Section 3 1 Section 3 2 Section 3 3 Section 3 4 Section 3 5 Section 3 6 Section 3 7 Section 4 1 Section 4 2 Section 4 3 Section 5 1 Section 5 2 Section 5 4 Section 6 1 Section 6 2 Section 6 3 Section 6 5 Section 6 6 Section 6 8 Section 6 9 Section 6 10 Chapter 9 Section 9 1 Section 9 2 Section 9 3 Section 9 4 Section 9 5 Section 9 6 Section 9 7 Chapter 10 Section 10 1 Section 10 3 Section 10 4 Chapter 11 Section 11 3 Section 12 3 Section 13 1 Section 13 3 Section 13 6 Chapter 14 Section 14 1 Section 14 2 Section 14 3 Section 14 4 Section 14 9 Chapter 15 Section 15 3 Section 15 4 Section 15 5 Section 15 6 Section 15 7 Section 16 2 Section 16 4 Chapter 18 Section 18 3 Section 18 5 Appendix 1 Appendix 2 Appendix 3 Appendix 4 Appendix 5 This manual confers no industrial property rights of any other kind
133. 4 Program File Setting Set the execution order for program blocks Program File Name MAIN A Move Up lt ecutio Pier Program Block Name 1 ProgPou Move Down 2 ge ProgPout 3 ith ProgPou2 4 5 A ProgPou3 Set by Name 6 te ProgPoud 7 g ProgPous ecify the Destinat A 2 Explanation Written to PLC it is handled as one program merged in the execution order Program blocks to set after the FEND instruction are following programs Jump destination program of CJ SCJ or JMP instruction Subroutine program Interrupt program OK l Cancel Operating procedure 1 Selecta program file name 2 Setan order to be executed to a program block then click the OK button Point A program file can be sorted in the execution order specified in the program file settings Select a program file on the Project view then right click and select Sort gt Execution Order from the shortcut menu 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 1 21 6 2 Program execution order execution type settings Program execution types One of the following execution types can be specified to a program Initial Scan Fixed Scan Event Standby or No Execution Type For details refer to the following manuals LA MELSEC iQ R CPU Module User s Manual Application A MELSEC iQ F FX5 User s Manual Application Only the Fixed Scan can be specified in safety programs Setting method To set the
134. 4 2 Setting Parameters BEnabling disabling parameters Set whether to enable disable the initial setting and auto refresh as an intelligent function module parameter Since a CPU module limits the number of parameters that can be set for the mounted Intelligent function modules check the setting information using this function and enable disable the parameters so that the number of set parameters is within the allowable range For details on the number of the parameter settings refer to the manuals of respective Intelligent function modules Operating procedure Set the items and click the Close button Item Description Initial Setting Count Unselect the item if it is not set as an intelligent function module parameter For a module with no initial settings is displayed Auto Refresh Setting Transfer to Intelligent Unselect the item if it is not set as an intelligent function module CPU module parameter Count Function Module For a module for which auto refresh is not set No Setting is displayed Transfer to CPU Initial Setting Total Counts Displays the number of initial settings set as intelligent function module parameters Auto Refresh Setting Total Counts Displays the number of auto refreshes set as intelligent function module parameters Checking property information Check the setting information of Intelligent function module By this operation the mounting slot number start I O number and title up to 32 chara
135. 77 14 4 Checking Current Values by Registering Devices Labels Type Target Specification method Structure array Label Structure array Label name Specific member Label name one dimensional element number two dimensional element number three dimensional element number member name Nested function block Label Nested function block Label name Labels in the nested function block Label name label name in the function block label name in the nested function block When nesting a label for one or more level deeper the lower part of the label name which are delimited by a dot is regarded as a label name Example MAIN _PRG_LD FBO 1 FB1_1 FB2_1 INOUT When a function block includes array labels or Follow the specification method of the array or structure structured labels MRegistering devices labels from program editor label editor 1 Select a device label to be registered in the Watch window from each program editor label editor 2 Select Online gt Watch gt Register to Watch Window gt Watch 1 to Watch 4 Devices labels can be registered by dragging and dropping onto the Watch window Ladder editor Select a cell of device label to be registered and then drag and drop the border of the selected cell onto the Watch window ST editor Select a token of device label to be registered and then drag and drop it onto the Watch window e FBD LD editor Select an element of device label to be registe
136. A 081215ENG B SH NA 081215ENG C SH NA 081215ENG D SH NA 081215ENG E SH NA 081215ENG F Japanese manual number SH 081214 F Description First edition Partial correction MAdded or modified parts Section 1 2 Section 2 4 Section 2 8 Section 2 9 Section 3 1 Section 3 2 Section 4 2 Section 4 3 Section 4 4 Section 5 1 Section 5 2 Section 5 4 Section 6 1 Section 6 5 Section 12 3 Chapter 13 Section 13 2 Section 13 4 Section 13 8 Section 15 2 Section 15 3 Section 15 4 Section 16 1 Section 17 3 Appendix 1 MAdded or modified parts TERMS Chapter 1 Section 1 1 Section 1 2 Section 1 3 Section 1 4 Section 2 3 Section 2 4 Section 2 9 Section 3 1 Section 3 2 Section 3 3 Section 3 4 Section 3 5 Chapter 4 Section 4 1 Section 4 2 Section 4 3 Section 4 4 Section 5 1 Section 5 2 Section 5 3 Section 5 4 Section 6 1 Section 6 2 Section 6 3 Section 6 4 Section 6 5 Section 6 6 Section 7 1 Section 8 1 Chapter 9 Section 9 1 Section 9 2 Section 9 3 Section 9 4 Section 9 5 Section 9 6 Section 9 7 Chapter 10 Section 10 1 Section 10 2 Chapter 11 Section 11 1 Section 11 2 Section 12 1 Section 12 2 Section 12 3 Section 12 4 Section 12 5 Section 12 6 Section 12 7 Section 13 1 Section 13 3 Section 13 4 Chapter 14 Section 14 1 Section 14 2 Section 14 5 Section 14 6 Section 14 7 Section 14 8 Section 15 3 Section 15 4 Section 15 5 Chapter 16 Section 16 1 Section 16 2 Section 16
137. A fn nr erent ee tren entet tee emrerereneneen eenen eenen pe rene nee cen enemmn meeneem ennnen cancccccccccccccss 5 Va Wodi Word UnsignedVBit Swine VAR Var Dword2 6 Var Word3 word Unsioned Bit Sting 16 bit van ZA J 7 Var Word4 word Unsigned Bit Sting 16 bit VAR 8 Var_Booll C o g Var_Bool3 Bt OAA 10 Var Dword2 Double Word Unsioned Bit Sting 32 bit VAR d m J S a ee ee eee ee Var_Lreal Extended Display Automatic 2 In the packing block the labels are assigned in order of the label row number without the label editor sorted 3 When the data overlaps 64 bit address boundary in one data a free space padding is inserted 4 The data which requires 2 word assignment is assigned from the start position of 32 bit address boundary The types of packing blocks and assignment order is shown below They are arranged in ascending order due to minimize the useless space 2 Word Word Unsigned Bit String 16 bit Word Signed 3 Padding is not inserted because a packing block is assigned per 4 String Unicode String Unicode one word unit though the assignment amount differs depending on the number of character strings 5 Double Word Double Word Unsigned Bit String 32 bit Double Word Signed stm me 7 FLOAT Single FLOAT Single Precision Precision 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 1 6 9 Converting Programs 85 9 Retentive Timer Retentive Timer 0 11 FLOAT Doub
138. ABELS 5 2 Registering Labels 5 3 Registering Module Labels This section explains how to register the module labels Registering to global label Module labels are registered by clicking the Yes button on the confirmation screen displayed after performing either of the following operations e Place a module on the Module Configuration Diagram and fix the parameters e Add a new module from the Project view The registered module labels are displayed in Global Label in the Project view and in the Module tab of the Element Selection window When using a module label in a program enter a module label name directly or drag and drop it from the Element Selection window Point To use a module label under arbitrary name set alias to the module label Precautions Considerations when registering module labels Since all the registered module labels are written to a CPU module the memory capacity of the CPU module may be exceeded In this case perform any of the following operations e Delete the module labels that are not used Page 108 Deleting rows deleting labels e Change the write target of the global labels to SD memory card e For FXSCPU the writable capacity is the same as that of the CPU module even when data is written to an SD memory card MModule label with the name that starts with zReserve Do not write data to the module label with the label name that starts with ZReserve among the module labels Doing
139. ATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS 47 2 5 Checking and Changing Shortcut Keys 2 6 Checking and Changing Colors and Fonts The colors and fonts used in each editor can be checked and changed on the Color and Font screen The changed color and font settings are saved in a logon user unit Window View gt Color and Font Color and Font Target adjes El E As Font Setting a Font Setting Automatic Font Based on System Settings E Color Setting Normal Text and Symbol Oo Black 7 Normal Background C White ha Monitoring Information L Blue x Cursor Overwrite Mode E Custom x Cursor Insert Mode L Custom x Unconverted Ladder Background L Custom a Converted Error Background ES Yellow a Common Comment E Green x Comment of Each Program E Green x Device E Custom x Global Label E Fink x Local Label E Fink l Ye Import Export Back to Default Apply Operating procedure Select User Setting from the pull down list in Font Setting Set the items on the Font screen and click the OK button Select the color from Color Setting to be changed and click the Apply button NWN Click the OK button Point f By importing the exported file gcs the settings can be utilized in other personal computers The setting files exported from GX Works2 can be imported However the name of the color may differ Precautions Some
140. Al fe Project Name SafetyCommucationSetting I B c D E F G H J I Proj act Name SafetyCommucationsetting I 2 No Communicatio Network Station No Station Type Model Name Communi Open System Sending Safety Receive l 1 1 Remote Device Station N2Z2GFS 2 32D Active 30 60 SA X 1 2 Local Station ROSSFCPU Active 24 60 SAX Checking parameters of safety remote I O slave station of CC Link IE Field Network Check the following for all of the safety remote I O modules in Project B CSV files can also be checked by using other text editors Read the parameters from the slave station for CC Link IE Field Network of Project B to a CSV file Compare the saved CSV file with the Parameter Processing of Slave Station screen of Project A to confirm whether the intended parameters have been written properly Accesses the PLC CPU by using the current connection destination Please check if there is any problem with the connection destination Process is executed according to the parameters written in the PLC CPU For information on items not displayed on the screen please refer to the Operating Manual Import Export L I Edited safety project Project A I Safety project in the CPU module Project B I Parameter Processing of Slave Station E l C Eok NZ2GFSS2 32D PararnInfo csv Microsoft Excel fo
141. B FUN MELSEC instructions 4 These can be used for some names Unusable character string for label name Category Character string Invalid Space amp SGS t haaa ips L 0x007f character 0xD800 to 0xDBFF 0xDC00 to OxDFFF U 0000 to U 001F U 0080 to U 009F U 00A0 to U 00BF U FFFE U FFFF Windows reserved word COM1 COM2 COM3 COM4 COM5 COM6 COM7 COMB COM9 LPT1 LPT2 LPT3 LPT4 LPT5 LPT6 LPT7 LPT8 LPT9 AUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK END_MARK Data type Class VAR VAR_RETAIN VAR_ACCESS VAR_CONSTANT VAR_INPUT VAR_INPUT_RETAIN VAR_OUTPUT reserved words VAR_OUTPUT_RETAIN VAR_IN_OUT VAR_IN_ EXT VAR_EXTERNAL VAR_EXTERNAL_CONSTANT VAR_EXTERNAL_RETAIN VAR_GLOBAL VAR_GLOBAL_CONSTANT VAR_GLOBAL_RETAIN VAR_PUBLIC VAR_PUBLIC_RETAIN Data type BOOL BYTE INT SINT DINT LINT UINT USINT UDINT ULINT WORD DWORD LWORD ARRAY REAL LREAL TIME STRING WSTRING TIMER LTIMER RETENTIVETIMER LRETENTIVETIMER COUNTER LCOUNTER POINTER ANY ANY_NUM ANY_BIT ANY_REAL ANY_INT ANY_DATE ANY_SIMPLE ANY16 ANY32 DATE DATE_AND_TIME DT TIME TIME_OF_DAY TOD BODY_CCE BODY_FBD BODY_IL BODY_LD BODY_SFC BODY_ST END_BODY END_PARAMETER_SECTION PARAM_FILE_PATH PARAMETER_SECTION POW LONGCOUNTER LONGRETENTIVETIMER LONGTIMER UNKNOWN ANY_BITADDR ANY_WORDADDR ANY_STRING ANYSTRING_ SINGLE ANYSTRING_DOUBLE ANY_ELEMENTARY ANY_ELEMENTARY_IEC ANY_MAGNITUDE ANY_BOOL ANY_SIGNED ANY_UNSIGNE
142. Communication Module User s Manual Application Window Tool gt Circuit Trace Operation Flow Target Module Type Channel Selection 5 gt Start Trace lt P Trace stopped Stop Trace Trace Result Currently Displayed Data Module Name Measurement Time ms Send Receive Packet Extracted Date Display send receive packet in HEX Display send receive packet in ASCII Find Save Trace File 4 CREATING MODULE CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM AND SETTING PARAMETERS 1 4 5 Circuit Trace Function 05 5 REGISTERING LABELS This chapter explains the overviews and registration methods of labels 5 1 About Labels There are four types of label labels registered on the label editor global label and local label a module label which is prepared as the dedicated label for each module global label and a system label which is interacted with MELSOFT Navigator Global labels can be registered as system label Labels that can be used in all programs in a project Create them on the global label editor Page 107 Registering Labels There are two types of global label a global label Type Global label Local label Module label System label that can be used either in standard programs or in safety programs and a standard safety shared global label that can be used in both programs Labels that can be used in each program Create them on the local label editor
143. D ANYREAL_64 ANYREAL_32 ANY_DERIVED ANY16_S ANY16_U ANY32_S ANY32_U ANY64 ANY64_S ANY64_U ANY_STRUCT ANYWORD_ ARRAY ANY16_ARRAY ANY16_S_ARRAY ANY16_U_ ARRAY ANY32_ ARRAY ANY32_S_ARRAY ANY32_U_ ARRAY ANY64_ARRAY ANY64_S_ARRAY ANY64_U_ ARRAY ANY_REAL_ARRAY ANY_REAL_32_ARRAY ANY_REAL_64_ARRAY ANY_STRING_ARRAY ANYSTRING_SINGLE_ARRAY ANYSTRING_DOUBLE_ARRAY ANYBIT_ARRAY UINT_WORD UDINT_DWORD ULINT_LWORD TIME2 KBIT64 KBIT32 KBIT16 WDEVICE BDEVICE DUMMYDEVICE FB FUN STRUCT_MEMBER BIT_ARRAY STRUCT_ARRAY STRING_ARRAY WSTRING_ ARRAY LINT_ARRAY ULINT_LWORD_ ARRAY DINT_ARRAY UDINT_DWORD_ ARRAY INT_ARRAY UINT_WORD_ARRAY REAL_ARRAY LREAL_ARRAY TIME_ARRAY NONE ANY16_OR_STRING_ SINGLE ANY_DT ANY_TM ANY_BOOL_OR_ POINTER IEC reserved word ABS ACOS ACTION ADD AND ANDN ANY ANY_BIT ANY_INT ANY_NUM ANY_REAL ARRAY ASIN AT ATAN BOOL BY BYTE CAL CALC CASE CONCAT CONFIGURATION CONSTANT COS CTD CTU CTUD D DATE DATE_AND_TIME DELETE DINT DIV DO DT DWORD ELSE ELSIF END_ACTION END_CASE END_CONFIGURATION END_FOR END_FUNCTION END_FUNCTION_BLOCK END_IF END_ PROGRAM END_REPEAT END_ RESOURCE END_STEP END_STRUCT END_TRANSITION END_TYPE END_VAR END_WHILE EN ENO EQ EXIT EXP EXPT FALSE F_EDGE F_TRIG FIND FOR FROM FUNCTION FUNCTION _BLOCK GE GT IF INITIAL_STEP INSERT INT INTERVAL JMP JMPC JMPCN L LD LDN LE LEFT LEN LIMIT LINT LN LOG LREAL LT LWORD
144. Detailed Dialog Double click a row in which an error code alarm code is displayed or right click it and select Detail Display from the shortcut menu 282 14 CHECKING OPERATION OF PROGRAMS 14 7 Checking Current Values in Intelligent Function Module Customizing multiple Intelligent Function Module Monitor windows Each axis of the positioning module can be monitored by activating multiple Intelligent Function Module Monitor windows and customizing each window Precautions The Intelligent Function Module Monitor updates current values only within the range displayed on the window for monitoring acceleration When performing operation such as copy and paste on Excel or the previously monitored current value is displayed for the data outside the range displayed on the window Registering Intelligent function modules Register an Intelligent function module to be monitored in the Intelligent Function Module Monitor window Operating procedure HRegister Intelligent function modules using shortcut menu from Project view 1 Select an Intelligent function module to be registered in the Intelligent Function Module Monitor window from the Project view 2 Right click gt select Register to Intelligent Function Module Monitor from the shortcut menu HRegister Intelligent function modules by dragging and dropping from Project view 1 Select a module to be registered from the Project view 2 Drag and drop it onto the I
145. EADING DATA TO CPU MODULE 13 1 Writing Reading Programmable Controller Data Consistency of parameters When writing a part of the parameters additionally or writing parameters after changing the parameters the consistency of the parameters are required Consistency means making the information of I O Assignment Setting start I O number slot number etc between the system parameters and each parameter match There are two methods to keep the consistency e Read the system parameter and each parameter to change them After that write them to a CPU module Resetting the CPU module is required to change the system parameter e Read each parameter to be changed and change them to be consistent with the system parameter in the project After that write the changed parameters only to the CPU module Basically resetting CPU module is not required however some modules are required to reset the CPU module after changing parameters For details refer to the manual of the module used MModules with start I O number unset The unset module parameters cannot be written to a programmable controller Writing parameters of remote I O module slave station on CC Link IE Field Network Write the parameters for slave station on the CC IE Field Configuration window For details refer to the manual of each remote I O module Programs After creating a program local label program write Program When the column of Initial Value is set on th
146. ENDICES APPENDIX 340 Appendix 4 Use Project in Different Version Using the projects which were created in Version 1 015R or later in Version 1 011M or earlier Opening projects Reading from a programmable controller Option setting Program file setting Library operation The project that contains SFC programs cannot be opened read in Version 1 011M or earlier The projects that the following options is set to Yes cannot be opened read in Version 1 011M or earlier In addition It is not able to verify the projects that the following options is set to Yes with the projects created in Version 1 011M or earlier e Tool gt Options gt Convert gt Basic Setting gt Operational Setting gt Minimize the Temporary Area When the project set the execution order has been opened and converted in Version 1 011M or earlier it is converted in a program block name order Even if the library that contains the global labels is registered into the library list in Version 1 010L the global labels are not displayed in the Library tab on the Element Selection window The global labels called by the utilized elements are changed to the undefined labels without being utilized APPENDICES APPENDIX 41 Appendix 4 Use Project in Different Version 3 Appendix 5 Using Simulation Function Modules supporting the Simulation function are shown below e Module type of supported project MELSEC iQ R series RnCPU RO4CPU RO8CPU
147. ES APPENDIX 3 8 Appendix 5 Using Simulation Function No SD243 SD244 SD250 SD260 SD261 SD262 SD263 SD264 SD265 SD266 SD267 SD268 SD269 SD270 SD271 SD272 SD273 SD274 SD275 SD280 SD281 SD282 SD283 SD284 SD285 SD288 SD289 SD290 SD291 SD292 SD293 SD294 SD295 SD296 SD297 SD298 SD299 SD300 SD302 SD306 SD307 SD308 SD309 SD312 SD412 SD414 SD415 SD420 SD500 SD518 SD519 SD520 SD521 Name Number of base slots Latest I O for implemented unit Number of points assigned to bit devices Number of points assigned to word devices Number of points assigned to timer type devices Number of points assigned to index registers Number of points assigned to long index registers Number of points assigned to file registers Number of points assigned to refresh devices Initial scan time Current scan time Description Number of base slots Latest I O number for implemented unit X number of points assigned L X number of points assigned H Y number of points assigned L Y number of points assigned H M number of points assigned L M number of points assigned H B number of points assigned L B number of points assigned H SB number of points assigned L SB number of points assigned H F number of points assigned L F number of points assigned H V number of points assigned L V number of points assigned H L number of points assigned L L number of points ass
148. ESS Set the wiring mett l 7 CommifAdd1 BasicUnitParam InputWiringSelection Wiring selection of input X2 0 Not used vrine selection o meut x r Net used o iee ainel Wri Set the n valve 8 CommifAdd1 BasicUnitParam InputWiringSelection Wiring selection of input X3 0 Not used pias E k A x2 Ti Ta 3 ae aa Set A I 9 CommifAdd1 BasicUnitParam InputWiringSelection Wiring selection of input X4 0 Not used i Wiring selection of input X3 0 Not used Single wiri Set the say lue I 10 CommifAdd1 BasicUnitParam InputWiringsSelection Wiring selection of input X5 0 Not used i Wiring selection of input X4 0 Not used 2 Single wiri Set the CommifAdd1 BasicUnitParam Input WiringSelection Wiring selection of input X6 0 Not used te Wiring selection of input X5 0 Not used i O 0 Not used Set mmifAdd1 BasicUnitParam InputWiringSelection Wiring selection of input X7 0 Not used pa si Ehala Gi ATAN x t Bat ged t Not used fAdd1 BasicUnitParam InputWiringSelection Wiring selection of input x8 0 Not used 4 m mmifAdd1 BasicUnitParam InputWiringSelection Wiring selection of input X9 0 Not used CommifAdd1 BasicUnitParam InputWiringSelection Wiring selection of input XA 0 Not used lear All Read Value Clear All Write Value Check 16 CommlfAdd1 BasicUnitParam Input WiringSelection Wiring selection of input XB 0 Not used 17 CommifAdd1 BasicUnitParam InputWiringSelection Wiring selection of input XC 0 Not used Process Option 18 Comm
149. FF U 0000 to U 001F U 0080 to U 009F U 00A0 to U 00BF U FFFE U FFFF Windows reserved word COM1 COM2 COM3 COM4 COM5 COM6 COM7 COMB COM9 LPT1 LPT2 LPT3 LPT4 LPT5 LPT6 LPT7 LPT8 LPT9 AUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK END_ MARK 336 APPENDICES APPENDIX Appendix 2 Unusable Character String Reserved Word Appendix 3 Applicable Devices in GX Works3 For RCPU O Applicable A Display only X Not applicable Not available foun YOO di eem p p F p b h wew p e E e e h fame FO O dO E inkspecaroay BO Od fRownvetme ST XO dO wine XO dO fRewnvetnetmer us xo dO e a XO dO a a OO dO linkspecaregsir SW OO dO FFuncionoupt YX EC a C E e FD A C A EE C E a C C wow po e E e a h firey BOO E nespecareay SB Od wa w e e e e wea SW OO e e O CPU buffer memory access CPU buffer memory access G HG device U3EO GO HCO device Index register Index register 2 Long index register Lz il T x Xx aw ppo bp p p b Co srcane TR caer a a a a device x APPENDICES APPENDIX 337 Appendix 3 Applicable Devices in GX Works3 Constant Writing to local devices is available 2 When editing it in other places except in a Zoom specify a step relay with a block specification BLO SD Prefix to the device name Example D10 or module access devices Device comments within the following range can be created in the buffer memory 3E00H to 3E30H of CPU module in
150. FUN file Program Diagram Ladder Diagram E Ey FunPou Function FB file A file that manages function blocks of a safety program Es Local Label Local label For safety j Program Program re 5 i a g FUN file A file that manages functions Funan re pas The function files are written to a CPU module in unit of fs Local Label Worksheet FUN file EY WorkSheet Program l l K Page 217 Creating Functions ET FUNFILEL FUN file BOT Funfou For safety Function A data that configures programs of function E2 Local Label POU M Program WELabel data Creation method K Page 71 Creating Data lt Aa PU cS Local label Program A label data that can be used only in the defined function A function data that is created using Ladder Diagram or Structured Text This data is referred to as FUN program in this manual Worksheet A function data that is created using Function Block Program Diagram Ladder Diagram FUN file A file that manages functions of a safety program For safety my te Label Global label A label data that can be accessed from all the program 7 iz m A ea blocks and function blocks in the project Sa Ml 5lobal Global label Page 107 Registering Labels fa Global Module label Module label A label to access I O signals or buffer memory of modules T Safety Safety global label lt Page 115 Registering Module Labels i StandardSafetyShared Shaliiartietiena tl Safety global label A global label for a safet
151. G DATA 9 3 Searching Replacing Character Strings 205 matching whole word only The whole word means a string delimited by the break characters The character string which is completely match with the character string entered in Find String is searched Break characters are shown as below e Space tab line feed operator in ST editor Ex Search for a device comment abc def by the following character strings a abc def Nothing is found abc abc def abc def abc def Nothing is found o O abc def abc def abc def 9 SEARCHING DATA 206 9 3 Searching Replacing Character Strings 9 4 Changing Contacts Between Open Contact and Close Contact Change contact types from open contact to close contact and vise versa Supported editors Ladder editor FBD LD editor and SFC diagram editor Window Find Replace gt Change Open Close Contact gt t Change A B Contact Entire Projects X fe Replace Device Label X Find Next Replace Replace All Find Replace Options Find Direction Device Point 1 1 Set the items on the screen and click the Find Next button Find Replace Device Point Enter the number of points to be replaced counted from the device label entered in the Replace Device Label field Options When a label is entered for Replace Device Label enter 1 Example When X100 for Replace Device 3 for Device Point and DEC for enter
152. G P NUNI P SEG P UDINT2DINT P UDINT2INT P UDINT2UINT P UINT2DINT P UINT2INT P UINT2UDINT P UNI P VAL P _U WTOB P 1 O indicates an operator Application instruction Program branch instruction CJ GOEND JMP SCJ Program execution control DI El IMASK IRET SIMASK WDT P instruction Rotation instruction DRCL P DRCR P DROL P DROR P RCL P RCR P ROL P ROR P Data processing instruction DMAX P _U DMEAN P _U DMIN P _U DSERDATA P DSORTD _U DSUM P DWSUM P _U MAX P _U MEAN P _U MIN P _U SERDATA P SORTD _U SUM P WSUM P _U Structure creation instruction BREAK P CALL P ECALL P EFCALL P FCALL P FOR NEXT RET XCALL Data table operation instruction FDEL P FIFR P FIEW P FINS P FPOP P APPENDICES APPENDIX 1 Appendix 5 Using Simulation Function 35 352 Category Debugging and failure diagnostic instruction String processing instruction Data control instruction File register operation instruction Clock instruction Program control instruction PID control instruction Reading writing data instruction Real number instruction Random number instruction Index register instruction Special counter instruction Special timer instruction Shortcut control instruction Ramp signal instruction Pulse related instruction Matrix input instruction Direct read write in 1 byte unit Indirect address read Timing check instruction Module access
153. GISTERING LABELS 5 2 Registering Labels Entering information Label name Set label names except for the following names e A label name that includes a space e A label name that begins with a numeral e A label name which is same as the one used for devices Precautions For label names constants and device initial values use the characters in the Unicode Basic Multilingual Plane The label names and constants that specifies the characters other than the Unicode Basic Multilingual Plane cannot be used in programs The initial values specified with the characters outside the Unicode Basic Multilingual Plane may not be edited in the program MAlias An alternative name for label that is assigned to a label is referred to as alias For the data types classes initial values and constants to which the alias function is set the information of assigned devices labels will be succeeded Global Global Label Setting Label Name Data Type Assign Device Label Labell g VAR_GLOBAL v Label FA E A 4 S7 Label2 is an arias of Label1 Extended Display Automatic Automatic naming rule By selecting the row of Data Type or Class when the label name is blank label name is set automatically Set the automatic naming rules in the following option setting e Tool gt Options gt Other Editor gt Label Editor Common gt Editor Setting The autom
154. Initial Value editor is shown below Window Project view gt Device gt Device Initial Value gt data name Device Initial Value MAIN a x tart LC _ MN a O a The device range and the device data that is set above will be written to CPU as initial value Users are required to execute Device Memory Diversion operation if the device initial range setting is changed Setting Method Device Memory Register Diversion i Device Memory E E NY Start End for Register Diversion anaemia D Points Start Device Memory Diversion OK Cancel Poin tr When editing start last comment column press the Init Fo keys to display the shortcut menu 8 SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES 1 8 1 About Device Initial Values 97 8 3 Setting Device Initial Values This section explains how to set device values set in the device memory as device initial values Select Project gt Object gt New CP to add the device initial value data Set the device range to be used for device initial values Operations on the device memory editor Select Project gt Object gt New CP to create the device memory data Set the device values within the range of the device initial value Click the Device memory Diversion button to set the device values of the device memory as device initial values Configure the settings in the file
155. LATING PROGRAM 232 11 3 External Device Operation Simulation topping the I O system _ Operating procedure Select Stop on the I O System Setting screen Supported device label Supported X Unsupported User device Input Output Internal relay Latch relay Link relay Annunciator 02 u 7 x Link special relay 4 54 z o Timer Retentive timer STS STN Long timer LTS i _ Z Long Retentive Timer LST LSTS LSTN x x LST x x Counter C Long counter LC LCS x LCN x C o tik o o o Module access device UD GO O CPU buffer memory access device O U3ED GO HCO 11 SIMULATING PROGRAM 233 11 3 External Device Operation Simulation Module refresh register Module refresh register RDO XK xI OOJO x The following labels are supported e Global label Module label e Labels of which class is VAR_GLOBAL VAR_GLOBAL_RETAIN e Labels except for string 32 string Unicode 32 pointer type Precautions e Array type structure type labels which were assigned labels by all conversion are not supported e The variable of function block cannot be specified e Labels are not supported when the device of assignment target is not supported or the assignment target is a label e Timer retentive timer counter labels need to specify contacts coils current value as same as devices e Devices labels cannot used to s
156. LD editor Switching methods for contacts instructions Select a contact instruction to be switched and select Edit gt Easy Edit gt Invert Contact Open Close 2 Switch Pulse Switch SET and RST it or follow the methods shown below Switching contacts and instructions Shortcut key Remarks Switching open close contact raising falling pulse m Mo ical gt y Inverting contact switching SET RST instructions ctrl Inverting contact on connection point of FB FUN Only when the data type of the connection point is one of the following e Bit e Word Unsigned Bit String 16 bit e Double Word Unsigned Bit String 32 bit e ANY_BIT e ANY_BOOL HSpecification method for data type of device On the FBD LD editor word device as the data type can be specified By adding a suffix that indicates data type type specifier to a device name the data type can be identified For details refer to the following manual LA MELSEC iQ R Programming Manual Program Design 154 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 6 5 Creating FBD LD Programs Common operations of elements Operation Operating procedure Select To select a single Click an element to be selected Move the cursor on an element to be selected element To select multiple e Click multip
157. M 3 File Recent Places HIN pROJECT2 gx3 6 3 2014 9 22PM GX3 File Desktop A Computer Ta 4 Ww p Network Files of type GX Works3 Project gx3 Title A Other Format Open a Workspace Format Project A Please change the windows with this button to use workspace Format project LD MELSOFT Navigator supports this format Operating procedure Set the items and click the Open button Precautions Changing work space name and folder configuration Do not change the file names and storage location of a workspace and project folders and files using an application such as Windows Explorer Opening projects being edited by other users The project can be opened as a read only project However the following functions cannot be used e Overwriting projects e Changing module type mProjects saved on a network drive or a removable media Do not open the project directly Open it after saving it to the personal computer or another data storage device Opening a safety project Set the screen saver in Windows to lock the personal computer when no user activity has been sensed for a certain time For details refer to Windows Help and Support 3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 3 2 Creating Project File 63 Opening GX Works2 format project Open the project created in GX Works2 by changing the module type with GX Works3 This function is supported by the projects of Universal model QCPU Universal mode
158. N USER Operating procedure Select the checkbox of the data to be written on the Online Data Operation screen displayed and click the Execute button Cooperative simulation The cooperative simulation between the simulator of a simple motion module SMM Simulator and the simulator of GX Works3 GX Simulator3 is available Environmental setting Specify the target before starting simulation in order to simulate the cooperative operations of a sequence program and a motion control simple motion module Window Debug gt Simulation gt Simulation Environmental Setting 4 Simulation Environmental Setting Select the simple motion module to execute Cooperative Debug then click OK Please assign RCPU other PLC to the slot used by CPU Model Name ROSCPL Host PLO RD 7 MS8 tee Operating procedure Select the target module to be run together and click the OK button Bin multiple CPU configuration Select the other CPUs in accordance with the module configuration set to the project 11 SIMULATING PROGRAM 227 11 2 Starting Stopping Simulation Starting cooperative simulation The following shows how to operate GX Simulator3 and SMM Simulator with them interacted with each other MStarting simulation Display Setting Related Functions AT SB OAT co Parameter Program F Select all Legend Open Close A T Deselect AlN
159. N as the trigger condition e Error Code Specify this to set an error code of CPU module as the trigger condition e Device error Code Specify this to set a device error code as the trigger condition The Memory Dump function is performed when any of multiple conditions is satisfied Specify a device to be set as the trigger condition Only global devices can be specified MDevice representation that can be specified e Bit device X Y M L F SM V B SB T enter TS ST enter SS STS C enter CS LT enter LTS LST enter LSS LSTS LC enter LCS FX and FY e Word device bit specification D SD W SW R ZR FD RD Specify a 4 digit error code to be set as the trigger condition in hexadecimal The wild card can be specified for the 1st digit of an error code only The number for annunciator cannot be specified as the error code to be set as the trigger condition Use the device name in order to specify the number of annunciator Considerations for memory dump setting e Before writing the memory dump setting check that the trigger condition has not already satisfied e When a file register is specified as the trigger condition do not change the file register file name and the file register block No once the memory dump setting has been written 14 CHECKING OPERATION OF PROGRAMS 2 14 8 Saving and Checking Device Value 85 Reading memory dump results To check the memory dump result file with GX
160. ND Label2 TRUE 50 Label3 TRUE turned ON Label3 will be turned ON after 50ms 2 2 abel4 200 200 is assigned to Label4 3 Instant specification When Y3 falls X1 will be turned ON immediately 2 3 LDF TRUE Y3 0 X1 TRUE 10 is assigned to D10 2 3 010 10 4 After initialization specification X101 will be turned ON after 1s from execution 2 4 INIT 1000 X101 TRUE 5 Successive bit device output When YO is turned ON X0 to X10 will be turned 2 5 YO TRUE 100 X0 10 TRUE ON after 100ms 6 Timing chart 65536 is added to D100 after 1s from the above 2 6 CONTINUE 1000 D100 D D100 D 65536 32 bit integer addition output pattern Open the outputted file in Excel or the like and edit it directly Set the conditions by using the following character strings and symbols O Available Xx Not available Instruction CONTINUE Keeps the previous condition ja YO TRUE 1 X0 TRUE LOOP Repeats e ve X0 FALSE It is used with CONTINUE PE lc INIT 14 Executes after initialization only 2 1 INIT 1 X0 TRUE one time Operator Assigns Se X0 TRUE gt DO 1 C E ee a Ct ee Ee Coe a e p te jo pm AN Combines conditions using AND x x YOTRUE AND Y1 FALSE Combines conditions using OR YO TRUE OR Y1 FALSE Device type U Uses a device as a 16 bit non a Condition DO U 0 ce 9 TE specifier negative integer Apa put DO U 0 i Uses a device as a 32 bit integer DO D 0 D
161. NG PROGRAMS 6 10 Calculating Memory Size 190 r SETTING DEVICE MEMORY This chapter explains the features and settings of the device memory 7 1 About Device Memory The device memory managed by GX Works3 is a data that reads writes values from to the device memory on a CPU module By reading device memory the state of device memory in a CPU module can be checked It can be used for offline debugging Additionally the current values of device memory in a CPU module can be changed in a batch by writing device memory to a CPU module Read write device memory on the Online Data Operation screen For details refer to the following section KL Page 248 Writing Reading Programmable Controller Data Applicable devices For the devices that can be set on the Device Memory editor and its input method refer to the following section K Page 337 Applicable Devices in GX Works3 Writing device memory to global devices local devices Device memory does not distinguish the global devices and the local devices Write device memory to each device in a CPU module by each of the following methods FX5CPU does not support local devices e Global device Create device memory data with a different name from the one for the program file and write it to a CPU module e Local device Create device memory with a same name as the one for the program file and write it to a CPU module 7 SETTING DEVICE MEMORY 1 1 7 1 About Device Memory 9
162. NTER LCOUNTER POINTER ANY ANY_NUM ANY_BIT ANY_REAL ANY_INT ANY_DATE ANY_SIMPLE ANY16 ANY32 DATE DATE_AND_TIME DT TIME TIME_OF_DAY TOD BODY_CCE BODY_FBD BODY_IL BODY_LD BODY_SFC BODY_ST END_BODY END_PARAMETER_SECTION PARAM_FILE_PATH PARAMETER_SECTION POW LONGCOUNTER LONGRETENTIVETIMER LONGTIMER UNKNOWN ANY_BITADDR ANY_WORDADDR ANY_STRING ANYSTRING_SINGLE ANYSTRING_ DOUBLE ANY_ELEMENTARY ANY_ELEMENTARY_IEC ANY_MAGNITUDE ANY_BOOL ANY_SIGNED ANY_UNSIGNED ANYREAL_64 ANYREAL_32 ANY_DERIVED ANY16_S ANY16_U ANY32_S ANY32_U ANY64 ANY64_S ANY64_U ANY_STRUCT ANYWORD_ ARRAY ANY16_ARRAY ANY16_S_ARRAY ANY16_U_ ARRAY ANY32_ ARRAY ANY32_S_ARRAY ANY32_U_ ARRAY ANY64_ ARRAY ANY64_S_ARRAY ANY64_U_ ARRAY ANY_REAL_ARRAY ANY_REAL_32_ARRAY ANY_REAL_64_ARRAY ANY_STRING_ARRAY ANYSTRING_SINGLE_ARRAY ANYSTRING_DOUBLE_ARRAY ANYBIT_ARRAY UINT_WORD UDINT_DWORD ULINT_LWORD TIME2 KBIT64 KBIT32 KBIT16 WDEVICE BDEVICE DUMMYDEVICE FB FUN STRUCT_MEMBER BIT_ARRAY STRUCT_ARRAY STRING_ARRAY WSTRING_ARRAY LINT_ARRAY ULINT_LWORD_ARRAY DINT_ARRAY UDINT_DWORD_ ARRAY INT_ARRAY UINT_WORD_ARRAY REAL_ARRAY LREAL_ARRAY TIME_ARRAY NONE ANY16_OR_STRING_ SINGLE ANY_DT ANY_TM ANY_BOOL_OR_ POINTER reserved words 334 APPENDICES APPENDIX Appendix 2 Unusable Character String Reserved Word Category Character string IEC reserved word ABS ACOS ACTION ADD AND ANDN ANY ANY_BIT ANY_INT ANY_NUM
163. O UD 0 Uses a device as a 32 bit non negative integer Uses a device as FLOAT Single Precision DO E 0 i Output D0 E 0 D0 ED 0 eee Output D0 ED 0 11 SIMULATING PROGRAM 2 1 11 3 External Device Operation Simulation 3 Uses a device as FLOAT Double Precision m m C Y Symbol aa Specifies device range X10 20 TRUE Example X10 20 m Open bracket Sa TRUE AND Y1 TRUE Constant TRUE a ON a bit device a YO TRUE FALSE Turns OFF a bit device Condition YO FALSE 1 These are the original description methods in the I O System Setting 2 An error occurs if CONTINUE is written at the top of a data record 3 When it is used without combining with CONTINUE error does not occur but LOOP is ignored An error occurs if LOOP is written at the top of a data record 4 The timing that the execution transition of INIT is enabled are as follow The I O System Setting was executed while the simulator is in RUN state The simulator was switched to RUN state while the I O System Setting is executing 5 Use both instructions according to the Structured Text notation TI MELSEC iQ R Programming Manual Instructions Standard Functions Function Blocks 6 For devices without a type specifier it can perform the operations with both constants Word Signed and Word Unsigned In that case device type is determined according to the constant type 7 To compare devices or labels each other data types need
164. ODUCT if any shall not lead to any major or serious accident and ii where the backup and fail safe function are systematically or automatically provided outside of the PRODUCT for the case of any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT 2 The PRODUCT has been designed and manufactured for the purpose of being used in general industries MITSUBISHI SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY AND ALL RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY TORT PRODUCT LIABILITY FOR ANY INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY CAUSED BY the PRODUCT THAT ARE OPERATED OR USED IN APPLICATION NOT INTENDED OR EXCLUDED BY INSTRUCTIONS PRECAUTIONS OR WARNING CONTAINED IN MITSUBISHI S USER INSTRUCTION AND OR SAFETY MANUALS TECHNICAL BULLETINS AND GUIDELINES FOR the PRODUCT Prohibited Application Prohibited Applications include but not limited to the use of the PRODUCT in e Nuclear Power Plants and any other power plants operated by Power companies and or any other cases in which the public could be affected if any problem or fault occurs in the PRODUCT e Railway companies or Public service purposes and or any other cases in which establishment of a special quality assurance system is required by the Purchaser or End User e Aircraft or Aerospace Medical applications Train equipment transport equipment such as Elevator and Escalator Incineration and Fuel devices V
165. ODULE CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM AND SETTING PARAMETERS 1 03 4 3 Other settings of Intelligent function module 4 4 Predefined Protocol Support Function Start the Predefined Protocol Support Function from GX Works3 and set the protocol and read write data from to a module For details refer to the following manuals LA MELSEC iQ R Serial Communication Module User s Manual Application MELSEC iQ R Ethernet User s Manual Application LA MELSEC iQ F FX5 User s Manual Serial Communication LA MELSEC iQ F FX5 User s Manual Ethernet Communication Poin tr The files saved in GX Works2 can be read using the Predefined Protocol Support Function of GX Workss3 Starting and exiting predefined protocol support function Start and exit the predefined protocol support function Starting Predefined Protocol Support Function Operating procedure 1 Select GX Works3 menu Tool gt Predefined Protocol Support Function 2 Set the items on the Predefined Protocol Support Function screen and click the OK button Exiting Predefined Protocol Support Function Operating procedure Select File gt Exit on the protocol setting screen 1 04 4 CREATING MODULE CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM AND SETTING PARAMETERS 4 4 Predefined Protocol Support Function 4 5 Circuit Trace Function Trace the send receive data and communication control signal between C24 and a target device For details refer to the following manual MELSEC iQ R Serial
166. OFT Library are explained as a library The elements in a library can be used by registering the library into the library list The elements are imported into a project with by registering a library To obtain the library please consult your local Mitsubishi representative FX5CPU does not support it Precautions Before registering a library confirm that the module type of the current project CPU module supports the library Registering libraries The following shows how to register a library The methods differ depending on the file extension gx3s mslm MWhen the extension is gx3s Operating procedure 1 Select Tool gt Sample Library Registration 2 Select a file on the Open Sample Library screen and click the OK button The function block of the library is displayed on the Project view M_FBLIB is for the Mitsubishi Electric FA products and P_FBLIB is for the partner s products MWhen the extension is mslm Operating procedure MRegistering library to be referenced 1 Select the Library tab on the Element Selection window 2 Select Application Library Sample Library then select Project gt Library Operation gt Register to Library List Ls 3 Select a file on the Register Library to Library List screen then click the Open button The registered library is displayed on the library list MDeleting libraries 1 Select the Library tab on the Element Selection window 2 Se
167. OGRAMS 14 2 Check Execution Programs on Program Editor FBD LD Displays ON OFF status of contact coil ON ely tI Displays the monitored value underneath the input output label of the FB element TIMER_100_FB_M_1 TIMER_100_FB_M Coil ValueOut 7 Displays TRUE FALSE of bit type label or bit device TRUE TRUE hile FALSE FALSE When the current values cannot be monitored is displayed When the type of the defined function block is macro type monitoring the input label depends on the monitor condition of the connected element Therefore the input label also cannot monitored when the connected element cannot be monitored nging current values pesa Current values can be changed by the following methods during monitoring Bit type Select an element of device lavel then press the Irrt Enter keys Word type Register a device label in the Watch window and change the value Page 277 Checking Current Values by Registering Devices Labels 14 CHECKING OPERATION OF PROGRAMS 271 14 2 Check Execution Programs on Program Editor SFC Monitor device values of the SFC program that the execution type of the program is set for Scan SFC program has the monitoring functions shown below To check the active status of steps and current values of devices on an Page 272 Monitoring SFC Diagram SFC diagram To check the current values o
168. Oldest storage file number Internal buffer free space size KB Number of processing overflow occurrences Data logging error cause Same configuration as the setting No 1 Same configuration as the setting No 1 Same configuration as the setting No 1 Same configuration as the setting No 1 Same configuration as the setting No 1 D1270 to SD1276 Data logging setting No 7 Same configuration as the setting No 1 D1280 to SD1286 Data logging setting No 8 Same configuration as the setting No 1 D1290 to SD1296 Data logging setting No 9 Same configuration as the setting No 1 SD1300 to SD1306 Data logging setting No 10 Same configuration as the setting No 1 SD1400 to SD1463 Interrupt pointer mask pattern Mask pattern D1504 Open completion signal Open completion SD1505 Open request signal Open request 1 RnPCPU only supports it Supported instructions The instructions supported by the Simulation function are shown below Note that no processing is performed for unsupported instructions NOP processing equence instruction Contact instruction AND ANDF ANDFI ANDP ANDPI ANI LD LDF LDFI LDI LDP LDP OR ORF ORFI ORI ORP ORPI Association instruction ANB EGF EGP INV MEF MEP MPP MPS MRD ORB Output instruction FF OUT OUT C OUT F OUT LC OUT LT LST OUT T ST OUTH T ST PLF PLS RST RST F SET SET F Shift instruction SFT P Master control instruction MC MCR Termination instruction END FEND Stop
169. Parameter editor e I O Assignment Setting screen EList of changed location of start XY number When the start XY number of a module is changed on the Module Configuration Diagram the list of data which will be affected by the change are displayed on the Module Start I O No Related Area window FX5CPU does not support it Check the display content and correct the corresponding data e Target data Program FB program system parameter CPU parameter module parameter global label structure module label e Target device The start XY devices X Y DX DY U G specified in the arguments of FROM P TO P DFRO P or DTO P instructions 4 CREATING MODULE CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM AND SETTING PARAMETERS 4 1 Creating Module Configuration Diagram 89 90 Multiple CPU configuration FX5CPU does not support it Display of Multiple CPU configuration The multiple CPU configuration can be set on the Module Configuration Diagram Host CPU module Other CPU module Available slots for CPU modules Item Host CPU module Other CPU module Module controlled by the host CPU module Module controlled by the other station CPU module Available slots for CPU modules Module controlled by host CPU module Module controlled by other CPU module Description For a multiple CPU configuration only one project which is set as a host CPU can be set Set the CPU module which is not set as a host CPU to other station The
170. Precautions The structure array type global labels to which Structure Array Offset Value is set cannot be registered as system labels Importing system labels in system label database to GX Works3 Import the system labels registered with MELSOFT Navigator or other projects to a project Operating procedure 1 Display the global label editor 2 Click the Import System Label button The Import System Labels to Project screen is displayed 3 Select the system labels to be imported and click the Import button Releasing system labels Release the relation with the system label database and restore system labels to normal global labels Operating procedure Display the global label editor select the labels of which relation is to be released from the labels registered as system labels Click the Reservation to Release System Label button NRWD Click the Reflect to System Label Database button The Check before registering in system label data base screen is displayed 5 Check the list of labels to be released and click the Register button 5 REGISTERING LABELS 11 5 4 Registering System Label 7 Verifying system label information Compare the system label information of GX Works3 projects to the system label database and check if there is any difference If differences exist correct the system label information of the GX Works3 projects and synchronize the information with the system label
171. RS 4 1 Creating Module Configuration Diagram Copying and pasting modules The parameter information of the copy source is succeeded to the pasted module lf the CPU module placed on the base unit in a multiple CPU configuration is copied and pasted the CPU number will be unspecified status The copied objects can be pasted to the Module Configuration Diagram in other project Placing symbol objects The symbols and text boxes can be placed on the Module Configuration Diagram The symbols placed on the Module Configuration Diagram are not written to a CPU module They are saved only in the project Operating procedure Select a figure in Figure in the Element Selection window and drag and drop it onto the Module Configuration Diagram Change the character and color of a symbol object on the Properties screen Changing model name of CPU module The model name of the CPU module placed on the Module Configuration Diagram can be changed RCPU does not support it Operating procedure 1 Select the placed CPU module Then right click and select Change CPU Model Name from the shortcut menu 2 Select the model name after the change on the Change CPU screen Module status setting empty Set this when operating a system without mounting actual modules The module is displayed in a pale color FX5SCPU does not support this setting Operating procedure Select the module to be set to empty and Edit gt Module Status Settin
172. Reference A function to check the status of the programs being Monitor Page 268 Check Execution Programs on Program executed on the program editor Editor A function to check the current values of the device or buffer Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor Page 275 Checking Device Buffer Memory in Batch memory in batch A function to check the current values by registering devices Watch Page 277 Checking Current Values by Registering and labels Devices Labels A function to check the processing time of programs being Program List Monitor Page 280 Checking Processing Time of Program executed A function to check the number of executions of interrupt Interrupt Program List Monitor Page 281 Checking Execution Counts of Interrupt programs used in a program Programs A function to check the I O signals and the current value of Intelligent Function Module Monitor Page 282 Checking Current Values in Intelligent buffer memory by registering the module information of Function Module Intelligent function module A function to save and check the device values of a CPU Memory Dump Page 284 Saving and Checking Device Value module at any timing to a personal computer A function to check the sampled data memory dump result Offline Monitor Page 288 Checking Sampled Data on Program Editor file on the program editor 1 Not supported by FXS5CPU Changing current values Check the operation by changing the current value of devices l
173. Rightward gt Easy Edit gt Enter Delete Horizontal Line to Leftward gt Easy Edit gt Enter Delete Vertical Line to Downward gt Easy Edit gt Enter Delete Vertical Line to Upward gt Easy Edit gt Switch Ladder Symbol Invert gt Easy Edit gt Switch Pulse Switch SET and RST Instructions gt Easy Edit gt Change Statement Note Type gt Easy Edit gt Instruction Partial Edit gt Temporarily Change Ladders gt Temporarily Change Ladders gt Temporarily Change Ladders gt Restore the Changes gt Temporarily Change Ladders gt Apply the Changes 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS 2 4 Menu List Page 127 Inserting from the menu toolbar Page 134 Inserting inline structured text Page 149 Displaying syntax templates Page 149 Registering undefined labels Page 149 Batch comment out uncomment of a program Page 130 Editing FB instance names Page 130 Replacing FB instances Page 133 Replacing functions Page 133 Adding deleting arguments Page 135 Entering editing comments Page 136 Entering editing statements Page 138 Entering editing notes Page 136 Entering editing statements Page 138 Entering editing notes Page 137 Line statement to be displayed in the tree Page 128 Switching methods for contacts instructions Page 141 Temporary changing Page 142 Applying restoring the changes gt Line Statement List gt Jump gt Jump to Next Ladder Block
174. Route CC Link Station Nos 1 1 TCP 192 168 0 2 2 seconds 30 seconds 0 time 1 0 20 1 12 SETTING ROUTE TO CPU MODULE 241 12 4 Accessing via Network Co existence Network 12 5 Accessing via Serial Communication Module This section explains the setting method for accessing the CPU module on the own station or on other station via a serial communication module FX5CPU does not support it Connection on a 1 1 basis The following shows the setting example for accessing the CPU module by connecting a personal computer and the serial communication module RJ71024 Transmission Speed Transmission Speed 115 2Kbps PLC side I F PLC Type RJ71C24 En No 1 j l j nternal setti ng In DUT PC side I F Serial USB COM port COM1 En Sum Check Check Other Station Setting No Specification Eoi at Communication Time Retry Times 1 Set the same station number as RJ71C24 Set the station number on the Module Parameter screen 242 12 SETTING ROUTE TO CPU MODULE 12 5 Accessing via Serial Communication Module Connection on a 1 n basis The following explains how to access the CPU module on other station from GX Works3 in a system composed of multiple CPU module stations pa 3 3 Access via a serial communication module The following shows the setting example for accessing the CPU module on other station via serial communication module When connecting via serial communication module the module pa
175. S 106 5 1 About Labels 05655 2dre eee ohana Rea 6 oe eee bas ee eee eee oe ees 106 5 2 Registering Labels errer sacs seca s ep escent ease ee ec eee eee eae re ees eee ee ee 107 Configuration of label editor 0 ee eee eee ees 107 Entering information 0 0 eee ee ee eee eee eens 109 Creating structure definition 0 0 0 0 00 cc te tenet eee eee eee e eens 114 mponngexporing THES 26 3344 14 ncsae dbo oud awe E A ee Ae eee ea ee oe ee ee eee 114 5 3 Registering Module Labels 0 0 c eee ees 115 5 4 Registering System Label ici 00 0 ct tesco s iis HSS eed CCR ee eae ee we we 116 SVslei label serrr eg oane hoes bere eee shee bee eee hee eee O55 oe oe sere eee sek ee eee eee 116 Registering labels in system label database n nannaa naana aa eee eee eens 117 Importing system labels in system label database to GX WorksS3 1 0 0 0 ee 117 Releasing system labels 0 00 0 ee eee eee nett tenn eens 117 Verifying system label information 0 0 00 ee eee eee eee eee 118 Importing the changes of system label database 0 0 cc eee eens 118 PART 3 PROGRAMMING CHAPTER6 CREATING PROGRAMS 120 6 1 Programming FPUNCUONS sa iess aspa naiara parE E PSs ee be a ce Meese eens SER ed wee we 120 Creation ProcedUTE os cc eseuGs bade ds 4 nTa beet e a a eE EOE EASES ESS SHORE a DEEE U eee ss 121 6 2 Program execution order execution type SettingS 000 es 121 Program execution orde
176. SD13 Self diagnostics error code 4 SD14 Self diagnostics error code 5 SD15 Self diagnostics error code 6 SD16 Self diagnostics error code 7 SD17 Self diagnostics error code 8 SD18 Self diagnostics error code 9 SD19 Self diagnostics error code 10 SD20 Self diagnostics error code 11 SD21 Self diagnostics error code 12 SD22 Self diagnostics error code 13 SD23 Self diagnostics error code 14 SD24 Self diagnostics error code 15 SD25 Self diagnostics error code 16 SD62 Annunciator number SD63 Number of annunciators SD64 to SD79 Detected annunciator number SD80 Detailed information 1 information category code SD81 to SD111 Detailed information 1 SD112 Detailed information 2 information category code SD113 to SD143 Detailed information 2 SD200 CPU switch status SD203 CPU module operating status SD210 Clock data Clock data year SD211 Clock data month SD212 Clock data day SD213 Clock data hour SD214 Clock data minute SD215 Clock data second SD216 Clock data day of the week SD218 Time zone setting value Time zone in minutes SD241 Number of extension base units 0 base unit only 1 to 7 number of extension base units SD242 Identification for whether or not Q series module Identification of the base type can be mounted 0 Q series module cannot be mounted There is no base unit that can mount the Q series unit 1 Q series module can be mounted There is a base unit that can mount the Q series unit 4 APPENDIC
177. Select Browse my computer for driver software on the Update Driver Software screen and specify MELSOF T Easysocket USBDrivers in the folder where GX Works3 has been installed on the next screen 1 Select All apps on the Start screen or Start gt All Programs APPENDICES APPENDIX Appendix 6 USB Driver Installation Procedure 357 MEMO APPENDICES APPENDIX 358 Appendix 6 USB Driver Installation Procedure INDEX B Note 4 bo0H5c8 nth eho des de eh eae ee ew oes 138 Block password 00 00 e eee eee 293 O C Offline monitor aaua aaa aa aa 288 Calculating memory size 4 190 Clearing to Zero 1 ee 331 P Clock 2 eee eee eee 329 Processing time of program 4 280 COI ee 48 Profile 2 0 ce ee ee eee 83 Comment 20000c cece ee nevae 135 Common device comment 176 Current value 0000 cece ee eevee 211 R Refresh device naaa aaa aa ee a a 98 D Remote operation nnan aaaea a 326 m Remote password unaa aaa eea aa 310 Data eee eee 9 RUN STOP switch o a aaa 326 Data Logging nanaonan aaa 323 Device intial value naoa naana ana naana 197 Device Memory anaana aana 191 S Sample comment naana aaea 182 E Security key authentication 295 300 aaa Shortcut key auauua e eee eee 47 Each program device comment 176 Single file format 000000 57 Event history Sone se Gear dni Soe
178. Start gt Jump to Previous Ladder Block Start gt Toolbar gt Ladder gt Comment Display gt Statement Display gt Note Display gt Display Lines of Monitored Current Value gt Display Format for Device Comment gt Change Display Format of Device Label Name gt 1 Cell Display gt Change Display Format of Device Label Name gt Wrapping Ladder Display gt Outline gt Expand Collapse of Outlines gt Outline gt Expand Collapse of All Outlines gt Outline gt Show Hide of Outlines gt Display Device gt Text Size gt Bigger gt Text Size gt Smaller gt Open Label Setting of Selected Element gt Open in Front gt Open Label Setting of Selected Element gt Tile Horizontally gt Open Program Body of Selected Element gt Open in Front gt Open Program Body of Selected Element gt Tile Horizontally Open Label Setting gt Open in Front gt Open Label Setting gt Tile Horizontally Open Zoom Source Block gt Instruction Help for ST editor Page 137 Displaying list Page 143 Jump Page 135 Entering editing comments Page 136 Entering editing statements Page 138 Entering editing notes Page 123 Configuration of ladder editor Page 123 Configuration of ladder editor Page 172 Creating displaying Zooms action transition Page 144 Displaying instruction help gt Delete gt Comment Out of the Selected
179. System Master Local Module User s Manual Application Window Diagnostics gt CC Link Diagnostics Diagnostics Result System normal Return to the original Previous lt lt Next gt gt Display All Connecting Station Master station Data Link Status Data linking Operation Status Master station E u a Operation Test Status Logging Create Check Stop Data Link 16 DIAGNOSING MODULE 21 16 3 Diagnosing Network 3 16 4 Checking Error History Operation History The module error information operation history and history of system information can be displayed using the Event History function The detailed information of the error history can be displayed when a CPU module and Intelligent function modules that support the Module error history collection function are used For the versions of modules that support this function refer to the user s manual of each module Operating procedure Click the Event History button on the Module Diagnostics screen or System Monitor screen Precautions e Since the occurrence date for the Event History function depends on the time zone selected in Clock Related Setting for Operation Related Setting of the CPU parameter it may be different from the time on the personal computer in use e When writing reading data to from the CPU module set the remote password the event that the remote password lock unlock is Succeeded is registered more than once
180. System Parameter CPU Parameter 5 29 2015 4 48 42 PM Not Calculation B Module Parameter 5 29 2015 4 45 13 PM Not Calculation Memory Card Parameter 5 29 2015 4 29 47 PM Not Calculation 5 29 2015 4 29 47 PM Not Calculation 0 0 00 Hin Remote Password o Global Label Global Label Setting 44 Global Label Initial Value GLBLINF Local Label Initial Value 5 29 2015 4 29 51 PM Not Calculation 5 29 2015 4 29 51 PM Not Calculation nooo ioWwio Display Memory Capacity Memory Capacity Program Memory Free Size Calculation 318 320KB Legend Data Memory Free E Used 4966 5122KB m Increased Device Label Memory File Storage Area Free BD f m 960 1024KB ecrease E SD Memory Card Free O OKB Ee e The data name displayed in gray indicates that it is in the unconverted state e When a data is written to the programmable controller the target memory capacity may be displayed smaller than the actual file size e Update the graph of the memory capacity by clicking the Size Calculation button Precautions MMemory capacity display for FX5CPU e Program memory The capacity of program memory is displayed in unit of step e Data memory The program restored information parameters and device comments are displayed separately e SD memory card The capacity of the entire SD memory card is displayed e SD m
181. T SA ST SAIC SA D O X Y L B F SB S LT LST LC W SD SW SM Z LZ RD SA X SA Y SA B SA W SA SD SA SM 1 Not supported by FX5CPU 2 Not supported by RCPU Device comment MSetting read range Set the range of Common device comments Each program device comments to be read from a programmable controller on the Device Comment Detail Setting screen displayed by clicking the Detail button Device initial values Even when the device initial value read from the CPU module is local device it is not displayed as a local device is not added on GX Works3 13 WRITING READING DATA TO CPU MODULE 2 13 1 Writing Reading Programmable Controller Data D9 Deleting data in CPU module Delete the data such as programs and parameters in the CPU module For a safety project safety data can be deleted when the safety operation mode of RnSFCPU is in test mode Operating procedure Select the file to be deleted from the list on the Online Data Operation screen and click the Execute button Considerations for Online data operation Unlocking a remote password The confirmation message for unlocking the remote password is displayed when the remote password is set to the CPU module to be accessed Unlock the password by following the message For details refer to the following section KL Page 310 Restricting Access from Other Than Specific Communication Route 2 13 WRITING READING DATA TO CPU MODULE 56 13 1 Wri
182. The USB driver may not be installed when Block Never install unsigned driver software is selected in Control Panel gt System gt Hardware gt Driver Signing Select Ignore Install the software anyway and don t ask for my approval or Warn Prompt me each time to choose an action in Driver Signing and execute the USB driver installation Windows Vista Operating procedure Connect the personal computer and a CPU module with a USB cable and power ON the programmable controller Select Locate and install driver software recommended on the Found New Hardware Wizard screen Select Browse my computer for driver software advanced on the Found New Hardware screen NRond Select Search for the best driver in these locations on the displayed screen Select Include subfolders and specify MELSOFT Easysocket USBDrivers in the folder where GX Works3 has been installed Precautions When Windows can t verify the publisher of this driver software is displayed during the installation select Install this driver software anyway Windows 7 or later Operating procedure 1 Connect the personal computer and a CPU module with a USB cable and power ON the programmable controller 2 Select Control Panel gt System and Security gt Administrative Tools gt Computer Management gt Device Manager from Windows Start Right click Unknown device and click Update Driver Software 3
183. When the maximum number of contacts is exceeded the line will be wrapped automatically The wrapping symbols are displayed at wrapping source and wrapping destination The same numbers serial numbers are assigned to the wrapping source symbol and the wrapping destination symbol that are created in pairs Wrapping lines cannot be created on the input and output circuits of an FB instance A font color background color and fonts can be changed KL Page 48 Checking and Changing Colors and Fonts Related operation MSwitching mode KL Page 126 Read mode Write mode Monitor read mode Monitor write mode MSettings K Page 107 Registering Labels MShow Hide View gt Display Device E MEntering elements KL Page 135 Entering comments statements notes MShow Hide View gt Comment Display Statement Display Note Display insertion K Page 134 Inserting inline structured text insertion KL Page 128 Inserting function blocks Page 133 Inserting functions MShow Hide e Tool gt Options gt Program Editor gt Ladder Editor gt Ladder Diagram gt Display Format e View gt Outline gt Show Hide of Outlines MSwitching display View gt Change Display Format of Device Label Name gt 1 Cell Display Wrapping Ladder Display MChanging display contents Tool gt Options gt Program Editor gt Ladder Editor gt Tool Hint MChanging number of contacts Tool
184. Works3 read the memory dump file from SD memory card inserted in the CPU module and save it to the personal computer in advance Window Debug gt Memory Dump gt Read Results viermi ory Durr p Set ang R sad Ri PSUITS x MA Display Status ay Transfer Setup Read Results ail Specify the file to read From PLC File Name Last Change Size Byte a MEMDUMP_00 DPD 2014 12 03 13 29 07 2182998 Bi a MEMDUMP_01 DPD 2014 12 03 13 34 06 2182998 O a MEMDUMP_02 DPD 2014 12 03 13 35 18 2182998 M a MEMDUMP_03 DPD 2014 12 03 13 36 28 2182998 O a MEMDUMP_04 DPD 2014 12 03 13 38 06 2182998 gO a MEMDUMP_05 DPD 2014 12 03 13 40 07 2182998 O a MEMDUMP _06 DPD 2014 12 03 13 41 15 2182998 gO a MEMDUMP _07 DPD 2014 12 03 13 42 27 2182996 O a MEMDUMP_08 DPD 2014 12 03 13 44 06 2182996 Save to C DEBUG mm Save to PC Close The current execution status of the Memory Dump function can be checked by selecting Display Status 1 After clicking specify the memory dump result file to be read 2 Specify Save Destination and click the Save to PC button 14 CHECKING OPERATION OF PROGRAMS 14 8 Saving and Checking Device Value 286 Displaying memory dump results Display a memory dump result file save in the personal computer Window Debug gt Memory Dump gt Display Result Device Name DO v File Selection Detailed Conditions Memory Dump File Informati
185. X Works2 Modify the program to provide equivalent operations to the Structured Ladder FBD program in GX Works2 Function Block Diagram Ladder Diagram language in GX Works3 does not support wired OR of FBD elements Correct the program to provide the equivalent operation to the Structured Ladder FBD program of GX Works2 since a conversion error is caused When a pointer branch instruction CJ SCJ JMP a jump or a subroutine program is used a conversion error may occur For more details refer to the following manual LA MELSEC iQ R Programming Manual Program Design The program layout may be slightly changed due to the difference between the Structured Ladder FBD editor of GX Works2 and the FBD LD editor of GX Works3 Correct the layout Ladder block label used in the Structured Ladder FBD of GX Worksz2 is defined as the pointer type in a local label 3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 3 2 Creating Project File 67 ESFC program e Pay attention to the data size SFC programs in GX Works3 have a larger data size of symbolic information than the one in GX Worksz2 e POUs that do not exist in the program settings of structured projects in GX Works2 cannot be read Move the POUs to the program settings before reading e When label names such as StepO exist on an SFC diagram in GX Works2 the label names may duplicated with step names and label names in an SFC block after reading the SFC program Change the step names label names to avoid
186. X52 gt X102 Digit Multiple word Select this to search for the entered device and the double word format word devices that include the entered device Replace Device comment Select this whether to move a device comment of Find Device Label to Replace Device Label excluding S TR If multiple comments have been set comments of a display target only can be edited Select this to search for the entered device and digit specified bit devices that include the entered device 9 SEARCHING DATA 9 1 Searching Replacing Devices Labels 202 Options e Option None MO K4MO DO DO 1 J1 BO e Option Digit MO K4MO MOZO K4MOZO K4M0 K4M0ZO DO DOZO DO 1 DO 1 J1 B0 J1 B0ZO J1Z0 BO J1Z0 B0ZO J1 K4B0 J1 K4B0ZO J1Z0 K4B0 J1Z0 K4B0Z0 XO to X3 XO to XOF XO to X1F X0Z0 e Option Multiple words DO to D1 DO to D9 J1 WO to J1 W1 D0 to D1 TO to T1 K1X0 K4X0 K8X0 X0Z0 K1X0Z0 K4X0Z0 K8X0Z0 DMOV K1 DO EMOV E1 DO MOV K1 DO BMOV DO D100 K10 DMOV K1 J1 wo DMOV K1 DO DMOV K1 TO MDevice suffix display for ST editor FBD LD editor and SFC diagram editor only D100 D100 D D100 1 Devices are searched regardless of suffix D100 D 1 D100 E 0 1 D100 1 Only specified devices with suffix are searched D100 D 1 D100 E 0 1 9 SEARCHING DATA 2 9 1 Searching Replacing Devices Labels 03 9 2 Searching Replacing Instructions Search for replace instru
187. a multiple CPU system UO GO to U1FF G268435455 U200 G0 to U3DF G268435455 U3E0 G0 to U3E3 G268435455 O Applicable A Display only xX Not applicable Not available x swo say o E e ho semma s o o e e seme fe o OO swm Ja p e eo Coe E xo swem Ja xO swye a o e smese sw o e e sews sao o ooo e e 1 The devices can be written to local devices x X X X X XI X X x x WHow to input device Global device Prefix SA to the device name Example SA D10 Local device Prefix SA to the device name Example SA D10 APPENDICES APPENDIX 338 Appendix 3 Applicable Devices in GX Works3 For FXSCPU O Applicable A Display only X Not applicable Not available x meaw er ikeosy munca mksa SB e aene ST C C C wese sw oa CE C E i C o C v x x x x x Module access device UD GD Index register monse Ot OS ft at a CD I 26 x xI OIx x x XI X x x ACESS comm ents for module access devices Device coment can be created within the range of U01 GO to U10 G262143 APPENDICES APPENDIX 339 Appendix 3 Applicable Devices in GX Works3 Appendix 4 Use Project in Different Version This section explains the considerations for using the projects created with GX Works3 in different versions Note each description to use projects Opening projects These functions cannot be operated
188. a cell under the second row in the input circuit as shown below and select Edit gt Insert Row to enter an element in the added row E po a M10 3 M10 4 M20 5 La M4 6 18 Hee LY aes Continuous Paste Q i cn Paste after Inserting L Convert B Delete Row Find gt 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 1 31 6 3 Creating Ladder Programs Considerations for using function block e A single function block can be pasted to a single ladder block The output of an FB instance cannot be directly connected to the input of another FB instance When connecting function blocks each other use a coil to initially receive the output of a single function block and then connect the contact of the coil to the input of the other function block FB_DEC FbPoul e When the label settings of a function block is changed convert the program or all programs Considerations for using function block that the class of label is VAR_IN_ OUT e If the version of GX Works3 is 1 011M or earlier use the same device label to both the input and output which are connected to the label of VAR_IN_OUT otherwise the program does not execute properly FbPou_1 FbPou e The subroutine type function blocks that the devices labels for the input and the output connecting to to the label of VAR_IN_OUT are not same the verification results are mismatched It is due to the difference of the version of GX Works3 which
189. abels and buffer memory using the Change Current Value function This function turns bit devices ON OFF forcibly on the CPU module The current values of the word device and buffer memory can be changed forcibly as well The current values can be changed on the following screens e Program editor e Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor screen e Watch window e Intelligent Function Module Monitor window Safety devices labels and standard safety shared global labels can be changed when the safety operation mode of RNSFCPU is in the test mode Change history of current value When the current values of bit device are changed the change history can be checked Window Debug gt Change History of Current Value Change History of Current Vow Find E YO E XO 14 CHECKING OPERATION OF PROGRAMS 265 14 1 Monitor Status Check the operation status of the CPU module and Intelligent function modules using the monitoring function by connecting a personal computer Starting stopping monitoring Start stop monitoring by selecting one of the following menus e Online gt Monitor gt Start Monitoring 4 Stop Monitoring 4 e Online gt Monitor gt Start Monitoring All Windows 4 Stop Monitoring All Windows 2 e Online gt Watch gt Start Watching Stop Watching e Select Online gt Monitor gt Monitor Mode on the active ladder editor For a ladder editor start monitoring by selecti
190. able X Not writable No corresponding device Device Global device Local device M V T ST C D R2 SAWM SA T SA ST SAIC SA D 2 L B F SB LT LST 1 LC W SW Z LZ RD SA B SA W EOSS X Y S SD SM SA X SAVY SA SD SA SM 1 Not supported by FXS5CPU 2 Not supported by RCPU File register When writing the device memory which has been set as a file register write File Register FX5SCPU does not support this setting MSetting range to be written Set the range of file register to be written to the CPU module on the File Register Detail Setting screen displayed by clicking the Detailed button of File Register lf two or more file registers are selected the value of each file register is written read in the same range Precautions Before writing file registers write the CPU parameters then turn the power of the CPU module OFF ON reset the CPU module Device initial values After setting device initial values write Device Initial Value The device initial value which has the same name as the program is written as a file for the local device The devices which cannot be used as a local device cannot be written The device initial values which have difference name as the program will be written as a file for a global device FX5CPU does not support local devices The device initial values are written to a global device regardless of whether or not it is consistent with the pr
191. ack up a project by selecting Project gt Save As in GX Workss3 3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 3 1 Project File and Data Configuration 97 58 Data configuration Data displayed on the Project view The data displayed on the Project view in tree format are as shown below The data names are default Module configuration data Creation method K Page 85 Creating Module Configuration Diagram Module Configuration Module Configuration Diagram Program data Creation method K Page 71 Creating Data A data that displays target system of a project graphically Execution types A setting for when a program operates When executing programs in a CPU module the programs A FF require to be registered to any of the execution types E es scan ca K5 Page 122 i 1 Standard rogram Program file m f ProgPou Program block Program file A file that manages programs BL Local Label Local label Create the file in unit of execution process m Program Program The created files are written to a CPU module in unit of m fm ProgPoul program files Fs Local Label Program block A data that composes a program E eD MAIN Program Ci 000 Black Block A label data that can be used only in the defined program n block s Local Label i Program Program A program data that is created using Ladder Diagram or E HIL Fixed Scan Execution type Structured Text E FE SafetyProgram Program file Worksheet A program data that is created using Fu
192. ading user information to from CPU module 0 0 00 eee eee 306 Logging on to CPU MOQUE siss cacursetendiued conees sb adeiei eco tuee ends saeco en E E e wees ce 306 Changing password os 42cneteacadactexd Ghee ate eee oes eee ee eee ede Baw So baeeake eee ee 306 15 6 Preventing Illegal Data Reading Writing 0 cc es 307 File password function 0 ee eee eee eens 307 CONTENTS 10 How to use file password 1 ee eee eee eee eee n nes 308 Setting file password 1 eee eee eee eens 309 15 7 Restricting Access from Other Than Specific Communication Route 002 cee eee 310 Remote password function 0 0 eee ee ee eens 310 How to use remote password 1 0 ee eee ee eee eee eens 310 Setting remote password 1 ee eee ee eee een e ees 311 CHAPTER 16 DIAGNOSING MODULE 312 16 1 Checking Module Status of System s 601 0 ornate eet eww erie ears GeO eee oa eer ee de eae 313 16 2 Diagnosing CPU Module 0 0 ccc ees 314 16 3 Diagnosing Network 0 00 ccc annann 316 Ethernet QlOQnOSICS stone es ake ane ee comes Ghee ees Meee eee eee seas Wee eee eee 316 CC Link IE Controller Network diagnostics 2 0 0 00 eee eee eens 317 CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics 0 ccc a 319 MELSECNET diagnosics aces 2geenb5i 5d hee Shee bb ode 66256 845 40 de wn oboe bee ewe ee eben dee 320 CC Link GladMOs Ses saa utt54e4 need ees ese ee eee see ee ye ee eee eee te
193. advance Writing reading user information to from CPU module Write the user information registered in a project to a CPU module Read the user information registered in a CPU module and overwrite the existing project Operating procedure Select Online gt User Authentication gt Write User Data to PLC Read User Data from PLC Logging on to CPU module Logging on is required to access to the CPU module in which the user information is registered Enter the user name and the password that are registered in the CPU module to log on After logging on the user will be logged off automatically if the CPU module has no access for five minutes operations required the user authentication or was written the user information Operating procedure 1 Select Online gt User Authentication gt Log on to PLC 2 Set the items on the User Authentication screen and click the OK button MWhen a user name and a password used in the User Authentication function are lost Initialize the user information the programmable controller data and the security keys in the CPU module by performing the following operation e Select Online gt User Authentication gt Initialize all PLC Data Rewrite the user information the programmable controller data and security keys optional to the CPU module after initialization If the power of the CPU is turned OFF ON or the CPU module was reset the allocation for the device label me
194. ails refer to the following section K Page 107 Registering Labels Operating procedure Select FB FUN gt file name gt FB gt Local Label on the Project view Creating function block programs Create a program of a function block using labels Both local labels of the function block and global labels can be used The method for entering programs is same as that of each program Operating procedure 1 Select FB FUN gt file name gt FB gt Program on the Project view 2 Configure the programs Converting function blocks e Function blocks POUs will not be in the converted state even if the conversion was attempted as long as FB instance has not been created or FB instance has been created only in unregistered programs e The FB file will be in the unconverted state when function blocks are edited Once the FB file is changed from the converted state to the unconverted state all programs in which the function blocks are sued will be in the unconverted state Considerations when creating FB programs WUse of devices Using labels is recommended for creating FB programs lf an FB program which uses devices X10 Y10 etc is used at multiple locations the program may not operate normally In addition if an FB program which uses devices for the OUT instruction is used at multiple locations duplicated coil is resulted Duplicated coil can be avoided with the SET RST instruction When using master co
195. alue of the label The availability of initial values differs depending on the data types and classes The entry method of an initial values is the same as that of the constants of labels For details refer to the following manual LA MELSEC iQ R Programming Manual Program Design In addition the initial values of safety global labels local labels of a safety program and standard safety shared global labels cannot be set Applicable range Initial values of labels will be set when the CPU module is at STOP to RUN If the values of labels are changed by program the program operates with the changed initial values Winitial values of label of which data type is array Different initial values for the respective array elements cannot be set When setting the different values for each array set the initial value by program Constant Constant can be set when VAR_GLOBAL_CONSTANT or VAR_CONSTANT is specified to the class The availability of the constants differs depending on the data type and class For details on how to enter the constants refer to the following manuals LA MELSEC iQ R Programming Manual Program Design LI MELSEC iQ F FX5 Programming Manual Program Design Comment Append a comment to the defined labels When entering comments on the label editor press the tl Enter keys to insert a line feed two characters are used in a cell Two or more comments can be set for one label Set the
196. ameter items e Ethernet External Device Configuration of Basic Settings e CC Link IE Field master station Network Configuration Settings of Basic Settings e CC Link master station Network Configuration Settings of Basic Settings 1 Not supported by FX5CPU lI TTT E CCIE Field Configuration Start I O 0040 fo i CCIE Field Configuration Edit View Close with Discarding the Setting Close with Reflecting the Setting Mode Setting Online Standard Mode Assignment Method Start End x Link Scan Time Approx 0 74 ms Module List x No Model Name STA Station Type f Saa i Be att neeevegEi SEE HnoMonule aie 5 a Points Start End Points Start End 8 Or g 4 ma O O aR eee DI aster SEES E CC IE Field Module Mitsubishi Elec m 1 RJZ1EN71 E CCIEF 1 Local Station 32 0000 0001F 16 0000 000F No Setting g Master Local Module mj 2n GT27 x 2 Inteligent Device Station 16 0000 OO0F 6 0000 0007 No Setting ES RIV1EN71 E CCIEF Master Loc B MR J4 B RIO10 3 inteligent Device station No setting WB RI7IGF11 T2 Master Loc MB RIVLEN7I CCIEF Master Loc E OJ71GF11 T2 Master Loc E LI71GF11 T2 Master Loc E OD77GF16 Master Moc Communication Head Module Servo Ampliter MELSER O J4 S Basic Digital Input Module Basic Digital Output Module Basic Analog Input Module Basic Analog Output Module Basic temperature control modt Basic High Speed Count
197. anagement ij Transfer Setup T Select the security key to use Creation Date 5 30 2014 4 34 50 PM Project CPU qa Select the protection target data Security Key Set in Project Key Name Registering security key Operating procedure 1 Selecta security key to be registered to a program file from Name 2 Select the program file to lock from the Project tab and click the Register button The security key registered in program files will be validate after saving the project The program file of which security key is registered is displayed in the Project view as follows When the security keys between in the personal When the security keys between in the personal computer and the project does not match computer and the project matches E fi ProgPou Local Label fer ProgPou B Local Label F Program Program MSecurity key lock for FB files If the program in which the function block of FB file locked with a security key is used is opened on the personal computer with no corresponding security key exists the FB program cannot be opened However the instances of the locked FB can be created in the program on the personal computer in which the security key is not registered Deleting security key Operating procedure Click the Delete button in the Project tab 15 PROTECTING DATA 299 15 2 Preventing Illegal Access to Program Protected by Key
198. and drop x0 xI x2 m me F Click the icon displayed when the mouse G is close to the element x0 xi rl A Z Drag it until the line is drawn x10 anaes Keyboard e le EN A keys Press the lel Snit lt E keys to enter horizontal lines consecutively from a cursor position to the next contact coil line connection point function blocks Paste a function block as a part and then name FB instance name and insert it into a sequence program For the creation methods of a program of a function block refer to the following section K Page 214 Creating Function Blocks 1 Drag and drop a function block element to an arbitrary cell on the sequence program from the Project view or Element Selection window 2 Select which to register the function block either as a global label or as a local label in the list of FB Instance Name screen When the function block is pasted the FB instance name is automatically registered as a label on the selected label setting screen 3 Connect the input and output to the FB instance 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 128 6 3 Creating Ladder Programs Poin tr e By entering fb in the element entry dialog the options of function block elements are displayed A function block element can be entered by selecting it from the options e To insert a function block between two consecutive FB instances select Edit gt Insert Row above the second FB instance first and then insert the
199. and drop it onto the Element Selection window 2 Select the registration destination on the Register to Favorites screen and click the OK button MAdding from ladder editor Devices labels instructions and FB instances can be added to Favorites 1 Select the cell of the element to be added and drag the border of the cell and drop it onto the Element Selection window 2 Select the registration destination on the Register to Favorites screen and click the OK button BAdding from ST editor Devices labels and FB instances can be added to Favorites 1 Select the token of a part to be added and drag and drop it onto the Element Selection window 2 Select the registration destination on the Register to Favorites screen and click the OK button Adding from FBD LD editor Devices labels and FB instances can be added to Favorites 1 Select the element to be added and drag and drop it onto the Element Selection window with the key held down 2 Select the registration destination on the Register to Favorites screen and click the OK button MAdding from SFC diagram editor Devices and labels can be added to Favorites 1 Select the SFC element to be added and drag and drop it onto the Element Selection window 2 Select the registration destination on the Register to Favorites screen and click the OK button 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS 2 3 Screen Configuration 33 34 Adding fr
200. and remote control operation have to be executed after the manual has been carefully read and the safety has been ensured When changing a program while the CPU module is in RUN it may cause a program corruption in some operating conditions Fully understand the precautions described in this section Writing data after changing programs partially while CPU module is in RUN Online program change This function partially overwrites data such as program files in the CPU module Before changing the program check if the programs between in the CPU module and in the project match using the Verify with PLC function If there is no target file in the CPU module the online program change function cannot be performed The list of operations for the data which can perform the online program change function and the target files are as shown 1 3 below O Applicable Not applicable Adding changing deleting programs Adding changing deleting programs Function Adding changing deleting local labels Adding changing deleting programs 1 Not supported by FX5CPU 2 The operation for the assignment information can be performed only when the labels are set to be accessed from external devices 3 The operation for the label initial value file can be performed only when initial values are set to labels 1 Verify a program against a program on the programmable controller to ensure that they match If the program part to be written
201. ange Size Byte 4 Untitled Project og Parame ter i System Parameter CPU Parameter a Module Parameter 5 29 2015 4 30 39 PM 5 29 2015 4 30 39 PM Not Calculation Not Calculation Simple Motion Module Setting 0010 R Memory Card Parameter 5 29 2015 4 30 17 PM 5 29 2015 4 23 47 PM Not Calculation Not Calculation EB Global Label fin Remote Password 5 29 2015 4 29 47 PM Not Calculation a Global Label Initial Value e Global Label Setting 5 29 2015 4 30 35 PM Not Calculation GLBLINF 5 29 2015 4 30 35 PM Not Calculation Display Memory Capacity S mor AF GX Simulator3 o amp x Tool 1 1 RO8CPU LED SWITCH READY i AUN ERROR J STOP P RUN i USER i RESET 228 Tool BB Sx Simulator 320 320KB Free 5108 51 20KB Free 1024 1024KB Free 0 0KB 1 1 0010 RD77M58 1 1 ROSCPU SWITCH LED 11 SIMULATING PROGRAM 11 2 Starting Stopping Simulation Select Debug gt Simulation gt Start Simulation 4 2 Select the checkbox of the programmable controller program data to be written on the Online Data Operation screen displayed and click the Execute button Do not write Simple Motion Module Setting at
202. anged to FX5UCPU To read SFC programs GX Works2 of which version is 1 535H or later requires to be installed in a personal computer The items which are not supported by GX Works3 are deleted To read Structured Ladder FBD programs GX Works2 of which version is 1 519R or later requires to be installed in a personal computer The data are moved to SM8000 or higher SD8000 or higher when the module type is changed to FXSUCPU 3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 3 2 Creating Project File 65 66 instructions that are not supported by MELSEC iQ R series MELSEC iQ F series modules If an instruction which is not supported by MELSEC iQ R series MELSEC iQ F series modules is included in the program created with GX Works2 the instruction will be changed to the program in which SM4095 SD4095 is used In addition the FBs FUNs that are not supported by the FBD LD editor will be undefined FBs FUNSs Modify the program with the instruction equivalent to the one supported by MELSEC iQ R series MELSEC iQ F series LA MELSEC iQ R Programming Manual Instructions Standard Functions Function Blocks LA MELSEC iQ F FX5 Programming Manual Instructions Standard Functions Function Blocks Maker defined FUN that requires the replacement of the instruction names The data type for a number of Maker defined FUNs of GX Works2 is different from the one for the instructions and the arguments of GX Works3 Thereby the data type mismatch error may occur when utilizing a progra
203. as Select a transition then enter TRUE FALSE in the transition name Label device diagram conditions Use ON OFF of bit device bit Select a transition then enter a bit device bit specified word device or a bit type Label device type label as conditions label in the transition name Create a condition with FBD Select Edit gt Modify gt Direct Expression for Transition then connect with an Direct expression LD element FBD LD element Entering comments of Transition No Enter a comment on the Step Properties screen device comment editor 1 64 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 6 6 Creating SFC Programs Inserting editing actions inserting an action Select a step an action then select Edit gt Insert gt Action Multiple actions can be inserted in a step Poin tr If all actions in a step are deleted a transition is only checked all the time while a step is activated Once the transition was satisfied the next step is activated Steps without actions can be used when synchronizing the steps that are performing simultaneously etc Changing an action name Click the action then select Edit gt Modify gt Name press the key For an action that a Zoom has been created the data name of Zoom will not be changed if the action name was changed Modify the data name to match with the action name on the Zoom List screen lt Page 172 Displaying a Zoom list Creating an action There are two ways of creation method fo
204. atic naming rules are as follows Defined characters PN String the string which is not enclosed by is set without enclosed by Type Prefix Label Row Device L5 Character string in Assign Device Label Label row number Prefix by class Prefix by data type The character other than the defined one enclosed by will be blank The prefixes for each data type are as follows Bit Word Unsigned Bit String 16 bit Double Word Unsigned Bit String 32 bit Word Signed Ww Double Word Signed d FLOAT Single Precision e FLOAT Double Precision le Time tm String S String Unicode ws Pointer pd Timer td 5 REGISTERING LABELS 1 5 2 Registering Labels 09 Counter cd Long Counter Icd Retentive Timer std Long Retentive Timer Istd Long Timer ltd Structure st FB fb The prefixes that are added depending on the selected class are as follows VAR_GLOBAL G_ VAR_GLOBAL_RETAIN GR_ VAR_GLOBAL_CONSTANT GC_ VAR Not added VAR_RETAIN r_ VAR_CONSTANT Gs VAR_INPUT i VAR_OUTPUT o_ VAR_IN_OUT io_ VAR_OUTPUT_RETAIN or_ VAR_PUBLIC pb_ VAR_PUBLIC_RETAIN pbr_ Setting example Label Name Data Type bLabell Bit 1 CC Gable Cd 4 Extended Display Automatic e When Bit is specified to data type bLabel1 Prefix b that indicates the bit type character string Label label row number 1 e When VAR_GLOBAL is selected to the class G_Label2 Prefix G_ that indicates the class
205. ation to clear the values 3 Select Online gt Write to PLC to write the changed program files When the initial values are set to the labels used in the program write the label initial value file as well 4 Reset the CPU module It can also be reset by selecting Online gt Remote Operation The labels are reset to 0 or initialized with the values set to the label initial value file Memory assignment of labels When converting converting all programs the labels declared in the label editor are assigned to the memory in a packing block which is classified as type and data type and set them in consecutive order of line numbers unit Since it is assigned in POU units the start position of POU will be 64 bit address boundary 1 Labels are assigned per packing _Var_Bool3 Var_Bool1 Var Bool2 see sase uted gh ab atettasd ven tintessteseamatia a a te SR RELEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEELEEELEDEDELEDEDY Var Word2 block z z Var_Word4 Easy Display ka Display Setting Check f pfannunnunnunnnnnn Tmanunnnnunnnannnnnnnnnn f Label Name E _ Data Type Class O Z S eee me ne eee enn ee ee eee ere 1 VarWord2 Word Unsigned Bit String 16 bit a VAR Y 2 ai Boo m an a O l Var_Dword1 3 Var_Lreal FLOAT Double Precision a VAR 4 Var_Dwordt Double word Unsigned Bit Sting 32 VAR
206. ation Detailed Information gt Docking Window gt Result of Power Supply Capacity and I O Points Check gt Docking Window gt Module Start I O No Related Area Docking Window gt Watch 1 to 4 gt Docking Window gt Intelligent Function Module Monitor gt Intelligent Function Module Monitor 1 to 10 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS 2 4 Menu List Page 210 Creating displaying cross reference information Page 212 Displaying Device Usage List Page 202 Searching Replacing Devices Labels Page 204 Searching Replacing Instructions Page 205 Searching Replacing Character Strings Page 202 Searching Replacing Devices Labels Page 204 Searching Replacing Instructions Page 205 Searching Replacing Character Strings Page 207 Changing Contacts Between Open Contact and Close Contact Page 208 Batch Replacing of Devices and Labels Page 184 Converting converting all programs Page 259 Writing data after changing programs partially while CPU module is in RUN Online program change Page 184 Converting converting all programs Page 121 Program execution order settings Page 28 Main frame Page 48 Checking and Changing Colors and Fonts Page 31 Navigation window Page 32 Element Selection window Page 28 Main frame Page 210 Creating displaying cross reference information Page 212 Displaying Device Usage List Page 98 Checking refresh devices assigned to modules Page 277 Checking Current Va
207. ation Setting within the Modules For details on the setting items of the parameters refer to the following manuals e I O Assignment Setting RLA MELSEC iQ R Module Configuration Manual MELSEC iQ F FX5 User s Manual Application e Multiple CPU Setting LA MELSEC iQ R CPU Module User s Manual Application e Synchronization Setting within the Modules LA MELSEC iQ R Inter Module Synchronization Function Reference Manual Point System parameters of other project can be utilized Click the System Parameter Diversion button and select the project file to be used Precautions When configuring a multiple CPU configurations using RnENCPU the configuration cannot be changed to a single CPU configuration on the I O Assignment Setting screen To change it replace the module on the Module Configuration Diagram Setting parameters Operating procedure 1 Double click Parameter gt System Parameter on the Project view 2 Select the items to be set in the I O Assignment tab Multiple CPU Setting tab or Synchronization Setting within the Modules tab 3 Set the items and click the OK button When module is deleted in I O Assignment Setting The parameter of the deleted module is displayed as Unset on the Project view To restore the state of the parameter to display in I O Assignment Setting again select the mount position on the Properties screen When I O Assignment Setting is read from the read
208. aton Camuniatin Communaton latest Open Port No Communication Method IP Address Sa System St MELSOFT Connection TCP Discor E a ean eee aS Discor Broadcast Send 255 255 255 255 0410s SCP Fixed Buffer No Procedure TP Active Discor Fixed Buffer No Procedure po TR _ Unpasse Discor Fixed Buffer No Procedure Discor g d 2 1 16 DIAGNOSING MODULE 3 6 16 3 Diagnosing Network CC Link IE Controller Network diagnostics Monitor the network information diagnose the network status and perform a test FX5CPU does not support it For details refer to the following manual MELSEC iQ R CC Link IE Controller Network User s Manual Application Optical cable Diagnostics gt CC Link IE Control Diagnostics Optical Cable Change Module j prm Start Monitoring 7 Modulel Network No 1 Total Number of Stations 11 0 Master Station Block 0 Block 0 Network Type CC Link IE Control Connected Sta Specified Control Station Cable Disconnected on OUT Side Cable Disconnected on IN Side Previous lt lt Next gt gt Current Link Scan Time Display Selected Station Network Equipment Status S Station No 1 Error Transient IP Address Communication Test can check route from connected Transmission G
209. avoid overlap of elements when an element is added moved When a rectangle area of network an area comprises elements connected with connectors and additional one cell to each direction overlaps with other area the position is automatically adjusted so that the entire network does not overlap However comment elements can be superimposed since it is not subject for the automatic adjustment Inserting deleting rows and columns Operating procedure inserting a row Select a cell in the row to be inserted then select Edit gt Insert Row A row will be inserted on the selected cell Deleting a row Select a cell in the row to be deleted then select Edit gt Delete Row The row that contains the selected cell will be deleted If the elements exist in the row that is same as the selected cell the row will not be deleted Binserting deleting a column Move the cursor in the network that a column will be inserted deleted then select Edit gt Insert Column of Network Delete Column of Network A column is inserted deleted within the range of network Pasting from each screen Paste a label name device name by dragging and dropping from the label editor and the device comment editor Registering undefined labels When an undefined label is entered the Undefined Label Registration screen is displayed and it can be registered on the label editor 1 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 56 6 5 Creating FBD LD Programs Searching for rep
210. cable Connect and disconnect a USB cable reset the CPU module and turn the power ON OFF A communication error may occur and it may not be recovered if connecting and disconnecting a USB cable resetting the CPU module or turning the power ON OFF is performed frequently during communication with the CPU module Be sure to set GX Works3 to offline status as much as possible during these operations Offline indicates the state other than below e Write to PLC Read from PLC Monitor and PLC diagnostics If the operation is not recovered from an error remove the USB cable Then connect it again after five or more seconds Even after this operation an error may occur at initial communication However communication will be successful after that Click the OK button on the warning message and remove a USB cable from the personal computer Combination of personal computers and USB cables A communication error may occur depending on the combination of personal computers and USB cables lf an error occurs take appropriate actions in accordance with the message displayed on the screen Other considerations BHigh speed communication using an RS 232 cable Communication may fail depending on the performance of the personal computer when high speed communication is attempted by changing the transmission speed at the serial port of the personal computer personal computer side interface Communication speed may also slow down due to communicati
211. cari ve 9 EG E a_i Sir a TRAR HAHAE Z E a UNITOOTRE v4 init_set UNITOO1 UNITOO1 K1 PfModuieREA Count Enabl lt 1 cell display gt lt Wrap display gt a UNITOOTRE UNITOO1RE i ADY i 4 Note ModuleREA UNITOO1 H4 K1000 KI i DY ModuleREA DY OP M10 i SET Initial setting complete Separation bar horizontal Device assigned sia to label Lee ee AE A perep e E E E p a Operand i FB instance input1 output p __ xo xi x2 x3 x4 a e rin yt wrapping source 1 fvebata D1 D2 03 3 Inline structured text box 7 U lt Separation bar vertical Outline display Left power rail Right power rail Number of contacts displayed in a column Pointer input area 124 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 6 3 Creating Ladder Programs Displayed items Item Mode display area Step No Device assigned to label Alias Comment Line statement Line statement displayed in the tree P statement statement Note Inline structured text box FB instance Operand Outline display 1 cell display Wrap display Left power rail Right power rail Tool hint Number of contacts displayed in a column Wrapping symbols Point Description An area that displays mode such as Write Read Write Mntr Read Mntr The start Step No of a ladder block A device assigned to a label Editing and searching replac
212. cations in a list Page 200 SEARCHING DATA Device list Checks the usage of devices being used Search and replace e Finds and replaces a device name label name instruction name and character strings e Changes open close contact e Replaces devices in a batch Simple search for instruction devices labels Search for a device label and move the cursor on the ladder editor Operating procedure 1 Press the Seacel key on the ladder editor 2 Enter the device label and click the Find button on the Find screen Jump Specify a Step No and move the cursor on a ladder editor Operating procedure 1 Select Find Replace gt Jump 2 Specify a Step No on the Jump screen and click the OK button Poin tr On the program editor pressing a numeric key on the keyboard enables to display the Jump screen 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 14 6 3 Creating Ladder Programs 3 Displaying instruction help Check the instructions used in the ladder program on e Manual Viewer To check the instructions the files of the corresponding programming manual requires to be registered to e Manual Viewer Operating procedure 1 Select the cell where the target instruction is entered 2 Press the key 144 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 6 3 Creating Ladder Programs 6 4 Creating ST Programs This section explains how to create an ST program The details on the specification of ST program are described in the following manual Please read
213. cing a network in the display range print range on the editor The same connector label indicates that they are connected 1 Input connection point 2 Character string RETURN Uneditable It is used to suspend the processing in the middle of processing 1 Comment display area It is used to enter a comment Double click it with a mouse cursor placed on the frame of the element in order for the size to be adjusted automatically according to the character string 41 Only local label of which data type is pointer can be specified 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 6 5 Creating FBD LD Programs 153 Entering programs This section explains how to enter an FBD LD program Adding elements Operating procedure Using the edit box Select a cell that the element is to be added then enter a label name or data type of FB FUN directly An element name and label name can be edited directly by selecting a placed element and pressing the key The following items can be entered e Device label e Constant e FB FUN 1 The options of instruction label can be displayed by pressing the ctl Brace keys inserting from the menu toolbar Select a cell to which an element is to be added on the FBD LD editor then select Edit gt Add Element gt element It can also be added by selecting from the toolbar Binserting from the Element Selection window Select an element from the Element Selection window and drag and drop it on the FBD
214. city Program Memory Free Size Calculation a Legend Data Memory Free E usec 886815 122K8 mi Increased Device Label Memory File Storage Area Fiss e 80102448 ee SD Memory Card Free Select the data to be verified and click the Execute button The operation method for displaying the verification result is the same as the Project Verify function Refer to the following section KL Page 78 Checking verification result HVerification of module parameters The data which can be selected as verification target are as follows Ethernet modules CC Link modules CC Link IE Controller Network modules CC Link IE Field Network modules and MELSECNET H network modules 13 WRITING READING DATA TO CPU MODULE 2 13 2 Verifying Programmable Controller Data 97 13 3 Writing Programs While CPU is in RUN This section explains the operations for changing programs or data while the CPU module is in RUN online program change Before performing the online program change function be sure to fully understand the descriptions below The specifications for online program change of CPU module refer to the following manual A MELSEC iQ R CPU Module User s Manual Application There are two ways to write data while CPU module is in RUN as shown below O Writable X Not writable Type Description Supporting CPU module RnCPU RnENCPU RnSFCPU FX5CPU RnPCPU RUN File batch online change Writes data in file units while the CPU modul
215. cking on the tool bar Multiple selections allowed Considerations for search in Device List MSearching for coil instructions As output instructions the following application instructions can also be the target of search SET RST PLS PLF FF SFT SFTP and MC MSearching for R device and ZR device R device and ZR device are searched separately in the Device List Specify them separately when searching for R device or ZR device FX5CPU does not support ZR devices Confirming locations of devices The location of the device used can be checked by opening the Cross Reference window from the device in the Device List To open the Cross Reference window select a row in the Device List and follow any of the following operations Press the ctr E keys or press the key e Double click the row e Right click gt select Cross Reference from the shortcut menu For details on the Cross reference function refer to the following section K Page 209 Displaying Reference Information List of Devices Labels Displaying comments e When searching for data with selecting one program the comments specified by selecting Tool gt Options gt Project gt Device Comment Reference Reflection Target are displayed Page 176 Device comments e When searching for data with selecting multiple programs common device comments are displayed MSearching for a step relay SO when searching for a step relay SQ specify a ste
216. cters for RCPU and the mounting position number and title up to 32 characters for FXSCPU can be changed Window Select Parameter gt Module Information gt module name on the Project view then select Project gt Data Operation gt Properties a right click and select Properties a from the shortcut menu Properties pes General Comment E Data Name Data Name OOO0 RIFLENFICCCIEF Title Title Last Change 5 27 2014 8 04 49 PM B Module Selection Module Type Information Module Module Name RITLEN 1 CCIEF Port 1 Network Type CC Link IE Field Port 1 Station Type Local Station Port 2 Network Type Port 2 Station Type E Detail B Mount Position Mounting Base Main Base Title Cancel Operating procedure Set the items and click the OK button Module dedicated menus for the parameter editor Depending on the setting items of each module the input format and device assignment method can be selected from one of the following menus e Edit gt IP Address Input Format gt Decimal Hexadecimal e Edit gt Device Assignment Method gt Start End Points Start e Edit gt Word Device Setting Value Input Format gt Decimal Hexadecimal 1 00 4 CREATING MODULE CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM AND SETTING PARAMETERS 4 2 Setting Parameters Parameter interaction with MELSOFT Navigator By using the parameter interaction function of MELSOFT Navigator the
217. ction Remote password function Page 303 Preventing Illegal Access to Project Page 306 Preventing Illegal Access to CPU Module Page 307 Preventing Illegal Data Reading Writing Page 310 Restricting Access from Other Than Specific Communication Route MELSEC iQ R Ethernet User s Manual Application IP filter function 15 1 Preventing Illegal Access to Program Protected by Password To prevent an illegal access to programs in POU unit by setting a password use the Block password function Block password function Restrict the operations by registering a password to POUs e The operation that can be restricted Accessing to POU The operations will be allowed while the program is authenticated even if a password has been registered e Target data Program blocks function blocks and functions gt Page 58 Data configuration How to use block password Procedure to enable security 1 Seta block password to a POU K Page 293 Setting block password 2 Save the project Page 69 Saving project After closing the project in which the block password is set the POU cannot be accessed when the file is opened next time Procedure to make locked POUs accessible e Authenticate the block password set to the POU Page 294 Authenticating block password The POU can be accessed while the project is open Setting block password Register a block password to POUs Window e Project gt Security
218. ctions in a program Supported editors Ladder editor ST editor and FBD LD editor LD element and FBD element FB FUN only and SFC diagram editor The NOP instructions used in the ladder programs cannot be searched The following application instructions can also be searched as an output instruction SET RST PLS PLF FF SFT SFTP MC Find Replace gt Find Instruction 2H Replace Instruction Find Contact or Coil EA Find Instruction Replace Instruction Entire Projects Entire Projects Find Find Next Replace V Find Beplace Options Find Next Find Direction Element selection area Device instruction input area Element selection area Device instruction input area Set the items on the screen and click the Find Next button xamples of instruction search MOV MOV MOVP MOVP MOVP MOV DO K4Y0 MOV DO K4Y0 MOVP D0Z1 K4Y0 MOV DO K4Y0Z1 MOVP D0Z1 K4Y0Z1 MOVP DO J1 W0 MOVP DO J1 W0 MOVP DOZ1 J1 W0 MOVP DO J1Z1 W0Z1 MOVP D0Z1 J1Z1 W0Z1 The search specifying an argument can only be performed in ladder programs 204 9 SEARCHING DATA 9 2 Searching Replacing Instructions 9 3 Searching Replacing Character Strings Search for replace character strings of the data in the project Ladder editor ST editor FBD LD editor SFC diagram editor Label editor Device comment editor Character strings except for the following All character strings a Character st
219. d state even if the conversion was attempted as long as functions are not used in the program or functions are used only in unregistered programs e The FUN file will be in the unconverted state when functions are edited Once the FUN file is changed from the converted state to the unconverted state all programs in which the functions are used will be in the unconverted state 21 8 10 SEGMENTING PROGRAMS 10 2 Creating Functions 10 3 Enhancing Use of User Library This section explains how to store created elements in a library file and utilize them in sequence programs In this section the user library is explained as a library User library User library collects the elements which are used generally in multiple projects to make them easy to use It can be used by importing elements in the library to each project The following data can be registered in the user library e POUs Program block Function block Function e Global labels structures Project A Library Importing only necessary elements and utilizing them A Element 1 Element 4 Element 2 Element 5 Element 3 Element 6 Procedure to use 1 Create a library file I Page 220 Creating libraries 2 Register a library in GX Works3 Page 221 Registering to library list 3 Utilize elements from a library to projects Page 222 Utilizing elements Precautions When using the library file which is on a network drive or a removable media save th
220. depending on the GOT series and the connection condition between the personal computer and GOT For details refer to the following manuals LA GOT2000 Series Connection Manual Mitsubishi Products For GT Works3 Version LA GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Mitsubishi Products for GT Works3 244 12 SETTING ROUTE TO CPU MODULE 12 6 Accessing via GOT GOT Transparent Function 12 Accessing to Multiple CPU System This section explains the setting method for accessing the CPU module host CPU directly connected to the personal computer or other CPU modules other CPUs in the multiple CPU system The setting method for accessing the multiple CPU system on other station via a network is also explained FX5CPU does not support it Accessing host CPU The setting for accessing the host CPU is the same as that for accessing the CPU module on the own station Page 237 Direct Connection Accessing other CPUs In the multiple CPU system specify the CPU number PLC No 1 to 4 of the access target at Multiple CPU Setting when accessing a CPU module that is not directly connected to the personal computer The following shows the setting for accessing the CPU No 4 by connecting a personal computer to CPU No 1 CPU No 1 connected to the personal computer CPU No 2 CPU No 3 CPU No 4 access target No Hem Item to be selected Internal setting Input value 1 PC side I F Serial USB USB 2 PLC side I F PLC Modu
221. der Program file Execution type Unregistered Program Program file for add destination The category column of data to select Standard Safety Standard safety shared is displayed for a safety project For the details on the data to select refer to the following section K Page 19 RnSFCPU Supported Functions Operating procedure Set the each item and click the OK button For the setting items when Function Block or FB File is selected as data type refer to the following section KL Page 214 Creating function blocks For the setting items when Function is selected as data type refer to the following section K Page 217 Creating functions Precautions e When function block and function data are added by the above method the FB file and FUN file will be in the unconverted state e Once the FB file and FUN file is changed from the converted state to the unconverted state all programs in which the function blocks and functions are used will be in the unconverted state e SFC data and program blocks written in programming languages except for SFC Ladder ST FBD LD cannot exist in a same program file 3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 3 3 Creating Data Editing projects Changing a data name Operating procedure 1 Select the data of which data name is to be changed on the Project view 2 Select Project gt Data Operation gt Rename Data right click and select Rename Data from the shortcut menu 3 C
222. display format and the settings of detailed operation for each function Project E Reference Reflection Target for Device Comment Reference Reflect the Other Device Comment When Yes Mixed Module Label Common Tere Common Navigation Common fH Program Editor Common Pg Other Editor Common Common H Find Replace Common Common KEKEKE KEKE KE KA KE KEKEKE Common F Convert a Intelligent Function Module iQ Works Interaction Import i Export Back to Default Back to User Default Set as Default Cancel Set the items and click the OK button Point By importing the exported file gos the settings can be utilized in other personal computers The setting files exported from GX Works2 can be imported The setting items set to Project gt Device Comment Reference Reflection Target are not exported After changing the following option setting performing Rebuild All is required e Tool gt Options gt Other Editor gt Label Editor Common gt Data Type Setting As a precautionary measure perform the following operation before switching the CPU module to RUN 1 Reset the CPU module 2 Clear values of devices labels to 0 Including latch 3 Clear values of file registers to 0 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS 50 2 8 Setting Options 2 9 Printing Data This section explains how to print the data created in GX Works3 Project gt P
223. display settings of the multiple comments on the Multiple Comments Display Setting screen For details refer to the following section KL Page 49 Setting Comment Display Copying device comments The comment of the device assigned to the selected label can be copied to the label editor Operating procedure Select Edit gt Copy Device Comment 8 5 REGISTERING LABELS 11 5 2 Registering Labels 3 Accessing from external devices Select this to monitor devices labels from external devices connected to the CPU module FX5CPU does not support it If the selection status of Access from External Device is changed the change will not be reflected to the assigned devices labels An error occurs when accessing from an external device to the CPU module in any of the following condition e Data type is pointer type FB e Class is VAR_GLOBAL_CONSTANT e Indexed devices This setting is not available for safety global labels nor standard safety shared global labels Creating structure definition Set the structure elements Be sure to create the data for structure definition in advance Page 72 Creating projects Window Project view gt Label gt Structured Data Types gt structure STRUCT Structure Setting x Easy Display Display Setting Check Label Name Data Type Class Initial value Constant i Element2 Element3 Double Word Signed e no Word Signed 0 9 E
224. do not use the data in the actual operation 18 CHECKING CHANGING CPU MODULE OPERATION 2 18 3 Operations of RnSFCPU 3 9 18 4 Checking Memory Usage This section explains how to check the usage of data memory of CPU built in memory device label memory and SD memory card Online gt CPU Memory Operation Data Memory Use Volume 262 5122KB Device Label File Storage Area Use Volume L 0 1024KB Initialization E Details of memory usage The details of current data memory device label memory and data in an SD memory card can be checked by clicking the Detail button Memory Graph MB Progam 298 51K8 E Parameter 1 95KB MB Device Comment 0 00KB ME Device Initial Value 0 00KB Global Label Setting File 2 82KB 1 Event History 128 00KB MMB Label Initial Value 0 44KB Global Label Assignment Information 0 00KB MB Logging Setting File 0 00KB Remote Password 0 1SKB mg Memory Dump Setting File 0 00KB MM User Data 0 00KB Free Space Volume 4690 06KB Display Format KB Percent Memory Details ooo enee ee E Program e C1 eT E o TIMAINPRG l 48 Ce PELINKPRG SF 2 EOT ae a ae l Parameter a a O ae ee e Module Parameter E 18 CHECKING CHANGING CPU MODULE OPERATION 330 18 4 Checking Memory Usage 18 5 Initializing Clearing Memory This section explains how to initialize or clear the memory For details on the initialization and cleari
225. dow View gt Docking Window gt Cross Reference1 Cross Reference2 E87 Cross Reference 1 All Devices Labels Si Entire Projects x D View Options Device Label Device Ladder Symbol Position Program File Name Data Name Comment saa ae FF 2 Jevice Labe Filter Condition Filter Condi Filter Condition Filter Condition Filter Condition Filter Condition Filter Condition Filte j BINI JE O Step FBFILE FbPou1 ae ig3OUT1 I 3 Step FBFILE FbPou1 Data Type BS UNITOOLREADY 17 Step MAIN ProgPou ModuleREADY Constant gy4 Y4 HLE 18 Step MAIN ProgPou Count_Enable Device Binit_set 19 Step MAIN ProgPou Initial setting co maae IBUNITOO1 HL 20 Step MAIN ProgPou Read Write BSUNITOO1 20 Step MAIN ProgPou CEKO KO T 20 Step MAIN ProgPou Acton fki Ki I 20 Step MAIN ProgPou Ladder symbol UNITOO1 l E 46 Step MAIN ProgPou Position TE H4 H4 46 Step MAIN ProgPou Project 86 All Devices Labels Cross Reference Information Program File Name Data Type Data Name Comment System Label Name Access from External Dewice Up to 2 Find result screens can be displayed at once Up to 80 000 creation results of the cross reference information is displayed Operating procedure 1 Setthe display format from the pull down list displayed by clicking View as necessary 2 Enter a device label to be sea
226. dragging the module Point Object names of module objects can be changed on the Properties screen It will be easy to distinguish a module from one having a same module name by changing an object name Precautions e GOT2000 GOT1000 series general modules image diagrams and link files supported by MELSOFT Navigator are not supported e Only bus cables are available Network connection and serial connection are not available e For FXSCPU bus cables are not supported In addition a base unit slot is not required Select the module and drag and drop it on the Module Configuration Diagram directly Moving placed modules If a module is removed from the main base or extension base the object information such as start I O and parameter information is retained Therefore when the removed module is placed on the base unit again the retained parameter information will be set automatically The module removed from the Module Configuration Diagram is deleted from the I O Assignment Setting screen For FX5CPU the setting cannot be fixed in the state where a module has been removed from the CPU module MDeleting placed modules When a module is deleted the module information displayed on the Project view after fixing parameters is deleted as well For a single CPU system a CPU module object cannot be deleted As for a multiple CPU configuration the host CPU cannot be deleted 4 CREATING MODULE CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM AND SETTING PARAMETE
227. duplication e When SFC programs in MELSAP L format have been read they are converted into the equivalent programs in MELSAP3 format e SFC programs including multiple initial steps cannot be read When multiple initial steps exist in a block modify the program to the one that includes one initial step before reading e The settings to show the output only and not to show the coils in a Zoom cannot be configured in GX Works3 Therefore LD SM400 will be added to the ladder block which does not include the coils when displaying it in MELSAP3 format e An SFC program such as shown below cannot be read because the connection point of branch is not placed on the branch which the start position are placed on the left side Modify the program to place the start and connection points on the left side of same branch before reading Start point of branch 2 Connection point of branch 3 Connection point of branch e When an SFC program which includes jumps is read the SFC diagram is back to the initial status that initial steps transitions and end steps are placed Modify the program not to use jumps before reading In another way create an SFC diagram after reading and connect the jumps to the read Zoom MStep relay SFC block device Step relay SFC block device may not be available on the ST editor and the FBD LD editor Modify the program to provide the equivalent operation to the ST program and Structured Ladder FBD
228. e Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor screen Switching the target file lf the target file is switched by selecting Previous Next while the offline monitor function has been performed the device values are updated to the one of the selected file Stopping the offline monitor function Operating procedure Select Stop Monitoring on the Offline Monitor screen Monitoring is stopped on the program editor It is also stopped on the Watch window and the Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor screen Considerations for monitoring files MWhen the device value of monitor target cannot be obtained If the device value to be monitored does not exist in a selected file the value will be displayed corresponding to the device type as follow Since the indirectly specified devices are not supported they are also displayed such as the following e Bit device bit specified word device FALSE 0 e Word device double word device FLOAT Double Precision 1 MActive status of blocks steps in an SFC program Active status is not displayed on the SFC diagram editor All blocks are displayed as Uncreated Block on all SFC blocks batch monitor 14 CHECKING OPERATION OF PROGRAMS 2 14 9 Checking Sampled Data on Program Editor 89 MEMO 2 14 CHECKING OPERATION OF PROGRAMS 90 14 9 Checking Sampled Data on Program Editor MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION This part explains the maintenance and inspection methods such as a function to p
229. e Global Label Initial Value When Access from External Device is selected on the global label editor write Global Label Assignment Information FX5SCPU does not support the initial value of labels nor the setting for accessing from external device Precautions The sample comments are included in the write target If the data size to be written exceeds the memory capacity of the CPU module at writing data prepare an SD memory card For FX5CPU the writable capacity of the SD memory card is the same as that of CPU module 13 WRITING READING DATA TO CPU MODULE 2 1 13 1 Writing Reading Programmable Controller Data s Device memory When writing values to the device memory area of the CPU module after setting device memory write Device Memory The device memory which has the same name as the program is written to a local device In contrast the device memory which has the different name as the program is written to a global device Only one device memory for a global device can be selected Precautions FX5CPU does not support local devices The device memory is written to a global device regardless of whether or not it is consistent with the program name MSetting write target devices and their ranges Set the type and range of device memory to be written to the CPU module on the Device Data Detail Setting screen displayed by clicking the Detailed button of Device Memory Devices that can be written are as follows O Writ
230. e 227 Starting Stopping Simulation Set GX Simulator3 to STOP Display the I O System Setting screen lt Page 229 Executing I O System Setting function Output the template file of the setting data Page 230 Outputting the template of setting data Edit the outputted file Page 230 Creating setting data On R DH Register the devices labels to be monitored on the Watch window Page 277 Checking Current Values by Registering Devices Labels l Open the edited file 1 gt Page 232 Opening setting data 8 Execute the I O system Page 232 Executing the I O system 9 Set GX Simulator3 to RUN Executing I O System Setting function Configure the devices to be used in the I O System Setting then execute the simulation Window Select Tool gt I O System Setting on the GX Simulator3 screen vo System Setting o ea Execute I Stop Export Template Connection Information System No 1 Status Stopped JT PLC No 1 M PLC Model ROSCPU Setting Data tA AAA AAA A Setting Data Gaam Check Result Error 0 A Warning 0 No Explanation 11 SIMULATING PROGRAM 22 11 3 External Device Operation Simulation 9 Outputting the template of setting data Output the template of I O system setting data in CSV format Select the Export Template on the I O System Setting screen Creating setting data Open the outputted template file then edit the setting data For th
231. e 32 Status icons Sorting data Sort the data displayed in tree format Select a program file then right click and select Sort gt sort type from the shortcut menu Point Data can be sorted by dragging and dropping the data or selecting Order gt Move Up Move Down from the shortcut menu 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS 4 2 3 Screen Configuration 3 32 Creating folders Create a folder for grouping and managing the created data 1 Selecta program file and select Project gt Data Operation gt New Folder right click and select New Folder from the shortcut menu 2 Change a folder name 3 Select the program to be stored and drag and drop it onto the created folder Simple display Click on the toolbar to hide the unused folders Status icons The icons that indicate the state of the project are as follows es Parameter Offline Module folder Displays when a mismatch was detected between the system mismatched parameters and the property of module A Unconfirmed Module parameter Displays when the Apply button has never been pressed on the setting required settings screen of module parameter network that is required to be set Element Selection window The Element Selection window is the window that displays elements such as instructions and standard functions function blocks for program creation in a list format Window View gt Docking W
232. e Tool List Page 103 Displaying module tool list gt Profile Management gt Register Page 83 Registration gt Profile Management gt Delete Page 83 Deletion gt Sample Library Registration Page 223 Enhanced use of libraries gt Shortcut Key Page 47 Checking and Changing Shortcut Keys gt Predefined Protocol Support Function Page 104 Predefined Protocol Support Function gt Circuit Trace Page 105 Circuit Trace Function gt Options Page 50 Setting Options gt Cascade gt Tile Vertically gt Tile Horizontally gt Arrange Icons gt Close All Windows gt Reset Window Layout Back to Initial Status Page 28 Displaying docked windows gt Split gt Restore Split gt Floating Page 29 Docking floating work windows gt Docking gt Window information being displayed gt Window Page 29 Arranging work windows gt GX Works3 Help Page 24 Displaying Help gt Connection to MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA Global Website Page 24 Connecting to MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA Global Website gt Version Information Page 24 Checking version of GX Works3 s for Module Configuration Diagram gt Delete gt Select All gt Bring to Front gt Send to Back gt Module Status Setting Empty Page 87 Module status setting empty gt Display Module Information Page 88 Check model names on module objects gt Check gt Power Supply Capacity and I O Poin
233. e changed Page 48 Checking and Changing Colors and Fonts 1 78 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 6 7 Registering Device Comments Creating device comments Create device comments for each device on the device comment editor Adding device comments make it easy to understand the content of program processing When less number of characters are entered the data size to be written to CPU module can be reduced Set the applicable number of characters in the following option e Tool gt Options gt Other Editor gt Device Comment Editor gt Number of Device Comment Editing Displaying Characters When creating device comments for each program create a device comment data in advance Page 72 Creating projects The comments can be entered on a ladder editor For details refer to the following section KL Page 135 Entering editing comments Operating procedure 1 Enter the device of which comment is to be set in Device Name 2 Enter a comment for Comment Poin tr e By selecting two or more consecutive cells in which the comment with number is inserted and dragging the symbol displayed at the lower right corner of the cell the data of which number is incremented can be entered e When cutting copying the hidden bit specified word device comments select the range and Edit gt Cut the Range Including Hidden Bit Specification Information Copy the Range Including Hidden Bit Specification Information The bit spec
234. e file in the hard disk of a personal computer before using 10 SEGMENTING PROGRAMS 21 10 3 Enhancing Use of User Library 9 Creating libraries The following explains about the operations of library such as how to creating and editing Preparing a source project for library To create a library a source project is required Prepare an existing project or a project that collects the elements to be registered in a library Precautions After registering a library the registered elements are displayed in the Library tab on the Element Selection window However the contents of global labels such as label name data type are not displayed When creating a library that includes multiple global labels set comments to distinguish them on the Properties screen of global labels Creating library file A library file can be created by exporting project as a library file usl Library file is a file in which data related with elements in projects is stored To prevent libraries and elements from manipulation set the password when exporting them Operating procedure 1 After creating elements in the project select Project gt Library Operation gt Export Library 2 Seteach item on the confirmation screen displayed then click the OK button The operating availability of elements which is used in a project of utilization destination can be set by setting a password to edit on the above screen If it is not set the co
235. e is in RUN 1 SFC program supports the online program change function only performed from the Zoom 2 Only standard data is writable Writing data while the CPU module is in RUN affects scan time due to the change of number of steps Set the secured steps for online program change on the Program Detail Setting screen displayed by clicking the Detailed button of Program Considerations e The program execution is suspended while performing the online program change function The length of down time depends on the number of the changed steps e When writing programs which includes the rise instructions fall instructions SCJ instructions and STMR instructions while the CPU module is in RUN the system may not operate properly Do not perform the online program change function to the same program from multiple GX Works3 at the same time lf failed to write data while the CPU module is in RUN state the project will be returned to the previous status before the conversion in order to make it possible to perform the online program change function again Make sure that the parameters between in the CPU module and in the project mach before performing the online program change function Make sure that the writing target file has been written to the CPU module before performing the online program change function When Check at Communication Time has been set less than 90 seconds the timeout will be checked in 90 seconds If an error
236. e local label editor write Local Label Initial Value FX5CPU does not support initial value of label When a standard function or a standard function block is used in the program write SlibFbFile of POU HSetting the secured steps for online program change Set the range of program program file to be written and steps for online program change to a CPU module on the Program Detail Setting screen displayed by clicking the Detailed button of Program FXSCPU does not support this setting Item Description Allocating memory for online Writing programs while the CPU module is in RUN affects scan time due to the change of number of steps program change Enter the secured steps for online program change to handle the change of number of steps when performing the online program change function When the number of program steps is changed the capacity of program files is not changed if the changed number of steps are within the range of the number of the secured steps for online program change Operations after writing SFC programs For SFC programs the operations performs differently between Ladder ST and FBD LD when changing programs by writing them to a programmable controller For the details refer to the following manual A MELSEC iQ R Programming Manual Program Design Global label After setting global labels write Global Label Setting When the column of Initial Value is set in the global label editor writ
237. e ots Oe Cae eee eRe hE eee eee eee eee ee soe eare 35 2 5 Checking and Changing Shortcut Keys 0 ees 47 2 6 Checking and Changing Colors and FontsS 0 0 0 ees 48 2 7 Setting Comment Display sansaa nnana nannan 49 2 8 SENNO OPUONS e seara riera e a a a Oe a ew Se a ee E 50 2 9 Printing Data 2 ou ewasens oh E ean AEA A O E A A e A a Lia eed A 51 PART2 SYSTEM DESIGN AND SETTINGS CHAPTER 3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 56 3 1 Project File and Data Configuration 0 ccc es 56 PIG TON ce eee ein o ok eee eae 6 bon oe Beco naw oer Reena amp ov ede Beng ce 24 oe ee alee eee 56 Backup Of Salely PIOjeCl je it dake goede ede Redondo a een ede ER dase yee D E ded Eee 57 Datel COMMON OM sxe 4 2 gat a vg 8 ee ee 8 ve ae ee ed Se ae ae oe ee ee ee Be oe ee 58 3 2 Creating Project File 00cdesns e059 50ceseasn diate cos beds cede EERS eee ese eink adone 61 Creating Proje cics rector aaia s eee eed edb e ee ee Ri edee ko a eeked dobbs eee ee E ARAE es veer cms caida 61 Opening PiOleCl 2sce22526 64 EET NEEE EENT ees en eoune eee neste eet nue SEEE TEEST E 63 Opening GX Works2 format project 2 anana aaea ee eee eee 64 SeN Eele e E E ou 4 ey nee et eee ee ee ee he oe es eee ee ee ee tee ee ee eee 69 DClEUnG DrOleCle 2528 ace E E BEGGS coe Seta bee ebm Seed on bee ys E eS dae ooeoo ee see 70 3 3 Creating Data icc ews cee iienee tonne AA een he etait d eo eee ed eee ea ae we ers 71 Creating projects wet gae tached
238. e programs KL Page 176 Registering Device Comments A data that includes the values to be written to read from devices in a CPU module K5 Page 191 SETTING DEVICE MEMORY A data that defines values which are set to devices when CPU module is in RUN K5 Page 197 SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES The structure of the tree and the creation methods K Page 93 Setting Parameters Other data E Module Information BS my OO00 RIfIC24 ge Module Parameter Module Extended Parameter Module POU A Module POU shortcut Shortcut P Remote Password Remote password 3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 3 1 Project File and Data Configuration Module POU Shortcut Remote password A shortcut to the module POU that has been registered to the Element Selection window By setting a password for the CPU module accessing from the modules other than specified RJ71EN71 serial communication module and built in Ethernet CPU can be prohibited KL Page 310 Restricting Access from Other Than Specific Communication Route 3 2 Creating Project File This section explains basic operations of GX Works3 such as creating opening and saving projects Creating project For a safety project registering a user is required when creating a new project since a user information for the User Authentication function is needed K Page 305 User management Window Project gt New L New mE Series di RCPU ooo nen pe
239. e usable devices labels refer to the following section KL Page 233 Supported device label Fal W9 ls IOSystemSetting csv Microsoft Excel a Fl x File Home Insert Page Layout Formulas Data Review View a c F z csin Ja Qla E General fj ConditionalFormattingy geInserty E AY j Z fale 7 v Formatas Table g Delete we FA Past B Z U nE EEA TERE at Sort amp Find amp vg I 2 HE ye i ok E Cell Styles Bi Formats 7 Filter Select Clipboard amp Font P Alignment F Number P Styles Cells Editing Al v Se fO System Setting Data v B C D E F G H f AfO System Setting Data E 2 Control Record Control Record 3 RecordType Comment GX Works3 Project Path PLCNo Reserve 4 1 D Users Administrator Desktop Project1 gx3 5 6 Data Record 7 RecordType SettingNo Conditions Timer ms Output Reserve 8 2 1 YO TRUE AND 1 TRUE OR LDP TRUE 2 100 X0 TRUE 1 9 2 1 D0 100 7 jay Data Record 11 2 2 Label 4 200 6 J ii wa OO N 14 i 4 15 5 16 2 6 CONTINUE 1000 D100 D D100 D 65536 6 akra End Record 18 End Record 19 RecordType Reserve LJ 20 3 AA E 4 gt M I0SystemSetting 2 IK T 30 Ready Bam 100 g G Control Record 1 the value indicates the control record is displayed Comments are set up to 50 characters optional Project path in the GX Works3 which is the start source of the simulator is displayed Sets a PLC No
240. ecified between the connected station and other station the same time in the CPU is set to the target CPU module 18 CHECKING CHANGING CPU MODULE OPERATION 2 18 1 Setting Clock in CPU Module 3 s 18 2 CPU Module Remote Operation This section explains the switching method of the execution status of a CPU module such as RUN STOP from GX Works3 Online gt Remote Operation Execution Target Specify Execution Target Specify Target Network No Currently Specified Station 1 Specify Group No 5 1 Operation CPU Operation Status LED RUN Operation during RUN Device Label Memory READY Not Cleared v ERROR Execution Condition of Rising Falling Instruction PROGRAM RUN USER Not Changed v STOP PAUSE RESET Set the items and click the Execute button Currently Specified Station Select this to perform the remote operation only on the station specified in the connection destination setting All Stations Specified a Select this to perform the remote operation on the station specified in the connection destination setting and all the stations on the same network Set a target network in Specify Target Network No l Select this to perform the remote operation on the station specified in the connection destination setting and each station of the specific group on the specified network Set a target network in Specify Target Networ
241. eck Safety Data Identity Connection Information Date of Data Acquisition Connection Destination Host 2015 6 25 15 56 29 PLC Type RO8SSF CPU Operation Mode Test Mode Comparison result of file identifies between Safety PLC and project Completely matched F Display only different files D Legend E Mismatch in file identifier C File does not exist Safety PLC Project Editing File identifier File identifier Bing hese Sf Parameter W Safety CPU Parameter BE53863D B653863D Details _ i Program dg Maint D6539C05 D6539C05 Details a Pou FBFILE o B03717335 B03717355 Details E FUNFILE 5ADDEBSI 5ADDEBSI Details Might be illegal writing if mismatch is found Please check details Create CS File Q Checking whether the data in the project being open and in RnSFCPU are consistent Check the result of compared data Checking whether the CPU module is running with the intended data 1 Save the information of Check Safety Data Identity in the CPU module as a CSV file using GX Works3 when the mode is changed to the safety mode after writing programs parameters to the CPU module 2 Atalater date perform the Check Safety Data Identity function with GX Works3 and check whether the File identifier in the saved CSV file and the one in the result are consistent If the data are not consistent the data in the CPU module may not be the one written by the user In this case
242. ected Station Operation CPU status of the selected station can be changed by starting Remote Operation remote operation of the selected station 16 DIAGNOSING MODULE 16 3 Diagnosing Network CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics Monitor the network information diagnose the network status and perform a test FX5CPU does not support it For details refer to the following manual MELSEC iQ R CC Link IE Field Network User s Manual Application Window Diagnostics gt CC Link IE Field Diagnostics f Select Diagnostics Destination Module Module 1 Network No 1 Change Module Sec Station No o gt Monitoring Start Monitoring mas we By Staton Type 7 ee Total Slave Stations Current Link Number of Station z Constant Link Scan 0 Data Unlinked Selected Station Communication Status Monitor RJ71GF11 12 OOO hh OOO hh SS SS SS Se ee Communication Test station to the destination station m Check the IP communication route from the connected station IP Communication Test biedna Cable Test Check the cable status between the connected station and the destination station Link Start Stop Start or stop the network data link Information Confirmation Setting tO0_ Enable Enable Disable Ignore Station View station numbers set to ignore errors and temporarily Errors ignore station errors Selected Station Operation f Remote Operati CPU stat
243. ed format project e Verifying labels is supported Page 77 Verifying Projects Printing data Printing the following data is supported Page 51 Printing Data e Device comment device memory device initial value e Statement note e Device list e Cross reference e Verification result Q series MELSECNET H network module RnENCPU e RnNENCPU RO4ENCPU RO8ENCPU R16ENCPU R32ENCPU R120ENCPU is supported RnSFCPU e RNSFCPU RO8SFCPU R16SFCPU R32SFCPU R120SFCPU is supported e CPU extension modules R6SFM are supported Version 1 015R Sequential Function Chart 2 e Sequential Function Chart is supported Page 158 Creating SFC Programs 2 3 Execution order setting e The execution order setting of progaram blocks is supported Page 121 Program execution order execution type settings Simulation e The I O System Setting function is supported Page 229 External Device Operation Simulation Offline Monitor e Device data collected with the memory dump function can be Page 288 Checking Sampled monitored on each program editor Data on Program Editor Opening GX Works2 format e The Boot File Setting SFC Setting and Multiple CPU Setting of Page 64 Opening GX Works2 projects PLC parameter are succeeded format project Verification e Differences of verification results can be checked in the editor Page 78 Detailed display editor format format Writing reading data to from a e Data can be written read to from a memory card
244. ed module type cannot be restored Save the project data in advance before changing the module type Note that the project after the change will be in unsaved state e When module labels of CPU module are used the module labels before changing the module type are deleted and the module labels after changing the module type are added Therefore the program may be required to be corrected after the module type is changed Series combinations of which module type is changeable O Changeable A Changeable restricted x Not changeable For the restricted description refer to the displayed message Series before change Series after change RCPU RCPU RnPCPU RCPU RnSFCPU RCPU RnENCPU Poin tr To utilize the data to the different module type of CPU module open each editor and copy the corresponding data Considerations for series combinations Changing a module type from RnENCPU to a CPU module that occupies a single slot If the I O Assignment Setting in the I O Assignment tab of the system parameter has been configured the network part corresponding to the host CPU after changing the module type will be the unplaced status Therefore the module type is changed to RJ71EN71 which is the same network type module 3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 7 3 4 Changing Module Type of Project 5 Changing a module type from a CPU module that occupies one slot to RNENCPU If the I O Assignment Setting in the I O Assignment tab of the system parame
245. ed value are set The open close contact of X100 X101 and X102 will be replaced 2 Click the Replace or Replace All button to change the contact type 9 SEARCHING DATA 207 9 4 Changing Contacts Between Open Contact and Close Contact 9 5 Batch Replacing of Devices and Labels For devices that can be replaced in batch refer to the following section K Page 202 Searching Replacing Devices Labels Supported editors Ladder editor ST editor FBD LD editor and SFC diagram editor Window Find Replace gt Device Batch Replace i Device Batch Replace Entire Projects Find Dev Replace Points Point For E Po pi UE sila bhk Replace Options Device Comment Notto Change Set the items on the screen and click the Replace All button Points Points Enter the number of points to be replaced counted from the device specified for Find Device When a label is entered for Find Device or Replace Device enter 1 Example When X0 for Find Device X10 for Replace Device 5 for Points and DEC for Point Format are set The devices are replaced as X0 X10 X1 gt X11 X2 gt X12 X3 gt X13 X4 X14 Replace Options Select whether to copy move a device comment in Find Device to Replace Device excluding S TR Point Format Select a range of device label on the program editor by a drag and drop operation to register multiple devices labels in batch Wh
246. edicated instruction skip flag OFF Instruction is executing or completed ON Instruction has not been executed SM700 Carry flag OFF Carry OFF ON Carry ON SM701 Number of output characters selection OFF Outputs until reaching NULL code ON Outputs 16 characters SM702 Search method OFF Sequential search ON Dichotomizing search SM703 Sort order OFF Ascending ON Descending SM704 Block comparison OFF Mismatch is detected ON Completely match SM709 DT TM instruction improper data detection flag OFF No improper data ON Improper data is detected SM752 Dedicated instruction End bit control flag OFF End bit automatically controlled ON End bit not automatically controlled SM753 File access in progress OFF File access is not in progress ON File access is in progress SM754 BIN DBIN instruction error control flag OFF Executes error detection ON No execute error detection SM755 Scaling data check settings OFF Performs data check ON Not perform data check SM756 Module access completion wait control flag OFF Not wait the completion ON Waits the completion SM776 Local device setting at CALL OFF Disables local devices ON Enables local devices SM777 Local device setting in interrupt programs OFF Disables local devices ON Enables local devices SM816 Hold mode OFF Value not held ON Value held SM817 Hold mode OFF Value not held ON Value held SM1200 Auto logging setting file and registration status OFF Mismatch ON Matching SM1201 SD
247. ee teen teen ees 88 Setting parameters on the Module Configuration Diagram 0 0 eee 89 Multiple CPU configuration i lt 2iseus diced ebeeeved de gbastsseduwd dobead es eG oeew Pes 2554 ew name 90 Inputting start XY in batch 1 eee eee eens 92 Inputting default points in batch 2 0 ee eee teen een eens 92 Checking power supply capacity and I O points 2 0 cc ee ee eee eee 92 Checking system configurations 0 0 0 0 cc ee eee eee eee 92 Operation for Write to PLC Read from PLC 1 ee eee eee 92 4 2 Setting Parameters 0 cc eee 93 Common operations of parameter settingS 0 nnana naana ee ee eee eee 94 Setting system parameters 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee eee 95 Setting parameters of control CPU 1 1 eee eee ene eens 96 Setting parameters of I O module and Intelligent function module 2 0 0c ees 97 Parameter interaction with MELSOFT Navigator 0 0 0 eee ees 101 4 3 Other settings of Intelligent function module 0 0 cc ees 102 Seting by module t00l sc seisu once wade bins 5 om eS bade ten 6h ddh ee oben 56488 tee ee eadeas ees 102 Simple motion module setting tool 0 ee eee eee eee 103 4 4 Predefined Protocol Support Function 0 0 0 ccc ees 104 Starting and exiting predefined protocol support function 0 0 0 0 cee 104 4 5 CifCuit Trace FUNCION ace 44 00 hited estes thee Sa ewe ee eee et oe Oe a 105 CHAPTER 5 REGISTERING LABEL
248. eecueneea 4 enuagae ese ras eee ees eee pee eursaeaos aGae bees fees eee 12 PART 1 FUNDAMENTALS OF GX Works3 CHAPTER 1 BEFORE USING THIS PRODUCT 16 1 1 Main Functions of GX WorksS3 000 ccc ees 16 1 2 RnSFCPU Supported FUNCUUONS 2 2 223524020584 402000u dsedeewe Ges dd ete ewe bees eGeneesead 19 Display of safety data identification 0 1 naaa aaaea eee ees 20 1 3 Procedure from Project Creation to CPU Module Operation 0 0 21 1 4 Learning Operation Method of GX WorksS3 00 00 e eee es 24 DEAN RO 3 sat 4 ooo oe de ee he ee tS oe ER eee ee bee ee eee ee 24 Connecting to MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA Global Website 2 0 0 0 0 eee 24 Checking version of GX WorkS3 0 0 0c nn eee eee eee 24 1 5 Connection Configurations between Personal Computer and CPU Module 25 CHAPTER 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS 27 2 1 Starting and Exiting GX Works3 aassanannann naaraan bho ee Ee Roe eee ork ee eS 27 2 2 Switching Displayed Language ci civ twee ed cue bree eea se E AEE ee tame ee eden 27 2 3 Screen COMIGUIAUGN 6 ioo6 edt Cee EU ee risiini niria eee ee eee eae ea oe 28 WII Wane 2 5 o ah eeee 8s Bees amp 6 em ee Boe ee oe ee oe e ee eee etenae een eaten oo 6 a 28 Navigation WIMGOW 2 esseci sia eia bald eee Bio aang eel geo cease Bee ea een cee r ie Sten a aae ne wee 31 Element Selection Window 0 0c ee eee eee e eee eee eens 32 2 4 Memu LISI cco nc Cae nee e
249. ehicles Manned transportation Equipment for Recreation and Amusement and Safety devices handling of Nuclear or Hazardous Materials or Chemicals Mining and Drilling and or other applications where there is a significant risk of injury to the public or property Notwithstanding the above restrictions Mitsubishi may in its sole discretion authorize use of the PRODUCT in one or more of the Prohibited Applications provided that the usage of the PRODUCT is limited only for the specific applications agreed to by Mitsubishi and provided further that no special quality assurance or fail safe redundant or other safety features which exceed the general specifications of the PRODUCTs are required For details please contact the Mitsubishi representative in your region INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing the Mitsubishi FA software MELSOFT series This manual describes the programming and functions required when using GX Works3 Before using this product please read this manual carefully and develop familiarity with the functions and performance of GX Works3 to handle the product correctly CONTENTS SAREE PRECAUTIONS Ss erriren ikaran aes eee et boeuesoee sre iets cee E a 1 CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT 0 00600 ee 2 INTRODUCTION Seca e ete aes EEA mae ee eben eae eee ee ee ee epee ee eee set des eee seco 3 RELEVANT MANUALS eaaa id400264 00 s 500055 4065 a e ere eee eae heed Hbene tithe a 12 TERMS o2eeeueseoeeeee
250. elect two revisions The operation method of the verification result is the same as the Project Verify function For more details refer to the following section KL Page 78 Checking verification result 82 3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 3 6 Project Revision 3 Managing Profile Manage the registration status of profiles Profiles are the data in which the connected device information such as model names is stored The profiles are managed by each personal computer and shared within GX Works3 and MELSOFT Navigator Therefore profiles registered in GX Works3 are applied to MELSOFT Navigator Before registering deleting profiles log on the personal computer as the user having the administrator authority and close the project in advance Registration Register profiles in GX Works3 Operating procedure 1 Select Tool gt Profile Management gt Register 2 Select the file on the Register Profile screen and click the Register button Precautions Profiles are the compressed file Such as zip ipar and cspp Register profiles without decompressing files Deletion Delete the registered profiles Operating procedure 1 Select Tool gt Profile Management gt Delete 2 Select the module name to be deleted on the Profile Delete screen then click the Delete button 3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 3 7 Managing Profile 83 84 4 CREATING MODULE CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM AND SETTING PARAMETERS In GX Work
251. elligent function modules Select the module to be diagnosed from the module configuration of the System Monitor screen and double click one of the cells on the same column to display the Module Diagnostics screen Module Diagnostics CPU PLC No 1 Start VO No 3E00 Module Name Production information Supplementary Function Monitoring Ethernet diagnostics ROBCPU Stop Monitoring Error Information Module Information List No Occurrence Date status EYO Overview Error Jump 1 2015 05 31 19 21 50 291 2200 Parameter error Event History l Clear Error Detail 2 Legend A Major A Moderate AX Minor Detailed Information Parameter information Type of parameter System parameter Parameter drive Data memory The system parameter file and CPU parameter file do not exist The memory card parameter file or module extension parameter file stored in the memory card cannot be accessed because the memory card is disable by SM606 SD memory card forced disable instruction Corrective Action Write the system parameter file and CPU parameter file to the CPU module Turn off SM606 Cancel the disabled state Create File For Q series module is displayed in Occurrence Date Status and Overview Precautions Since the occurrence date depends on the time zone selected in Clock Related Setting f
252. ement screen How to use the Security key authentication function access prevention Procedure to enable security 1 Create a security key Page 297 Creating deleting security key 2 Register the security key in a program file 1 gt Page 299 Registering security key in program file 3 Save the project Page 69 Saving project A personal computer which does not have the same security key as the one registered in the project cannot be accessed Procedure to make locked program files accessible 1 Copy the same security key as the saved program file lt Page 298 Exporting security key 2 Register the security key in a personal computer from which a program file is to be accessed Page 298 Import 3 Open the program file 1 gt Page 63 Opening project A program file can be accessed when the security key between the program file and a personal computer is consistent The operations shown above are not required for the personal computer with which a security key is registered in a program file However the above operations are required when the security key is deleted 2 15 PROTECTING DATA 96 15 2 Preventing Illegal Access to Program Protected by Key Creating deleting security key Create delete security keys on the Security Key Management screen Window Project gt Security gt Security Key Management Creation Date Expiration Date Export Protection Targe Key Registration
253. emory card The program restored information parameters and device comments are displayed separately 24 13 WRITING READING DATA TO CPU MODULE 8 13 1 Writing Reading Programmable Controller Data MSafety project and safety operation mode of RnSFCPU The safety data and device memory of a safety project can only be written when the safety operation mode of RnSFCPU is in the test mode If the module is in the safety mode switch the mode to the test mode K Page 327 Switch Safety Operation Mode WData to be written and write target O Writable X Not writable System Parameter CPU Parameter oe x Module Extended Parameter CO O Memory Card Parameter a x Se Global Label Assignment x Information Label Initial Value File fe O x Device Memory File Register S x Device Initial Value E x 14 Not supported by FX5CPU 2 FX5CPU only supports common device comments and does not support each program device comments For the details on the availability of writing safety data refer to the following manual LA MELSEC iQ R CPU Module User s Manual Application WHow to check the data size to be written The data size to be written can be displayed on the Size Byte column by enabling the file size display Select View gt Display File Size on the Online Data Operation screen to enable the file size display Display of memory capacity The display content differs depending on the setting of file size d
254. emporarily Change Ladders gt Apply the Changes Restore the Changes 142 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 6 3 Creating Ladder Programs Considerations for editing the temporarily changed ladder block When the temporarily changed ladder block was edited with the contents listed in the following table the program may not be performed normally Description Statement Delete cut a statement Insert a ladder block between the TemporaryModify statement row and the temporarily changed ladder block which is the row setting a pointer Delete the TemporaryEnd statement row and NOPLF instruction Insert a ladder block a statement NOPLEF instruction between the TemporaryEnd statement row and NOPLF instruction Insert a statement before and after the TemporaryStart statement row JMP instruction Pointer Edit delete a JMP instruction or a pointer Ladder block Edit a disabled ladder block Delete a disabled temporarily changed ladder block Copy and past a disabled temporarily changed ladder block Searching for replacing data in program The search functions that can be used in ladder editor are as follows Function name Description Reference Simple search for instruction Searches a device label and moves the cursor on it Page 143 Simple search for instruction devices labels devices labels Jump Moves the cursor on a specified Step No Page 143 Jump Cross reference Checks devices label declaration locations and referenced lo
255. en specifying SO TRO for Find Device and select Entire Projects for the target SO TRO of all blocks are replaced Example when replacing TRO BLO TRO and BL1 TRO also are replaced 208 9 SEARCHING DATA 9 5 Batch Replacing of Devices and Labels 9 6 Displaying Reference Information List of Devices Labels Search for devices labels and display information where the selected devices label are used in the project in a list The Cross Reference window is displayed horizontally when it is docked on top or bottom of the main frame and displayed vertically when it is docked on left or right of the main frame Point The display format and detailed operations for each function can be set by the following option setting Tool gt Options gt Find Replace gt Cross Reference Target data for creating cross reference information Cross reference information is created based on devices used in the following data e Ladder e ST e FBD LD e SFC e Global label e Local label e Structure e Multiple CPU refresh setting of the CPU parameter e Refresh setting of module parameters 9 SEARCHING DATA 2 9 6 Displaying Reference Information List of Devices Labels 09 Creating displaying cross reference information Create and display the cross reference information of the devices labels used in the project Supported editors Ladder editor ST editor FBD LD editor SFC diagram editor label editor and parameter editor Win
256. er 2 Not Retlected 1 Only iQ R series GOT 2000 series is available for system label Ver 2 Total 1 To execute Online Program Change execute Online Program Change and save daai System Label Relation Displays the relation between the global label and the system label e Disclose The status in which the global labels are open as the system labels e Reference The status in which the system labels opened by other projects are imported in the global labels e Blank The status in which the global labels is not related to the system labels System Label Name Displays the system label name related to the global labels Attribute Displays the attribute of the system label which is related to the global labels 1 1 6 5 REGISTERING LABELS 5 4 Registering System Label Registering labels in system label database Disclose standard global labels created with GX Works3 as system labels When registering in the system label database at the first time create a workspace with MELSOFT Navigator and save projects of GX Works3 in the workspace in advance Operating procedure 1 Display the global label editor 2 Select the labels to be registered as system label and click the Reservation to Register System Label button 3 Click the Reflect to System Label Database button The Check before registering in system label data base screen is displayed 4 Check the list of labels to be registered and click the Register button
257. er Modt Extension Digital Input Module Extension Digital Output Modul GOT2000 Series i Host Station STAH O Maste Total STAR 3 GOT1000 Series Line Star RJVIENAI GT27 x MR J4 B AJ E CCIEF 010 lt ia r i Output x Point For CC Link IE Field Network connected devices are detected automatically and also the information can be reflected to the configuration settings using the Detect Now button on the CC IE Field Configuration window For details refer to the following manual iQ Sensor Solution Reference Manual 4 CREATING MODULE CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM AND SETTING PARAMETERS 97 4 2 Setting Parameters 98 m Property Depending on the selected module the image diagram can be changed on the Properties screen displayed by right clicking and selecting Property from the shortcut menu Configuration applications setting files and manuals can be linked to the modules Double click the added module to open the linked application or file resh devices assigned to modules Display the refresh devices assigned to each CC Link module in a list Set the CC Link configuration from the parameter of CC Link module in advance FX5CPU does not support it View gt Docking Window gt Device Reference zz List of slave stations Start I O No a ane Display Option Option Link Device List Display Detailed Information 3 RI61BT11 Local Station 1Occupie Single Setting 32 Points No Setti
258. er than RnSFCPU Program FB FUN Safety program Safety FB FUN A program to execute a safety control Standard program Standard FB FUN A program to execute a general control Label Safety global label Global labels that can be used only in safety programs Standard global label Global labels that can be used only in standard programs Standard safety shared global label Global labels that can be used in both safety programs and standard programs To use standard safety shared global labels in a safety program create the program so that the safety condition can be checked Usable devices labels and FB FUN Usable devices labels and FBs FUNs differ between a safety project and a standard project MUsable devices and labels Safety program Standard program For details on usable devices in each project refer to the following section K Page 337 Applicable Devices in GX Works3 MUsable FB FUN Safety program Safety operation mode of RnSFCPU MSafety operation mode There are two types of safety operation mode in RnSFCPU the safety mode and the test mode e Safety mode A mode used when running a system This mode prohibits operations which change the control of CPU module such as writing data to the CPU module changing current values operating CPU memory and setting security keys and file passwords e Test mode A mode used when starting the system or performing maintenance All of the functions can be u
259. ernet Board Network No Station No Protocol 24 12 SETTING ROUTE TO CPU MODULE 0 12 3 Accessing via Network Single Network 2 PLC side I F Ethernet Module PLC Type Network No Station No IP Address IP Input Format Station No lt gt IP Information Other Station Setting Other Station Single Network Check at Communication Time Retry Times 3 Network Communication Route Ethernet Access to other station in the Network No same loop or multi tier system Station No e When communicating with multiple GX Works3s use TCP IP or UDP IP communication e For a multiple network system setting the network dynamic routing is required MELSEC iQ R Ethernet User s Manual Application RJ71EN71 1 192 167 0 1 DEC Automatic Response System 30 seconds 0 time 2 3 12 4 Accessing via Network Co existence Network The following shows the setting example for accessing the CPU module via co existence network from a personal computer FX5CPU does not support it Built in Ethernet CPU 192 168 0 2 Ethernet port a 3 1 Ethernet 2 CC Link i 4 Network No 2 Network No 1 gt CC Link IE Field Network Station No 1 PC side I F Ethernet Board 2 PLC side I F PLC Module Connection via HUB a Other Station Setting Other Station Co existence 3 Network Communication Route CC IE Field e y 4 Co existence Network
260. ersion for one program file is completed Note that a large scale program file with multiple FBs FUNs requires a longer time to cancel the conversion When creating a sequence program with multiple instructions LD SM400 may be added in the beginning of the program in order to execute the program Operations that requires conversion for all programs All programs need to be converted when one of the following operations is performed e Change of system parameter Fixed Scan Communication Area Setting e Changing CPU parameters File Register Setting Device Label Memory Area Setting Index Register Setting Refresh Memory Setting Pointer Setting Program Setting FB FUN File Setting Refresh Setting At 145 Exe e Changing option settings Data Length of Character String Data Type in Label Editor Common Convert e Changing module type 184 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 6 9 Converting Programs Considerations after converting reassigning all programs When all programs are converted reassigned the label memory area is reassigned to all POUs If all the converted programs are written to the CPU module and RUN as they are the programs may be processed with the device values set before the program change After converting all programs initialize the labels by the following procedure 1 Switch the CPU module to STOP 2 Select Device Label Memory on the Memory Management screen displayed by selecting Online gt CPU Memory Oper
261. erties General Comment im fea Fruyrarri Fr Initial Ss ff Scan og fo ProgPou Module Name Data Name E amp Detail Title Untitled Project gt B o te o Parameter oO E HF System Parameter CPU Parameter o E B Module Parameter o E Memory Card Parameter fin Remote Password o D Global Label o Global Label Setting o er Program oO Detail Main o 74 3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 3 3 Creating Data 3 4 Changing Module Type of Project Change the module type of the project being edited to other module type When a revision has been registered in the project revision the revision will be succeeded after the change of module type FX5CPU does not support this function Window Project gt Change Module Type Change Module Type a Series fi RCPU iv LMircccccsceccssceccssseccssssceocsvssscnseseseesossscooseesscaseseseossosssoosoeseeee Module Type 2 ROS Z The project will become unconverted after changing module A type Devices or instructions might need to be modified to use after converting Operating procedure 1 Select the module type to be changed and click the OK button Compare the project after the change with the one before the change to confirm the changed contents with the Project Verify function 3 Edit each data according to the module type after a change Precautions e The chang
262. erting editing transitions inserting a transition Select a step transition jump then select Edit gt Insert gt Transition Changing a transition name Transition No e Using a shortcut key Transition names only can be changed Select a transition and press the key e On the Transition Properties screen Select a transition then select Edit gt Properties e From the menu Select a transition then select Edit gt Modify gt Name Device e Double click By double clicking a Transition No L Page 161 SFC element it can be changed By double clicking a transition name the Zoom is created displayed For a transition that a Zoom has been created the data name of Zoom will not be changed if the transition name was changed Modify the data name to match with the transition name on the Zoom List screen Page 172 Displaying a Zoom list Poin tr By entering a Transition No number to the edit box of which the transition name is to be changed the entered values are set as the transition name and the transition No Transition1 Creating a transition There are four ways of creation method for transitions Each transition has a different type The type can be checked on the Transition Properties screen Creation method Operating procedure Type Ina Zoom Create conditions with a KL Page 172 Creating displaying Zooms action transition Detailed expression program On an SFC Use TRUE FALSE
263. es Analog module User s manual of the module used setting Temperature input module Temperature control module Counter module 4 02 4 CREATING MODULE CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM AND SETTING PARAMETERS 4 3 Other settings of Intelligent function module Displaying module tool list The configuration functions can be performed on the Module Tool List screen Window Tool gt Module Tool List Module Tool List ax Start the selected module tool Module Series Selection iQ R Series z E Analog Input Offset gain setting E Analog Output Offset gain setting Create wave output data E Temperature Input Offset gain setting E Temperature Control Module Temperature trace E Pulse I O Positioning Preset Positioning monitor Positioning test Simple motion module setting tool Set parameters and positioning data of simple motion module using the simple motion module setting tool For details on the operation methods and setting items refer to the help of Simple Motion Module Setting Tool Operating procedure 1 Select Parameter gt Module Information on the Project view and select Project gt Data Operation gt Add New Module 2 Select the items on the Add New Module screen 3 Double click the added simple motion module setting Precautions The simple motion module settings are saved in the project of GX Works3 when saving the GX Works3 project 4 CREATING M
264. ess the Enter key 2 Enter notes following the displayed device instruction after entering for In PLC and for In Peripheral On the Statement Note Batch Edit screen 2 Enter a note 1 Select Edit gt Documentation gt Statement Note Batch Edit Fi Line Statement P Statement Statement Note None In PLC Statement Note Edit Move Fowl La dder In Peripheral Statement Note Type In PLC Insert Row In Peripheral Change Type Inse iow Add A ow Display 7 Display in Navigation Window Ce ae Delete Row Find Insert Row button Inserts a row above the line statement Add Row button Inserts a row below the line statement With the keyboard 2 Enter a note directly 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 6 3 Creating Ladder Programs 138 1 Select the cell of a note and press the Enter key Inserting deleting NOP instruction Insert or delete a NOP instruction to adjust Step No of a program The Step No changed by the NOP instruction is reflected to the ladder editor after converting the program Operating procedure Batch insertion 1 Select a cell to be insert 2 Select Edit gt NOP Batch Insert 3 Set the number of NOPs on the NOP Batch Insert screen and click the OK button Batch deletion 1 Select Edit gt NOP Batch Delete 2 Click the Yes button Copying pasting elements Cutting coping Select an instruction ra
265. et on the Properties screen of block MShow Hide View gt SFC Block List Comment Device label comment Comments for devices labels which were set to the block information on HShow Hide the Properties screen of block View gt Device Display Editing creating blocks on SFC block list To edit existing blocks and to create new blocks are applicable on an SFC block list Double click an editing target block When creating a new block select an empty row Copying blocks Select a block to be copied then select Edit gt Copy amp a Select a block to be pasted then select Edit gt Paste Select whether to change or overwrite its block No on the confirmation screen then click the OK button 1 2 3 4 Select an item to be pasted on the Contents to Paste screen then click the OK button Point Blocks copied on the Project view can be pasted on a block list Multiple blocks can be selected and copied when copying and pasting on the Project view If Step Transition Comment was selected on the Contents to Paste screen steps transition comments in the device comment are pasted after pasting all copied data Thereby steps transition comments may not be pasted when the Cancel button was clicked during processing even if data pasting has been already completed 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 1 6 6 Creating SFC Programs 73 Search Searching for block information Search for block info
266. etting of Selected Element gt Open in Front Open Label Setting of Selected Element gt Tile Horizontally gt Open Program Body of Selected Element gt Open in Front gt Open Program Body of Selected Element gt Tile Horizontally gt Open Label Setting gt Open in Front gt Open Label Setting gt Tile Horizontally gt Open Zoom Start Destination Block gt Open Start Source Block gt Control SFC Step gt Activate the Selected Step gt Control SFC Step gt Deactivate the Selected Step gt Control SFC Step gt Activate the Selected Step Only editor block gt Delete gt Jump gt Block Information Find Device gt SFC Block List Comment gt Device Display gt Open SFC Body gt Open Label Setting Page 171 Converting blocks Page 159 Configuration of SFC diagram editor Page 173 Displaying an SFC block list Page 172 Displaying a Zoom list Page 159 Configuration of SFC diagram editor Page 163 Creating a step that makes another block activated Page 273 Changing active status Page 174 Jump Page 174 Searching for block information Page 173 Displaying an SFC block list Page 174 Displaying SFC diagrams Page 174 Displaying local label editor editors global label local label task structure gt Delete gt Select All gt New Declaration Before gt New Declaration After gt Delete Row gt Imp
267. ewokNe CCLAKIE Cito on RCPU No 4 Relay station Module controlled by the RCPU No 1 T CC Link IE efafele Set the modules of the relay station to be controlled by Module controlled by the RCPU No 2 the same control CPU 2 Z CC Link IE Module controlled by the RCPU No 2 CC Link IE Network No 2 CC Link IE Controller Network s Access target station 7 gt 4 No Hem Item to be selected Internal setting Input value 1 PC side I F Serial USB USB 2 PLC side I F PLC Module PLC Mode RCPU Other Station Setting Other Station Single Network Check at Communication Time 30 seconds Retry Times 0 time 3 Network Communication Route CC IE Cont Network No 2 NET 10 H Station No 0 4 Target System Multiple CPU Setting Target PLC PLC No 4 246 12 SETTING ROUTE TO CPU MODULE 12 7 Accessing to Multiple CPU System 12 8 Considerations of Communication with CPU module This section explains the considerations of communication with the CPU module Refer to the considerations described in each section as well as the descriptions in this section Considerations of communication via multiple network systems When accessing RCPU via multiple network systems all the connected station and relay stations must be RCPU Connected station Station directly connected from GX Works3 Relay station Stations to be routed on network system Considerations of communication with the CPU module using a USB
268. execution type right click the program name of which execution type is to be set and select Register Program from the shortcut menu or drag and drop it on the Project view The execution type set on the Project view is applied to Program of the CPU parameter 122 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 6 2 Program execution order execution type settings 6 3 Creating Ladder Programs This section explains the method for creating a ladder program The details on the specification of ladder program are described in the following manual Please read it in advance LA MELSEC iQ R Programming Manual Program Design Poin tr The display format and detailed operations for each function can be set by the following option setting Tool gt Options gt Program Editor gt Ladder Editor Configuration of ladder editor Window Project view gt Program gt execution type gt program file gt program block gt Program 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 1 23 6 3 Creating Ladder Programs Toolbar pole Get sae Wein F5 sF5 F6 Sra im 2b R SG de Ladder editor Mode display area Line statement Line statement displayed in the tree P statement statement Wrapping symbol wrapping destination Step number DS PEF Ow SOO es Lee FE F J f een ee PEERAA meee See cel S aa ae ATE Ath HEE HLE dee E GE to Ot al FF Fe F3 sF9 cF9 cFIO SF SFG aF af saF5 saf6 sar safe aP5 caFS
269. f devices in a Zoom Page 273 Monitoring Zoom To check block information in a list Page 273 Monitoring SFC block list To check active status of all blocks in a list Page 274 Monitoring all SFC blocks in To check active status of steps in a specified block in a list batch active steps ring SFC Diagram Steps 3 512 Transitions 3 512 Actpns 3 4 Monitor of Zoom e i Ft Fit 1 FTF E BLz GibSz Gilb_BLz A BLOMS1 BL319451 BLO BL319 lLab EISFC element status display During monitoring the SFC element status is displayed as shown in the following figure Monitor status of FBD LD elements is same as the one of FBD LD editor Active OFF Ig alg 272 14 CHECKING OPERATION OF PROGRAMS 14 2 Check Execution Programs on Program Editor Monitoring Zoom Select View gt Open Zoom Start Destination Block then open the Zoom to monitor The methods for operating displaying a monitor of Zoom are same as the ones of each program editor Devices that can be monitored are same as the ones of each program editor except for SO SO can be monitored only ina Zoom The devices may not be monitored properly when a target block is switched by the BRSET instruction Changing active status Active status of blocks steps can be changed by the following methods during monitoring It can be used to check the operation when starting stopping only a particular block step Target Operati
270. fonts may be displayed as garbled characters Change the setting to another font if this happens 48 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS 2 6 Checking and Changing Colors and Fonts 2 Setting Comment Display Create multiple comments and select the comments to be displayed on each editor and each monitor screen on the Multiple Comments Display Setting screen Only five comment titles number from 1 to 5 can be set The comment number from 6 to 10 are used for entering comments of predefined language Do not use the comment number form 11 to 16 Reserved1 to Reserved6 Window View gt Multiple Comment Display Setting Epegeeeseeseesoseesoesosseeseesesossosoooeeeesseseseessesssseseesceseesossesoseesseseeseg A eceeceeceocecosce 2 oeoceoisoooccccesococecscococsocossoesoesoesesseodosooseitssseoos Available Comment Title Comment2 OE om o Target Select Enable Multiple Comments Display Select Available and enter a comment title Select the comment to be displayed on the program editor or each monitor screen in Target click the OK button Ron Enter comments in each row on the device comment editor 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS 4 2 7 Setting Comment Display 9 2 8 Setting Options Some functions and editors have an option setting function Changing option settings enables the change of a screen
271. function is performed without creating a new project a new project is created by data read from the CPU module and Intelligent function modules When a user information is registered to the project the user authentication is required Page 306 Logging on to CPU module Operating procedure 1 Start GX Works3 and select Online gt Read from PLC Select the series to be read on the Series Selection screen and click the OK button 3 Set the communication route to access the CPU module on the Specify Connection Destination screen and click the OK button 4 Perform the Read from PLC function on the Online Data Operation screen For the method for performing the Read from PLC function on the Online Data Operation screen refer to the following section KL Page 254 Reading data from programmable controller Precautions When parameters are not read from the programmable controller with data to create a new project default parameters will be set Check the parameter setting 3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 3 2 Creating Project File Opening project Read the project saved on the personal computer or another data storage device When a user information is registered to the project the user authentication is required Page 306 Logging on to CPU module Window Project gt Open m E Open X Lookin J GXW3 project 0 rpa I Name n Date modified Type Fy HE PROJECT 1 gx3 6 3 2014 11 37 P
272. g Empty Reading module configuration from actual system The Module Configuration Diagram can be configured by the information read from CPU module FX5CPU does not support it Operating procedure Select Online gt Read Module Configuration from PLC Precautions Module configuration can not be read to the extension base units where its number is incorrectly set 4 CREATING MODULE CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM AND SETTING PARAMETERS 4 1 Creating Module Configuration Diagram 87 Checking module information Check on a balloon help Place the cursor on the object such as module and symbol to display a balloon help on the Module Configuration Diagram Model Name ROSCPU Object Name ROSCPU Current Consumption 0 67A VO Points 16Points Check model names on module objects _ Operating procedure Select Edit gt Display Module Information 5 Normal display Module information display RY40NT5P 5 rd Z Q o S 5 ve ug Check on the Properties screen A model name object name and outline of a specification can be checked on the Properties screen Additionally a comment can be entered F Module Config Object Name Profile Comment Profile ver 00E 096 SVDC Current Consumption A 0 67 _ Operating procedure Select a module on the Module Configuration Diagram right click and select
273. g No 4 Same configuration as the setting No 1 SM1250 to SM1258 Data logging setting No 5 Same configuration as the setting No 1 SM1260 to SM1268 Data logging setting No 6 Same configuration as the setting No 1 SM1270 to SM1278 Data logging setting No 7 Same configuration as the setting No 1 SM1280 to SM1288 Data logging setting No 8 Same configuration as the setting No 1 SM1290 to SM1298 Data logging setting No 9 Same configuration as the setting No 1 SM1300 to SM1308 Data logging setting No 10 Same configuration as the setting No 1 SM1524 Initial processing successful completion state OFF The initial processing was completed successfully ON The initial processing was not completed successfully SM1525 Initial processing error completion state OFF The initial processing was completed with an error ON The initial processing was not completed with an error RnPCPU only supports it APPENDICES APPENDIX 4 Appendix 5 Using Simulation Function 3 7 List of special register For details on special registers refer to the following manual LA MELSEC iQ R CPU Module User s Manual Application SDO Latest self diagnostics error code Latest self diagnostics error code SD1 Clock time for self diagnosis error occurrence Clock time for self diagnosis error occurrence SD2 SD3 SD4 SD5 SD6 SD7 SD10 Self diagnostics error code Self diagnostics error code 1 SD11 Self diagnostics error code 2 SD12 Self diagnostics error code 3
274. g deleting changing name of Zoom is possible in a list Window e Open the target SFC diagram editor then select View gt Open Zoom List e Select Program gt execution type gt program file gt block on the Project view then right click and select Zoom List from the shortcut menu Zoom List 000 Block wes Select Zoom 1 l Open A a Action Action2 d Action Action3 l Delete Data a Transition Transitiond si Transition Transition1 Rename Close 1 72 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 6 6 Creating SFC Programs Displaying an SFC block list Display a data name of a block title conversion status and block information in a program file in a list For details on the block information refer to the following manual LA MELSEC iQ R Programming Manual Program Design e Open the target SFC diagram editor then select View gt Open SFC Block List e Select Program gt execution type gt program file on the Project view then right click and select Open SFC Block List from the shortcut menu Ww Ujste cs ce pH ae Start ime Mii aa of Active Steps at ee k Be e st Process Comment ES ee CT E Comment Second process M10 M11 i E e M10 Comment M11 Comment M12 Comment M13 Comment Labelcomment M14 Comment Comment M13 Comment Label comment Device label comment mW Comment Comments s
275. g on to PLC gt User Authentication gt Change the Password of PLC gt User Authentication gt Read User Data from PLC gt User Authentication gt Write User Data to PLC gt User Authentication gt Initialize all PLC Data gt Simulation gt Start Simulation gt Simulation gt Stop Simulation gt Simulation gt Simulation Environmental Setting gt Modify Value gt Change History of Current Value gt Memory Dump gt Setting gt Memory Dump gt Read Results gt Memory Dump gt Display Result gt Offline Monitor Page 27 Switching Displayed Language Page 49 Setting Comment Display Page 235 Specification of Connection Destination Page 248 Writing Reading Programmable Controller Data Page 257 Verifying Programmable Controller Data Page 326 CPU Module Remote Operation Page 329 Check Safety Data Identity Page 327 Switch Safety Operation Mode Page 330 Checking Memory Usage Page 248 Configuration of Online Data Operation screen Page 262 Reading Writing Deleting User Data Page 325 Setting Clock in CPU Module Page 126 Read mode Write mode Monitor read mode Monitor write mode Page 266 Starting stopping monitoring Page 266 Changing display format of word devices Page 275 Checking Device Buffer Memory in Batch Page 280 Checking Processing Time of Program Page 281 Checking Execution Counts of Interrupt Programs Page 274 Monitoring all SFC blocks
276. ge system labels is created in the workspace System labels cannot be used in a workspace without the system label database Since module labels are read only they cannot be registered as system label System label version There are two types of system labels for MELSOFT Navigator system label ver 1 and system label ver 2 FX5SCPU only supports system label ver 1 For more details on the differences between system label ver 1 and system label ver 2 and creation methods for each system label database refer to the Help of MELSOFT Navigator Configuration of label editor Window Project view gt Label gt Global Label gt global label EJ lt Filter gt Easy Display lt lt Display Setting Label Name Data Type Class Assign Device Label Initial alue a 1 labett sit VAR_GLOBAL 3 2 babe Bit ha RGB MB f 3 labes Be AR GLOBAL A v vs 1 r Extended Display Automatic L System label is reserved to be registered System label is reserved to be released The system label is already registered to the system label database To execute the Reservation to Register Release for the system abel reflection to the system label database is required cry O Reflect to lease execute Reflect to System Label Database Reservation to Release System Label System Label t is unnecessary to change reference side project when Database assigned device is changed in system label V
277. ged Label Area Capacity and Latch Label Area Capacity of the CPU parameters are set to 0 K Word Set the capacity in accordance with the label capacity of the project 64 3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 3 2 Creating Project File WData that is changed at changing module type Changed in accordance with the target module type e PLC Parameter Check the settings after the change e Network Parameter 2 4 e Intelligent function module QD75 Positioning module parameter e FB FUN Structured Ladder FBD program e SFC program Device comment for devices other than SM SD Returns to default e Options other than Device Comment Reference Reflection Target Set with GX Works3 Data are deleted e System label Device comments of SM SD e Connection destination e Remote password Deleted e PLC Parameter Communication Head Setting Not supported by GX Works3 a 2 3 4 3 6 Positioning e Redundant Parameters Network Parameter MELSECNET 10 and MELSECNET H setting MELSECNET H Remote O setting e Programs of user library that are not registered to the program setting e Task settings e Device Label Automatic Assign Setting e Project Revision e Device memory Only when the module type is changed to FXSUCPU Check set with GX Works3 after the change since some items are returned to the default or their data are deleted The data are deleted when the module type is ch
278. gement gt Security gt Change User Password gt Security gt Security Key Setting gt Security gt Security Key Management gt Security gt Block Password Setting gt Security gt File Password Setting gt Printer Setup gt Page Setup gt Print Preview gt Print gt Recent Projects gt recently used project 1 to 10 gt Start GX Works2 gt Exit GX Works3 Page 61 Creating project Page 63 Opening project Page 69 Overwriting projects Page 69 Saving projects under the specified name Page 70 Deleting project Page 77 Verifying Projects Page 80 Registering revision information Page 81 Displaying revision list Page 75 Changing Module Type of Project Page 72 Creating projects Page 32 Creating folders Page 73 Changing a data name Page 73 Deleting data Page 73 Copying pasting data Page 97 Setting parameters of I O module and Intelligent function module Page 103 Simple motion module setting tool Page 74 Property Page 99 Checking changing the number of Intelligent function module parameters Page 64 Opening GX Works2 format project Page 220 Creating a library in GX Works3 format from a library in GX Works2 format Page 221 Editing library Page 220 Creating library file Page 221 Registering library to be referenced Page 222 Deleting library updating display information Page 305 User management Page 304 Changing password of logon user Page 299 Re
279. ging the label values of a module FB check the influence of the change using the Cross Reference function Editing module FB The local label and program of a module FB cannot be edited However a module FB can be copied in the Project view and it can be edited The name of copied module FB is changed from to _ 21 6 10 SEGMENTING PROGRAMS 10 1 Creating Function Blocks 10 2 Creating Functions This section explains how to create a sequence program using functions Functions For details of the functions refer to the following manuals LA LA MELSEC iQ R Programming Manual Program Design MELSEC iQ F FX5 Programming Manual Program Design Procedure to use 1 2 3 4 Create a data of function Page 217 Creating function data Set the local labels to be used in the FUN program Page 217 Setting labels Create a FUN program using labels Page 218 Creating function programs Paste the function onto a sequence program K Page 133 Inserting functions Page 148 Inserting functions Creating functions The following explains how to create functions E Number of function blocks that can be created RCPU other than RO4CPU Up to 8192 in conjunction with function block data RO4CPU Up to 4096 in conjunction with function block data FX5SCPU Up to 960 in conjunction with function block data However the maximum number of data that can be created may not be reached depending on the configurati
280. gistering security key in program file Page 301 Writing deleting security key to from CPU module Page 297 Creating deleting security key Page 293 Setting block password Page 309 Setting file password Page 51 Printing Data Page 27 Exit 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS 2 4 Menu List 35 36 gt Undo gt Redo gt Cut gt Copy gt Paste gt Cross Reference gt Device List gt Find Device Labell gt Find Instruction gt Find Contact or Coil gt Find String gt Replace Device Label gt Replace Instruction gt Replace String gt Change Open Close Contact gt Device Batch Replace gt Register to Device Batch Replace gt Convert gt Online Program Change gt Rebuild All gt Program File Setting gt Setting gt Toolbar gt Standard gt Toolbar gt Program Common gt Toolbar gt Docking Window gt Toolbar gt Monitor Status gt Statusbar gt Color and Font gt Docking Window gt Navigation gt Docking Window gt Element Selection gt Docking Window gt Output gt Docking Window gt Progress gt Docking Window gt Find Replace gt Docking Window gt Find Results gt Docking Window gt Cross Reference 1 to 2 gt Docking Window gt Device List gt Docking Window gt Device Reference gt Docking Window gt Input the Configur
281. gisters differ depending on the settings of the CPU parameters Refer to the considerations in the following section KL Page 268 Considerations when monitoring file registers Specifying reference target of program Specify the monitoring target program when monitoring the setting values of timer devices and counter devices or local devices Operating procedure 1 Click the Detailed Conditions and click in Program Reference on the Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor Screen 2 Set the items on the Program Reference screen and click the OK button 276 14 CHECKING OPERATION OF PROGRAMS 14 3 Checking Device Buffer Memory in Batch 14 4 Checking Current Values by Registering Devices Labels Check the current values by registering devices and labels using the Watch function Register the target devices labels on the Watch window Multiple devices labels can be registered in batch by specifying a range Once devices labels are registered and the project is saved the registered devices labels are displayed in registered status when the project is opened again Window View gt Docking Window gt Watch 1 to Watch 4 E Watch 1 Watching J Right click Name Current Value Display Format Data Type Comment x10 FALSE BIN Bit X Name amp DO 12 Decimal Word Signed v Current Value label TRUE BIN Bit Display Format Data Type Class Assign Device Label Comment
282. gt execution type gt program file gt program block gt Local Label Toolbar Se FERRO Label editor global editor E Easy Display lt lt Display Setting Label Name Data Type Class Assign Device Label Initial Value a 1 Label Bit _ VAR_GLOBAL 7 2 Label2 Double Word Unsigned Bit String 32 bit VAR GLOBAL Aoo i Ee a Label Word Unsigned Bit String 16 bit VaR GLOBAL E 4 Label4 CTO a VAR GLOBAL Sa Se 5 Label5 STRUCT 1 0 1 _ AR_GLOBAL v Detailed Setting bd 4 TT r Extended Display Automatic a LabelS STRUCT1 0 1 i M Label Name Data Type Word bit device can be set at the start of structure array Word Device Setting Bit Device Setting Use word device in bit type label of structure by bit specify Start Word Device Start Bit Device Word Device Offset N sd Bit Device Offset M Word Device Use Amount of i Bit Device Use Amount of 1 1 Offset Value which Makes No Repetition of Device 2 Offset Value which Makes No Repetition of Device C System label is reserved to be registered _ System label is reserved to be released The system label is already registered to the system label database To execute the Reservation to Register Release for the system Reservation to Register System Label label reflection to the system label database is required cry gG Reflect to Please execute Reflect to Sy
283. gt Check the changes of System Label Database 2 Check the information on the Import Change Contents of System Label Database screen 3 Click the Import button 1 1 8 5 REGISTERING LABELS 5 4 Registering System Label PROGRAMMING This part explains the functions of the editor to edit a sequence program and the settings of device memory device initial values 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 7 SETTING DEVICE MEMORY 8 SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES 9 SEARCHING DATA 10 SEGMENTING PROGRAMS 119 6 CREATING PROGRAMS This chapter explains how to create a program 6 1 Programming Functions Features and types of programming language The programming languages supported by GX Works3 are as follows Program Description Creation method of Language language program specification Ladder Ladder Diagram A graphic language using ladder programs composed of Page 123 Creating Ladder MELSEC iQ R contacts and coils Programs Programming Manual The inline structured text functions to edit ST programs on Program Design the ladder editor can be used ST Structured Text Control syntax such as selection branch by conditional Page 145 Creating ST syntax or repetitions by iterative syntax can be controlled Programs as in the high level language such as C language By using these syntax concise programs can be written FBD LD Function Block A graphic language for creating a control program only by Page 151 Creating FBD Diagram
284. gt Open in Front gt Open Program Body of Selected Element gt Title Horizontally gt Open Label Setting gt Open in Front gt Open Label Setting gt Title Horizontally Open Zoom Source Block 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS 2 4 Menu List Page 155 Common operations of elements Page 156 Inserting a row Page 156 Deleting a row Page 156 Inserting deleting a column Page 154 Inserting from the menu toolbar Page 155 Replacing function elements function block elements Page 156 Updating undefined FBs FUNs Page 155 Adding deleting arguments Page 154 Switching methods for contacts instructions Page 151 Configuration of FBD LD editor Page 172 Creating displaying Zooms action transition Applicable menus for SFC editor SFC diagram Edit gt Delete gt Select Network gt Modify gt Name gt Modify gt Direct Expression for Transition gt Modify gt Qualifier gt Modify gt End Step Jump gt Modify gt Step Attribute gt Modify gt No Step Attribute gt Modify gt SC Coil HOLD Step gt Modify gt SE Operation HOLD Step without Transition Check gt Modify gt ST Operation HOLD Step with Transition Check gt Modify gt R Reset Step gt Modify gt BC Block Start Step with END Check gt Modify gt BS Block Start Step without END Check gt Modify gt Step Attribute Target gt M
285. gures e Pages that users often browse can be bookmarked TERMS Unless otherwise specified this manual uses the following terms Term Built in Ethernet CPU Control CPU Direct connection Execution program FB instance FX5CPU GX Configurator GX Developer GX Works2 GX Works3 Intelligent function module MELSOFT Library MELSOFT Navigator Member Personal computer RCPU RnCPU RnENCPU RnPCPU RnSFCPU Slave station Universal model High speed Type QCPU Universal model QCPU Windows 7 Windows 7 or later Description A generic term for a CPU that has an Ethernet port A CPU module that controls connected I O modules and Intelligent function modules In a multiple CPU system a CPU module by which a module is controlled can be set for each module A connection using a USB serial Ethernet port of a CPU module A converted program that can be executed on a CPU module A function block pasted on a sequence program A generic term for FXSUCPU and FXSUCCPU A generic product name for GX Configurator AD DA SC CT TC TI FL PT AS QP A generic product name for SWnD5C GPPW SWnD5C GPPW A SWnD5C GPPW V and SWnD5C GPPW VA n indicates version A generic product name for SWnDNC GXW2 n indicates version A generic product name for SWnDND GXWS3 n indicates version A generic term for modules which has functions other than input and output such as A D converter module and D A converter module A ge
286. hange the data name and press the Ente key Copying pasting data Utilize the data of project being edited or other projects The elements can be pasted only to the place where is able to create a same type of data If the module type is different between the copy source and the copy destination the data can not be pasted Operating procedure Select the data of the copy source on the Project view Select Project gt Data Operation gt Copy Data 4 right click and select Copy Data from the shortcut menu G N Select the target folder one level upper hierarchy of the copy source data on the Project view or other project 4 Select Project gt Data Operation gt Paste Data right click and select Paste Data 4 from the shortcut menu If the same data name exists in the folder where the data is to be pasted the pasted data is named automatically Point If the module type is different between the copy source and the copy destination it can be utilized by opening each editor and copy the corresponding data Precautions e The pasted program will be in the unconverted state e The structures function blocks used in the global label cannot be copied If the same structure function block name does not exist in the folder where the data is to be pasted the pasted data will be an undefined data type e Pasting of global label data is canceled when the maximum number of labels 20480 is exceeded Adjust
287. he Simulation function of RnCPU R04CPU RO8CPU Page 226 SIMULATING R16CPU R32CPU and R120CPU is supported PROGRAM Opening GX Works2 format e The PLC file setting and the PLC RAS setting of PLC parameter Page 64 Opening GX Works2 projects are succeeded format project e Structured Ladder FBD programs are succeeded Interaction with iQ Works A system label change notification can be received Page 118 Importing the changes automatically of system label database Module tool list e Analog input Offset gain setting under Analog Adapter for Page 102 Other settings of FX5 Series is supported Intelligent function module e Analog output Offset gain setting under Analog Adapter for FX5 Series is supported Automatic detection of CC Link e The connected devices on the CC Link IE Field Network can be IE Field Network connected detected automatically devices 332 APPENDICES APPENDIX Appendix 1 Functions Added to Changed from Previous Version Supported Added changed contents Reference version Version 1 010L Project Revision e Project Revision function is supported Page 80 Project Revision e User library is supported Page 219 Enhancing Use of User Library e Q series MELSECNET H network module is supported e MELSECNET Diagnostics is supported Page 320 MELSECNET diagnostics Opening GX Works2 format e The Built in Ethernet Port Setting of PLC parameter is Page 64 Opening GX Works2 projects succeed
288. hecking Memory Usage and write the project to the CPU module e To set Permanent PLC Lock to both of Read Protection and Write Protection configure the both settings at the time of the first registration If only one of them was registered the other cannot be registered later How to use file password Procedure to enable security 1 Setthe Specify Connection Destination to access to the CPU module L Page 235 Specification of Connection Destination 2 Seta file password to the file in the CPU module Page 309 Setting file password If the project in which the file password is set is closed the file cannot be read and write when GX Works3 is started up next time Procedure to make locked files readable writable 1 Setthe Specify Connection Destination to access to the CPU module L Page 235 Specification of Connection Destination 2 Authenticate the file password which has been set to the file in the CPU module Page 309 Setting file password The file can be write and read while the project is open The files can also be read written when entering a correct password in the File Password Setting screen displayed when accessing a file 15 PROTECTING DATA 308 15 6 Preventing Illegal Data Reading Writing Setting file password When registering a file password connect a personal computer and CPU module in advance Register Change Authentication or Delete can be set on the setting screen of file pa
289. hen replacing the CPU module the security key can be succeeded to the replaced CPU module only by replacing the extension SRAM cassette Therefore writing the security key again from the personal computer in which the security key is registered is unnecessary HFor multiple CPU system configuration When setting a security key for multiple CPU system configuration write the security key to each CPU module In addition when using the same security key as CPU No 1 in CPU No 2 to CPU No 4 write the same security key as CPU No 1 to each CPU module 15 PROTECTING DATA 1 15 3 Preventing Illegal Program Execution 30 Deleting security keys The security key written in the CPU module can be deleted on the personal computer in which the security key is not registered However the program of which security key is registered in the CPU module exists the security key cannot be deleted Operating procedure Select the security key to be deleted from the CPU tab then click the Delete button 2 15 PROTECTING DATA 30 15 3 Preventing Illegal Program Execution 15 4 Preventing Illegal Access to Project To prevent an illegal access to a safety project from the users with no authority use the User Authentication function Only RnSFCPU supports the User Authentication function User Authentication function The operations can be restricted by registering a user password in a project and a CPU module The following operations can be restricted
290. iagram of GX Works3 can be configured within the range that can be managed by the CPU module of a project Editor configuration of Module Configuration Diagram Point f Display settings can be changed by setting the following option Tool gt Options gt Other Editor gt Module Configuration Diagram Double click Module Configuration on the Project view Toolbar 5i O0OH Module Configuration Diagram a Module Confic 1 gt Element Selection i x Find POU CPU module amp sz Go X ar E Main Base Extension Base RQ Extension Base Motion Controller CPU Power Supply QX28 POW At i Nivaria General base mount module OU L Favor History Med 0 2 3 4 6 5 fi Network Type Ethernet IP Address 192 168 3 39 4 CREATING MODULE CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM AND SETTING PARAMETERS 4 1 Creating Module Configuration Diagram 85 86 Displayed items Screen name Wem Description Module An object of MELSEC iQ R series module supported by GX Works3 Gonnguratian An object of MELSEC iQ F FX5 series module supported by GX Works3 maam An object of Q series module supported by GX Works3 General module An object of module for which the start XY and point can be set arbitrarily by each module type The same points as empty slot points can be assigned as an initial value Select this when using a module which is not displayed in the Element Selection window Figure Straight L
291. ifAdd1 BasicUnitParam InputWiringSelection Wiring selection of input XD 0 Not used 19 CommifAdd1 BasicUnitParam InputWiringSelection Wiring selection of input XE 0 Not used 20 CommifAdd1 BasicUnitParam InputWiringSelection Wiring selection of input XF 0 Not used There is no option in the selected process 21 CommlfAdd1 BasicUnitParam InputWiringSelection Wiring selection of input X10 0 Not used 22 CommifAdd1 BasicUnitParam InputWiringSelection Wiring selection of input X11 0 Not used v I4 4 gt H NZ2GFS52 32D ParamInfo 4 4 M ia The refreshed device values of remote I O or remote registers may be overwritten Ready Ee 400 y OE The figure above is a screen example in which Excel is used CSV files can also be checked by using other text editors Switching the safety operation mode Window Online gt Safety PLC Operation gt Switch Safety Operation Mode 328 Test Mode Close Current Operation Mode Switch Point The safety operation mode of a running RnSFCPU can be checked in the Module Information List tab on the Module Diagnostics screen 18 CHECKING CHANGING CPU MODULE OPERATION 18 3 Operations of RnSFCPU Check Safety Data Identity Check whether the programs to be used in the safety mode and the project written to the CPU module are consistent Window Online gt Safety PLC Operation gt Check Safety Data Identity Ch
292. ified comments can also be pasted regardless of the setting of display hidden by selecting Edit gt Paste the Range Including Hidden Bit Specification Information Creating multiple comments and setting display target For details refer to the following section K Page 49 Setting Comment Display Detecting devices with empty cell When comments are set in the multiple rows detect the devices with empty cells Operating procedure mDetect comments from device data being displayed on the device comment editor Select Display Only the Mismatched Comment in the filter condition on the device comment editor Detect comments from all device data in the device comment data Select Edit gt Detect the Mismatched Comment Double click NG on the displayed Detect the Matched Comment of All Devices screen to edit the device comment editor 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 1 6 7 Registering Device Comments 79 Deleting unused device comments Delete unused comments in a program in a batch To delete the comments open the device comment editor Operating procedure Select Edit gt Delete Unused Device Comment Deletion targets Device comment type Deletion target Common device comment Unused device comments in all programs Each program device comment Unused device comments in the corresponding program Device comments in all programs The comments specified to bit specified word device are not deleted Clearing all device comments
293. igned H D number of points assigned L D number of points assigned H W number of points assigned L W number of points assigned H SW number of points assigned L SW number of points assigned H T number of points assigned L T number of points assigned H ST number of points assigned L ST number of points assigned H C number of points assigned L C number of points assigned H LT number of points assigned L LT number of points assigned H LST number of points assigned L LST number of points assigned H LC number of points assigned L LC number of points assigned H Z number of points assigned LZ number of points assigned ZR number of points assigned L ZR number of points assigned H RD number of points assigned L RD number of points assigned H File register block number Number of counts in 1 second units Unit setting for 2n second clock Unit setting for 2n ms clock Number of counts in each scan Execution type of the program being executed Initial scan time unit ms Initial scan time unit us Current scan time unit ms Current scan time unit us APPENDICES APPENDIX Appendix 5 Using Simulation Function 349 350 No SD522 SD523 SD524 SD525 SD526 SD527 SD528 SD529 SD530 SD531 SD600 SD604 SD606 SD607 SD610 SD611 SD614 SD616 SD617 SD618 SD619 SD620 SD622 SD623 SD626 SD629 SD633 SD757 SD758 SD771 SD816 SD817 SD818 SD819 SD820 SD1
294. igner3 to GOT such as downloading project data when online operations are being performed from GX Works3 to the CPU module using the GOT transparent function When GOT does not monitor normally The GOT transparent function cannot be used in the following cases e When GOT does not monitor normally due to CPU module errors or communication errors between the CPU module and GOT e During the period of time between turning ON or resetting the CPU module or GOT and the start of GOT monitoring Check the following items if GOT does not monitor normally Item Reference Does the CPU module operates normally KL Page 314 Diagnosing CPU Module Is the CPU module connected to GOT normally Manual of GOT used Accessing via GOT The following shows the setting for accessing the CPU module via GOT Personal computer GX Works3 CPU module The availability of connection differs depending on the GOT series and the connection condition between the personal computer and GOT For details refer to the following manuals LA GOT2000 Series Connection Manual Mitsubishi Products For GT Works3 Version LA GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Mitsubishi Products for GT Works3 Accessing via module The following shows the setting of GX Works3 for accessing the CPU module via GOT and serial communication module FX5CPU does not support it PersonalcormpuEr CA Werkas Serial communication module The availability of connection differs
295. ile is written the Memory Dump function is started and waits for a trigger If the memory dump setting file has already been stored the Memory Dump function is started by powering ON the CPU module Window Debug gt Memory Dump gt Setting a Memory Dump Setting Read Results SA Display Status ij Transfer Setup Setting Read Results Saved File h Saved File Name Trigger Conditions 2 Conditions Device HE Device Name Error Code x Error Code 1 x Error Code 2 x Error Code 3 x Error Code 4 EBError Code 5 E Error Code 6 x Error Code 7 x Error Code 8 E Error Code 9 E Error Code 10 l Set file name and trigger conditions Set the save file name of memory dump MEMDUMP Set the trigger conditions to collect memo Device Set the device name of trigger conditions mo Set the error code of trigger condition Tite evevcsesevessseesed Operating procedure Set the items and click the Write button Item Saved File Trigger Conditions Device Error Code Point Description Set a name of a file to be output when the Memory Dump function is performed A number 00 to 99 is added to the end of the set name for the file name to be output actually Specify the trigger conditions to collect memory dump e Device Specify this to set the timing when the bit data of a specified device turns OFF O
296. in the project Ex When selecting a module from the CC Link IE Control Diagnostics screen and activating the System Monitor function and activating the Module Diagnostics screen from the activated System Monitor screen WEvent history K Page 322 Checking Error History Operation History Clearing errors After the errors displayed on the Module Diagnostics screen are cleared click the Clear Error button to clear the error status of the module The LED that indicates error status on the front of the module turns OFF The error content are also deleted from the list of the error information Module information list The current LED information and switch information of the target module are displayed in the Module Information List tab 16 DIAGNOSING MODULE 1 16 2 Diagnosing CPU Module 3 5 16 3 Diagnosing Network This section explains how to diagnose networks Ethernet diagnostics Check the status of each connection status of each protocol and connection status For details refer to the following manuals MELSEC iQ R Ethernet User s Manual Application MELSEC iQ F FX5 User s Manual Ethernet Communication Window Diagnostics gt Ethernet Diagnostics iit ia u J Module No Board No 1 Porti v I O Address 0000 CPUM PLCNo 1 DEC HEX DEC HEX Status of Each Connection status of Each Protocol Connection Status Host Station Communication Destn
297. indow gt Element Selection Find POU amp i aN Ly Ly x P x alr i All x Display Target SEQUENCE INSTRUCTIONS Kontecth leks tele Trailing peer pulse series connection w ANDFI 1 Pulse NOT series connection 4 ANDP 1 Leading edge pulse series connection EN ANDPI 1 Pulse NOT series connection EN ANI 1 b contact series connection Ag LD 1 a contact operation start EN LDF 1 Trailing edge pulse operation EN LDFI 1 Pulse NOT operation start K LDI 1 b contact operation start EN LDP 1 Leading edge pulse operation start EN LDPI 1 Pulse NOT operation start EN OR 1 a contact single parallel connection x ORF 1 Trailing edge pulse serial connection lt 4 ORFI 1 Pulse NOT parallel connection EN ORI 1 b contact single parallel connection 4 ORP 1 Leading edge pulse parallel connection AND 1 AND is the A contact series connection instruction It read the ON OFF data of the designated bit device perform an AND operation on that data and the operation result to that point and take this value as the operation result t Favorites History Module Library e The focus is moved to the element of which character string match with the entered character string element name or keyword included in the element description to the toolbar e The elements which are included in the selected category is displayed from the display target 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS 2 3 Screen Configurat
298. ine Rectangle An object that is used when adding information such as description on the Module Configuration Ellipse Text Box Diagram Connection line An object of a bus cable to be connected to a base unit Connection point A point to be connected with a connection line The connection point located at the upper right on the module is used when importing a project using MELSOFT Navigator It is not used in GX Works3 Module status setting empty A module to be used when operating system by placing modules on the Module Configuration Diagram without mounting actual modules The module placed on the Module Configuration Diagram and its related parameters will also be set as Empty Reserved status Object placement error The module object which is not placed properly is highlighted Element Selection window A list of objects which can be used on the Module Configuration Diagram Input the Configuration Detailed Information window A window to enter the information such as start XY or station number of the module placed on the Module Configuration Diagram Placing objects Placing module objects Operating procedure 1 Select a main base from the Element Selection window and drag and drop it onto the Module Configuration Diagram 2 Select a module from the Element Selection window and drag and drop it on the base unit placed on the Module Configuration Diagram in the Step 1 The available locations are highlighted while
299. ing labels displayed on a ladder editor are available A device with any of the following conditions is not displayed e A device that is assigned by converting the program e When a label is used for array elements e When using a structure label An alternative name for a label Editing and searching replacing can be performed for the labels displayed on the ladder editor An entity of a function block used in a ladder program A comment set to a device label A comment that is appended to a ladder block A line statement that is displayed in the tree of the Project view A comment that is appended to a pointer number A comment that is appended to an interrupt pointer number A comment that is appended to a coil application instruction in the program An area that can edit ST programs on the ladder editor A value or label name device name to be operated A symbol that indicates the status collapse expand of a ladder block The rest of a device label name is omitted by ellipses in order for the name to be fit in one cell A long device label name is wrapped to be fit in one cell If the label name still cannot be displayed in one cell the rest of the name is omitted by ellipsis The power rails of a ladder program The information on device label where the mouse cursor is placed over is displayed The maximum number of cells which are occupied with contacts coils and instructions
300. ing procedure 1 Select the token of which syntax is to be displayed 2 Select Edit gt Display Template 3 Enter the arguments in accordance with the displayed template Delete the data type name enclosed with and enter a label name or device corresponding to its data type Poin tr to select an argument of the template one by one 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 6 4 Creating ST Programs Select Edit gt Mark Template Left 4 Mark Template Right F or press the ctl at e E keys 149 Searching for replacing data in program The search functions that can be used in ST editor are as follows Jump Specifies a line number on an ST editor and move to the corresponding line Page 150 Jump Cross reference Checks devices label declaration locations and referenced locations in a list Page 200 SEARCHING DATA Device list Checks the usage of devices being used Search and replace e Searches for and replaces a device name 1 label name instruction name and character strings e Changes open close contact e Replaces devices in a batch 1 Search with a device name except for the device suffix part Specify a line number and move the cursor on a ST editor 1 Select Find Replace gt Jump 2 Enter a line number of the program on the Jump screen and click the OK button Displaying instruction help Check the instructions used in an ST program on e Manual Viewer To check the
301. inserted intoa Page 264 Writing Reading Data memory card personal computer to from Memory Card Module tool list e Temperature control modules R60TCTRT2TT2 Page 102 Other settings of R60TCTRT2TT2BW R60TCRT4 R60ORCRT4BW are Intelligent function module Changing ladder block e Ladder block can be changed temporarily Page 141 Changing ladder temporarily blocks temporarily supported To use this function it is required that MELSOFT Navigator supports the function For information on the version of the supported MELSOFT Navigator refer to the Help of MELSOFT Navigator To use this function it is required that CPU module supports the function For information on the firmware version of the supported CPU modules refer to the following manual A MELSEC iQ R CPU Module User s Manual Application To use this function it is required that the module supports the function For information on the firmware version of the supported module refer to the manual for respective modules APPENDICES APPENDIX 333 Appendix 1 Functions Added to Changed from Previous Version Appendix 2 Unusable Character String Reserved Word Character strings used for application function names common instruction names special instruction names instructions and so on are referred to as the reserved words Reserved words may not be used for names When the character strings defined as reserved words is used for names an error occurs when perfor
302. instructions the files of the corresponding programming manual requires to be registered to e Manual Viewer The applicability of help display is shown below Operator x Control syntax x FB x Function O Constant variable comment x 1 Place the cursor on the token of the target instruction 2 Press the key 150 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 6 4 Creating ST Programs 6 5 Creating FBD LD Programs This section explains how to create an FBD LD program The details on the specification of FBD LD program are described in the following manual Please read it in advance LA MELSEC iQ R Programming Manual Program Design The display format and detailed operations for each function can be set by the following option setting Tool gt Options gt Program Editor gt FBD LD Editor Configuration of FBD LD editor FBD LD editor is a graphical language editor to create programs by combining Function Block Diagram language with Ladder Diagram language Programs can be created only by placing the prepared elements vertically and horizontally and connecting them Window Project view gt Program gt execution type gt program file gt program block gt worksheet Toolbar Ae te YE Ye ie Oe ee ae ee ot anaml GS FBD LD editor Comment Module READY UNITOO1READY LD element oo O FBD element SMm402 Connection point 4 5 ea Connector Network L
303. ion Pasting elements mPasting elements in a program When the program editor is activated the elements which can be pasted are displayed in the Element Selection window The elements can be pasted in the program editor by dragging and dropping from the list to a program Point For ST editor select an element and press the Enter key to paste the element at the cursor position WEPasting objects in Module Configuration Diagram When the Module Configuration Diagram is activated the module parts objects which can be pasted are displayed in the Element Selection window The objects can be pasted by dragging and dropping from the list to the Module Configuration Diagram Favorites The frequently used elements SFC elements devices labels instructions FB instances functions can be registered in the Favorites tab by classification Create a folder to be classified by clicking 1 on the toolbar and drag and drop it to move or change the name O perating procedure WAdding from element list Instructions functions and function blocks can be added to Favorites 1 Select an element to be added from the list of the Element Selection window and click on the toolbar 2 Select the registration destination on the Register to Favorites screen and click the OK button Adding from the Project view Functions and function blocks can be added to Favorites 1 Select an element to be added on the Project view and drag
304. ion Mode screen is displayed by clicking the icon Test mode For details refer to the following section KL Page 327 Switch Safety Operation Mode wa Displays the current value maximum value and minimum value of the scan time by switching them from the pull down list When monitoring multiple FB programs select the target FB instance to be monitored Ladder editors are switched to monitor mode during monitoring KL Page 123 Configuration of ladder editor 14 CHECKING OPERATION OF PROGRAMS 2 14 1 Monitor Status 67 14 2 Check Execution Programs on Program Editor Use the monitoring function to check the following execution programs on each program editor e Ladder program e ST program e FBD LD program e SFC program Open a program editor to be monitored in advance Poin tr The display format and detailed operations for each function can be set by the following option setting Tool gt Options gt Monitor Considerations when monitoring file registers When monitoring file registers while Use File Register of Each Program is selected in File Setting of the CPU Parameter the monitor operation will differ depending on the setting of Device Label Access Service Processing Setting Therefore add the programs to transfer the file registers to be monitored to the devices before monitoring the transferred programs Note that the number of steps and scan time will be lengthened for the added programs If the file regis
305. isplay Disabled The current memory capacity of the write target is displayed Enabled The memory capacity to which the data size to be written deleted has been reflected is displayed 13 WRITING READING DATA TO CPU MODULE 249 13 1 Writing Reading Programmable Controller Data Writing data to programmable controller Write data to a CPU module For the considerations for writing refer to the following section KL Page 256 Considerations for Online data operation _ Operating procedure select the Write tab on the Online Data Operation screen Select a file to be written and a write target Click the Detail button to set the details such as a range to be written NWN Click the Execute button After writing a safety program or a parameter to an RNSFCPU manuals are displayed to clarify the information that requires to be confirmed by users for using a safety project safely Point When more than one program is written to the CPU module the programs categorized as No Execution Type will never be executed on the CPU module For saving the memory capacity of the CPU module removing them from the target data at writing data is recommended Parameter Write Parameter in accordance with the operation or change of the system Relation between module parameter on the Project view and module parameter in CPU module Module parameters are written with all other parameters displayed on the Project view in one
306. it in advance LA MELSEC iQ R Programming Manual Program Design The display format and detailed operations for each function can be set by the following option setting Tool gt Options gt Program Editor gt ST Editor Configuration of ST editor ST editor is a language editor in text format for creating programs in Structured Text Spaces tabs and line feeds can be entered between keywords and variable names of the ST control syntax Terms and symbols that configure the program is referred to as a token Window Project view gt Program gt execution type gt program file gt program block gt Program Toolbar SES pa i te ST editor i Error display Too hint Separation bar Highlight display oRevCond G_b58SOpenFin lt gt 0 amp G_b5SRevFin lt gt 0 amp wInOutRtn 0 wInQutRtn 1 Reset return value Icon Outline display display Line number area Icon display area The area to display icons Hicon type K Page 146 Icon type Line number The line numbers of a program Changing display contents Highlighted display The line on which the cursor is placed is highlighted i gt Options gt Program Editor gt ST Editor gt Editor Display ems Error display Outline display Symbols to display hide the text blocks are displayed Show Hide e Tool gt Options gt Program Editor gt ST Editor gt Editor Di
307. ject view as follow Read protected Authenticated B fit ProgPou Local Label 7 ProgPou gt Local Label FF Program FE Program m Pasting elements onto the program editor function block function only 1 Drag and drop an element onto the sequence program from the Library tab on the Element Selection window 2 When pasting function block select either the global label or the local label to register the element from the list on the FB Instance Name screen Making the read protected POUs editable 1 Select the POU which was utilized and read protected then right click and select Enter the Password to Edit from the shortcut menu 2 Enter the password on the Password Authentication screen and click the OK button The element will be editable until the project is closed Copy of utilized elements e When the data name of the utilized element has it will be changed to _ after copy e The read protected element cannot be copied However it can be copied by entering password to edit e For the edit protected element the copy of elements only can be editable 222 10 SEGMENTING PROGRAMS 10 3 Enhancing Use of User Library 10 4 Enhanced Use of Application Library Sample Library Application library sample library MELSOFT Library are the element collection of program function block function structure which are composed of specific processing In this section the application library sample library MELS
308. k No and set a group number in Specify Group No The remote operation cannot be performed for CC Link IE Field Network because it does not have group number Specify Group No 1 Not supported by FX5CPU u on and RUN STOP switch miri When the ope ration to the CPU module differs by the remote operation RUN STOP switch or remote RUN PAUSE contact the CPU module operates according to the priority shown below STOP 1 PAUSE 2 RUN 3 The operating status after RUN STOP switching on the CPU module or remote RUN STOP contact operation are as follows RUN RUN STOP 1 The remote reset operation must be enabled on Operation Related Setting of the CPU Parameter 2 Operable when the CPU module is switched to STOP by remote operation 326 18 CHECKING CHANGING CPU MODULE OPERATION 18 2 CPU Module Remote Operation 18 3 Operations of RnSFCPU This section explains how to operate the functions of RNSFCPU with GX Works3 Switch Safety Operation Mode Switch the safety operation mode safety mode test mode of RNSFCPU Considerations before switching the safety operation mode CAUTION Test the programs fully in the application environment before switching the mode to the safety mode MBefore switching to the safety mode ensure that the programs and parameters of the intended safety project have been written properly by the following operation Operating procedure 1 Save an edited safety
309. ked window Window operation Displaying docked windows View gt Docking Window gt target item Poin tr When the docked window is not displayed by selecting it from the menu select Window gt Reset Window Layout Back to Initial Status Switching docked window and work window The windows or files can be switched by pressing the ce f keys Select a particular window or file by pressing the cl lt E E E keys 28 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS 2 3 Screen Configuration MArranging work windows The list of open windows is displayed Open and arrange the specific window Arranging the windows improves display efficiency while opening multiple windows Window Window gt Window Select Window Pg MAIN Device Comment Open A eer PRG LD 3645tep Close Window Cascade ProgPou PRG Local Label Setting Tile Horizontally Tile Vertically Docking floating dockable windows e Docked display Drag the title bar of a floating dockable window and drop it to the guidance to dock the main frame 4G LD E MELSOFT 6 MELSOFT GX Works3 Untitled Project 3 Step Project Edit Find Replace Conver line Debug Diagnostics Tool Window Help Project Edit Eind Replace Convert View Online Debug Diagnostics Tool Window Help iDBRAS o 3 136 he RE SP Se as e BOO 2p S th BR BR oe er ip Ye ee 35 HC AEP 4d Fa sto H
310. king module parameters Safety Communication Setting Output the Safety Communication Setting of module parameters in the Project B to a CSV file Compare the saved CSV file with the Safety Communication Setting screen of the Project A to confirm whether the intended parameters have been written properly Edited safety project Project A The figure above is a screen example in which Excel is used Network Configuration Configured Module Communication y Destination Network Station No Station Type Model Name Communication rense ui work 1 1 Remote Device Station NZ2GFSS2 32D Active 2 Local Network 1 2 Local Station RO8SFGPU Active el ji 4 T ma 7 meni 9 Sending Interval Monitoring Time ms 30 0 24 0 Safety Refresh Monitoring Time ms 4 n 1 Restore the Default Settings Output to File for Setting Confirmation E I 1 Safety project in the CPU module Project B I Ir l x Wd ls Safety csv Microsoft Excel X I Home Insert Page Layout Formulas Data Review View a 2 o ep ss I 4 Calibri Jua QA a General x Fa Conditional Formatting g Insert E Ay 600 I FE ied n 9 Formatas Table 3 Delete E Z te Iu amp anginal ee Sort amp Find amp soo eam zvara tao 20 E cell Styles B Formaty Q Filter Select I Clipboard Font Alignment Number Style Cells Editing I
311. ks3 RCPU does not support this connection Adapter Host CPU module 1 PC side I F Serial USB RS 232C COM port COM1 Transmission Speed 115 2Kbps 2 PLC side I F PLC Module PLC Mode FXS5CPU Other Station Setting No Specification Check at Communication Time 30 seconds Retry Times 0 time 12 SETTING ROUTE TO CPU MODULE 2 12 2 Direct Connection 39 12 3 Accessing via Network Single Network This section shows the setting example for accessing a CPU module on other station via single network after accessing the Ethernet built in CPU from GX Works3 l FX5CPU does not support it 1 PC side I F Ethernet Board Protocol TCP 2 PLC side I F PLC Module Ethernet Port Direct Connection Other Station Setting Other Station Single Network Check at Communication Time 30 seconds 3 Network Communication Route CC IE Field Network No 1 Access via Ethernet module Ethernet port 192 168 3 1 Network No E Station No i The following shows the setting example for accessing the CPU module via CC Link IE built in Ethernet module from GX Works3 It is same settings when accessing a CPU module via the network part of RNENCPU FX5CPU does not support it Network No 1 192 167 0 2 Station number 2 RJ71EN71 192 168 0 2 Station number 2 Ethernet port RJ71EN71 192 167 0 1 Station number 1 RJ71EN71 192 168 0 3 Network No 2 Station number 3 1 PC side I F Eth
312. l Comment Preview x1 Device comment Cancel Press the ctn Enter keys to insert a line feed two characters are used in the cell 16 Character 1024 Character Input Restriction After entering comments is completed select Edit gt Documentation gt Edit Device Label Comment 5 again On the element entry dialog 1 Select a cell and press the Erer key 2 Click S on the element entry dialog and click the OK button 3 Enter the comment to Comment column HPU al OK Cancel Extd Dspl Input Device Comment Device Label Comment Preview xi Device comment Device comment Cancel 14 Character 1024 Character Input Restriction With the keyboard 1 Display the comments 2 Select the cell and press the key twice 3 Enter a comment directly From each editor Label editor K Page 107 Configuration of label editor Device comment editor K gt Page 179 Creating device comments 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 1 3 6 3 Creating Ladder Programs 5 Entering editing statements Add a comment to a ladder block using the statement line statement P statement or statement in order to make the processing flow easy to understand To check the entered statements on the ladder editor change the setting to display the statements e View gt Statement Display For details on the statements refer to the following manuals On the Enter Stateme
313. l High speed Type QCPU FXCPU FX3U FX3UC only The module type of each project will be changed as below Universal model QCPU Universal model High speed Type QCPU R120CPU FXCPU FX3U FX3UC FX5UCPU The supported version of GX Works3 differs depending on the module type For details refer to the following section K Page 332 Functions Added to Changed from Previous Version Window Project gt Open Other Format File gt Open GX Works2 Format Project gt Open Project Look in p GXW2 project hd i p aly M Name Date modified Type my HH PROJECT gw 6 10 2014 2 46PM GXW File Recent Places Desktop Libraries L Computer ry m t Network Files of type GX Works2 Format Project gxw X Title a Other Format Open a Workspace Format Project anh Please change the windows with this button to use workspace format project MELSOFT Navigator supports this Format mQperating procedure 1 Specify the project and click the Open button 2 Read the displayed message and click the OK button The changed content of the project data is displayed on the Output window e If a program that contains a compilation error exists in GX Works2 the project cannot be opened Check if the program can be compiled in GX Works2 e The project to which the user management or access authority is set cannot be opened Clear the setting in GX Works2 e Once the module type is chan
314. l Operating System Microsoft Windows 7 Ultimate Operating System and Microsoft Windows 7 Enterprise Operating System A generic term for Windows 7 Windows 8 and Windows 8 1 Windows 8 Windows 8 1 Windows 8 or later Windows Vista Windows Vista or later Windows XP A generic term for Microsoft Windows 8 Operating System Microsoft Windows 8 Pro Operating System and Microsoft Windows 8 Enterprise Operating System A generic term for Microsoft Windows 8 1 Operating System Microsoft Windows 8 1 Pro Operating System and Microsoft Windows 8 1 Enterprise Operating System A generic term for Windows 8 and Windows 8 1 A generic term for Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Business Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate Operating System and Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise Operating System A generic term for Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows 8 and Windows 8 1 A generic term for Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Operating System and Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System 13 MEMO FUNDAMENTALS OF GX Works3 This part explains the screen configuration and basic operations of GX Works3 1 BEFORE USING THIS PRODUCT 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS 15 16 1 BEFORE USING THIS PRODUCT
315. l ox I Target Module Information NZ2GF552 32D I Home Insert Page Layout Formulas Data Review View a o FP X Start I O No 0020 Station No 1 o ma gol nar 3 Insert v E i I B a Calibri 11 A A yy General E 7 FX Delete a Pd A I Paste B A amp A EEEE fad 9 48 308 Conditional Format Cell r Sot amp Find amp s En 5 as Table gt Styles DA Format 3 z Method selection Parameter write x The parameters are written to the target module 7 Formatting Re Table Styles Fs Hu 2 Filter Select I lipboard G Font z Alignment Number Styles Cells Editing I Al e f CCLinklEField v Parameter Information I J K L Checked parameters are the targets of selected processes l a Select All Cancel All Selections I 2 Station No Parameter ID Checkbox Name Initial Value 3 1 CommIfAdd1 StationParam P_TransinteryalMonitorTime FALSE Transmission interval monitoringtime t r lhitial Value Unit Read Value Unit Write Value Unit Setting Range Description a I F CommifAdd1 BasicUnitParam InputWiringSelection FALSE Wiring selection of input LJ ZI Transmission interval monitor 8 ms ms 50 mes 3 to 1000 Set the transmissic I 5 CommifAdd1 BasicUnitParam InputWiringSelection Wiring selection of input X0 0 Not used Basic module parameter I 6 CommlfAdd1 BasicUnitParam InputWiringSelection Wiring selection of input X1 0 Not used Ww Wiring selection of input ESS RSS ESS
316. lacing data in programs The search functions that can be used in FBD LD editor are as follows Cross reference Checks devices label declaration locations and referenced locations in a list Page 200 SEARCHING DATA Device list Checks the usage of devices being used Search and replace e Searches for and replaces a device name label name instruction name and character strings e Changes open close contact e Replaces devices in a batch Displaying help Check the elements used in the FBD LD program on e Manual Viewer To check the files of the corresponding programming manuals requires to be registered in e Manual Viewer 1 Select the element to be checked 2 Press the key 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 1 6 5 Creating FBD LD Programs of 6 6 Creating SFC Programs This section explains how to create an SFC program The details on the specification of SFC program are described in the following manual Please read it in advance LA MELSEC iQ R Programming Manual Program Design Poin tr The display format and detailed operations for each function can be set by the following option setting Tool gt Options gt Program Editor gt SFC Diagram Editor Creation procedure 1 Setthe point of step relay S in the detailed setting in the Device Label Memory Area Detailed Setting of CPU parameter The default point of step relay S is O points 2 Create new SFC data Page 72 Creating projects 3 Config
317. laration After MDeleting rows deleting labels Operating procedure Select Edit gt Delete Row MDisplaying all lines or first line of comments For the Comment columns data can be entered in multiple lines Double click or to switch the display between all lines or only the first line 6 Global_data6 Bit 0 5 A Only the first line is displayed WSorting labels O 5 Labels can be sorted by clicking a title name of label editor Global_data6 Global_data6 Element0 group 1 All lines are displayed ElementO group 2 ElementO group 3 ElementO group 4 ElementO group 5 For ascending order is displayed and as for descending order is displayed in the title name Filtering display e If the wild card is specified as a filtering condition it is not applied as a filtering condition but displayed strings which are used and e To select the filtering target column click the boundary on the right side of the column to as shown below and perform filtering Filter gt Label Name Fa G3 ho e When filtering columns by selecting Access from External Device specify 1 after selecting Access from External Device As for it is not selected specify O MMoving a row upward Delete an empty row automatically and move upward on the label editor Operating procedure Select Edit gt Delete Blank Rows 3 1 08 5 RE
318. le FLOAT Double Precision Precision 12 KL Page 187 Assignment of timer retentive timer counter E 4 16 KL Page 187 Assignment of structure Assignment of bit type If the number of bit type labels exceeds 16 the labels will be assigned to the next memory area consecutively When using the label of which the class is VAR_INPUT VAR_OUTPUT in the function block the area of EN ENO is assigned to the head of FB instance Class Label Name Data Type 1 Ya Bool Bit YAR v 2 Var_Bool2 Bit adva x H 19 Var_Booll et VR x 20 Var_Bool20 Bit VAR x Assignment of array For a bit type array the memory is assigned from the start address 0 bit of the array and continuous bits for one dimensional element are assigned in word unit As for the two dimensional element or later the same area as the one dimensional element is assigned for the number of the dimensional elements continuously For an array other than bit type the area which is required for the element is assigned for the memory of the data type continuously A padding is not inserted between the array elements ex lt Assignment example of bit type two dimension array_Bit 0 n 0 m gt lt Assignment example of word type two dimension array_Word 0 n 0 m gt 4 86 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 6 9 Converting Programs Assignment of structure A member of structure is assigned according to the assignment
319. le PLC Mode RCPU Other Station Setting No Specification Check at Communication Time 30 seconds Retry Times 0 time 3 Target System Multiple CPU Setting Target PLC PLC No 4 12 SETTING ROUTE TO CPU MODULE 24 12 7 Accessing to Multiple CPU System 5 Accessing via network The following explains the setting methods for accessing the CPU module in a multiple CPU system on other station via a network MRelay station Set the parameters so that the module mounted on the relay station is controlled by the same CPU module In the figure below PLCNo 2 is the control CPU MAccess target station Set the PLC number in Multiple CPU Setting on the Specify Connection Destination screen when the access target station is the multiple CPU system The following shows the setting for accessing the PLC No 4 in the multiple CPU system on the access target station via a network Set the connection destination setting When accessing to a CPU from No 1 to No 4 on the access target station change the CPU No to be accessed in Multiple CPU Setting on the Specify Connection Destination screen Personal computer Own station The CPU No 4 on the access target station is OI accessed via the module 1 by connecting a cable to the 1 CPU No 1 Note that the cable shall be connected CAnpn nnn to the programmable controller CPU that controls the RCPU No 1 2 beet routed module ects N
320. le controller ase Writing data j E f The two simulators interact with one another to simulate the sequence control and motion control Simulator Simulator S of CPU module of simple motion module Safety and handling consideration NCAUTION WET he Simulation function simulates the actual module to debug a created sequence program However this function does not guarantee the operation of the debugged program MT he Simulation function uses the memory for simulation to input and output data to from the I O module and Intelligent function module Some instructions functions and device memory are not supported Therefore the operation results obtained with the virtual programmable controller may differ from those obtained using the actual module After debugging programs using the Simulation function the normal program debugging which is performed with the module connected before the actual operation is required 226 11 SIMULATING PROGRAM 11 1 Simulation Function 11 2 Starting Stopping Simulation Start stop the Simulation function The connection destination is GX Simulator3 during simulation and Simulation system number of the simulator CPU number is displayed on the status bar Window Debug gt Simulation gt Start Simulation amp 4 Stop Simulation E4 IE GX Simulator3 Tool 1 1 ROSCPU LED SWITCH RUN STOP READY ERROR P RU
321. le elements with the cl n key held down Select multiple elements by moving the cursor with elements e Click the background of the FBD LD editor and drag it the Ini key held down diagonally To select a network Click an element and select Edit gt Select Network Select an element and press the Ctl snit a keys To select whole The operation is same as the one for selecting multiple Press the le JA keys elements elements Change a name Double click the element of which name is to be changed Select the element of which name is to be changed and enter a name and press the Eater 1 F2 key or enter a name Move Click the element to be moved and drag and drop it on the Select the element to be moved and press the desired position leel bned eq E1 E E keys By moving an element with the ntl key held down it can be separated from the network and moved Connector To connect e Click a connection point and drag it to a target connection point e Click the element to be connected and drag it closer to a target connection point To replace Select a connector with the Dnit key held down and drag and drop it on a connection point of an element To insert an element Click an element and move it to a connected connector with the Init key held down Only an element which has a connection point on the same level at the input output side 4 For functi
322. lect the library to be deleted then select Project gt Library Operation gt Delete from Library List L Updating libraries Delete a library once then re register an new library 10 SEGMENTING PROGRAMS 223 10 4 Enhanced Use of Application Library Sample Library MEMO 224 10 SEGMENTING PROGRAMS 10 4 Enhanced Use of Application Library Sample Library DEBUGGING AND OPERATION This part explains the communication route setting to access a CPU module reading writing data and monitoring the execution status 11 SIMULATING PROGRAM 12 SETTING ROUTE TO CPU MODULE 13 WRITING READING DATA TO CPU MODULE 14 CHECKING OPERATION OF PROGRAMS 225 11 SIMULATING PROGRAM This chapter explains how to debug programs offline using the Simulation function For information on CPU modules supporting the Simulation function refer to the following section K Page 342 Using Simulation Function Note that SFC program is not supported to the Simulation function 11 1 Simulation Function The Simulation function debugs programs using a virtual programmable controller on a personal computer GX Simulator3 is used for the Simulation function This function is useful to check programs before operating them actually since it enables debugging without the connection with CPU module For the considerations for using the Simulation function refer to the following section K Page 355 Considerations Virtual programmab
323. line automatically when a line feed is inserted during program editing The tabulator length can be set in the following option setting e Tool gt Options gt Program Editor gt ST Editor gt Edit Operation 148 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 6 4 Creating ST Programs Inserting comments Enter a comment which does not affect the program processing Or comment out uncommented the already entered programs in a batch Operating procedure Entering comments e When the line is one Enter a comment after entering slashes e When specifying the range Enclose the comment in and or and Batch comment out uncomment of a program 1 Selecta range to be commented out or uncommented Multiple lines can be selected 2 Edit gt Comment Out of Selected Range Disable Comment Out of Selected Range Registering undefined labels Register an undefined label on the label editor Operating procedure 1 Enter the label name to be registered on an ST editor 2 Select the token of a label name and select Edit gt Register Label 3 Set the items on the Undefined Label Registration screen and click the OK button Displaying syntax templates Syntax template is a format that defines data type of arguments and format of control syntaxes which are defined in each instruction function and operator The syntax template of the inserted instruction can be displayed on the ST editor Operat
324. line change function FX5CPU does not support it Operating procedure Select Online gt Write to PLC Precautions e Writing data cannot be performed to the program files which are not registered in the parameter setting e The sequence program in which the global labels or FBs FUNs are used and the global label setting file or FB files that are referred from the sequence program cannot be written simultaneously in file units while CPU module is in RUN Change the CPU module status to STOP PAUSE before writing the global label setting file or FB files 13 WRITING READING DATA TO CPU MODULE 2 1 13 3 Writing Programs While CPU is in RUN 6 13 4 Reading Writing Deleting User Data Read write delete user data from to the CPU built in memory SD memory card FX5CPU does not support it The files which have a three character extension example csv txt bin xml can be used as a user data Note that the following files are excluded e SYS PRG PFB PRM DID DCM QDR EVENT LOG includes file name QST IFG LID CAB LCS LIS SYP a file that is attached in front of the file name The user data written to the CPU built in memory SD memory card can be used in sequence programs Online gt User Data gt Write Read Delete The following screen is an example when writing data Display Write Target Folder C Users Administrator User Data CPU Write Target Folder MELPRJ Select All Legend Open Close All T
325. line structured text box on the position of the parallel circuit Precautions e Both an FB and inline structured text box cannot be placed in a ladder block e Inline structured text box cannot be connected to the input output of FB instance e The label of which data type is pointer cannot be used in the inline structured text e If the row that includes an inline structured text box is deleted the whole ladder block is deleted including an inline structured text Pasting from each screen Paste a label name device name by dragging and dropping from the editor such as label editor and device comment editor By dragging and dropping a bit type label device in a blank cell a contact is inserted automatically and its label name device name is displayed Additionally when dragging and dropping a bit type label device to the right end of the cell a coil is inserted automatically and its label name device is displayed A word type device label can be pasted by dragging and dropping on the operand of an instruction Registering undefined labels When an undefined label is entered the Undefined Label Registration screen is displayed and it can be registered on the label editor 134 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 6 3 Creating Ladder Programs Checking the duplicated coils Check the duplicated coils in the same program when entering a coil in the program Set whether to check the duplicated coils by setting the following option e Tool gt O
326. lock function The operation is not performed in actual time LED display function LED display function from PLC module is in RUN Diagnostic function Self diagnostic function Test function Testing device and Testing device and label data label data Changing values Changing values Testing local device and local label data Debug function Changing program and Changing program while CPU module is parameter while CPU in RUN Changing ladder block module is in RUN APPENDICES APPENDIX 4 Appendix 5 Using Simulation Function 3 3 Operation function Program related function Program execution setting Program execution type setting function function Device file usage setting Interrupt function Fixed cycle interval setting The operation is not performed in actual time File register block number saving recovering setting Interrupt permission setting during instruction execution PID control function Process control function Constant scan The operation is not performed in actual time Operation function Remote operation function Operation change function RUN PAUSE contact setting function Device data related Device label memory area function setting function Device variable setting function Device label memory area setting function Device variable setting function Local device setting function Refresh memory setting function Internal buffer capacity setting f
327. locks refer to the following manuals LA MELSEC iQ R Programming Manual Program Design LA MELSEC iQ F FX5 Programming Manual Program Design Procedure to use 1 Create a data of function block L Page 214 Creating function block data 2 Set the local labels to be used in the program of a function block Page 215 Setting labels 3 Create a program using labels Page 215 Creating function block programs 4 Paste the function block on the sequence program Page 128 Inserting function blocks Page 148 Inserting function blocks Creating function blocks The following explains how to create function blocks E Number of function blocks that can be created RCPU other than RO4CPU Up to 8192 in conjunction with function data RO4CPU Up to 4096 in conjunction with function data FXSCPU Up to 960 in conjunction with function data However the maximum number of data that can be created may not be reached depending on the configuration of FB files and FUN files Precautions When changing line statements of a function block on the tree all programs in which the changed FB instances are used will be in the unconverted state Creating function block data Create a function block data in the project on the New Data screen Item Description Use MC MCR in EN Control Detail Inherent Setting Property Applies function block program codes using the MC MCR instruction to each location where instances are used at
328. long timer long retentive timer and long counter requires 4 words N lower 16 bit Lower address Upper address Converting character codes Character strings are handled as Unicode in GX Works3 and they are handled as ASCII in a CPU module When a converting program character strings also are converted from Unicode to ASCII When the reading program from a programmable controller the character strings are converted from ASCII to Unicode 1 88 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 6 9 Converting Programs Performing online program change simultaneously with conversion For the operation methods for performing the online program change function simultaneously with conversion refer to the following section KL Page 258 Writing Programs While CPU is in RUN Checking for errors and warnings When the program is converted the target programs and label settings are checked and the result is displayed on the Output window The corresponding error location can be referred on the Output window Operating procedure 1 Double click the error warning message displayed on the Output window 2 Check the corresponding error location and modify the error as instructed by the error warning message 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 1 6 9 Converting Programs 89 6 10 Calculating Memory Size This section shows how to calculate offline a memory size required when writing data in a project to a CPU module Window Tool gt Confirm Memory Size Offline
329. lues by Registering Devices Labels Page 282 Checking Current Values in Intelligent Function Module gt Zoom gt Set Zoom Factor gt Zoom gt Zoom In gt Zoom gt Zoom Out gt Switch Display Language gt Multiple Comment Display Setting gt Specify Connection Destination gt Read from PLC gt Write to PLC gt Verify with PLC gt Remote Operation gt Safety PLC Operation gt Check Safety Data Identity gt Safety PLC Operation gt Switch Safety Operation Mode gt CPU Memory Operation gt Delete PLC Data gt User Data gt Read gt User Data gt Write gt User Data gt Delete gt Set Clock gt Monitor gt Monitor Mode gt Monitor gt Monitor Write Mode gt Monitor gt Start Monitoring All Windows gt Monitor gt Stop Monitoring All Windows gt Monitor gt Start Monitoring gt Monitor gt Stop Monitoring gt Monitor gt Change Value Format Decimal gt Monitor gt Change Value Format Hexadecimal gt Monitor gt Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor gt Monitor gt Program List Monitor gt Monitor gt Interrupt Program List Monitor gt Monitor gt SFC All Blocks Batch Monitoring gt Watch gt Start Watching gt Watch gt Stop Watching gt Watch gt Register to Watch Window gt watch window 1 to 4 gt User Authentication gt Lo
330. m fi ProgPou Fs Local Label BL m Initial processi g fi f Fixed Scan EL Event qi Stand by i l No Execution Type ue Unregistered Program fe FBSFUN fia Label ie Device 66 m w Parameter bHegrowa B122 M m H m Consideration when using statements in an FB program When the name of a statement used in an FB program is changed all programs in which the function block is used in the unconverted state 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 1 37 6 3 Creating Ladder Programs Append a comment to coils application instructions using Note in the program in order to make it easier to understand the content of program To check the entered notes on the ladder editor change the setting to display the notes e View gt Note Display For details on the notes refer to the following manuals On the Enter Note screen MELSEC iQ R Programming Manual Program Design MELSEC iQ F FX5 Programming Manual Program Design 1 Select Edit gt Documentation gt Edit Note 2 Select the cell and press the Enter key or double click it 3 Enter a note InPLC i In Peripheral Press the ctil Enter keys to insert a line feed two characters are used in the cell 6Character 64 Character InputLimit After entering notes is completed select Edit gt Documentation gt Edit Note FP again On the element entry dialog 1 Pr
331. m of GX Works2 In that case replace the instruction names to the appropriate ones The following list shows instruction names that requires the replacement instruction names after replacing BAND gt BAND_U BANDP gt BANDP_U BINDA gt BINDA_U BINDAP gt BINDAP_U e BKMINUS gt BKMINUS_U e BKMINUSP gt BKMINUSP_U e BKPLUS gt BKPLUS_U e BKPLUSP gt BKPLUSP_U e DABIN gt DABIN_U DABINP gt DABINP_U e DBAND gt DBAND_U DBANDP gt DBANDP_U e DBINDA gt DBINDA_U e DBINDAP gt DBINDAP_U e DBKMINUS gt DBKMINUS_U e DBKMINUSP DBKMINUSP_U e DBKPLUS gt DBKPLUS_U e DBKPLUSP DBKPLUSP_U e DDABIN gt DDABIN_U e DDABINP gt DDABINP_U e DDEC gt DDEC_U e DDEC P gt DDECP_U DDIVISION gt DDIVISION_U e DDIVISIONP gt DDIVISIONP_U e DEC gt DEC_U e DGRY gt DGRY_U DIVISION gt DIVISION_U e DMEAN gt DMEAN_U e DMINUSP gt DMINUSP_U e DPLUSP gt DPLUSP_U e DSCLP gt DSCLP_U DVAL gt DVAL_U e DZONE gt DZONE_U e GRY gt GRY_U e LIMITP gt LIMITP_U e MINP gt MINP_U e MULTIP gt MULTIP_U e SCL2 gt SCL2_U e STR gt STR_U e WSUM gt WSUM_U DECP gt DECP_U e DGRYP gt DGRYP_U DIVISIONP gt DIVISIONP_U DMEANP gt DMEANP_U DMULTI gt DMULTI_U e DSCL gt DSCL_U DSORTD gt DSORTD_U DVALP gt DVALP_U e DZONEP gt DZONEP_U e GRYP gt GRYP_U e MAXP MAXP_U e MINUS gt MINUS _U e PLUS gt PLUS_U e SCL2P gt SCL2P_U e STRP gt STRP_U
332. m to Search dh Oe Be Setting ltem Setting Item List Setting ltem Input the Setting Item to Search dh E Aefresh by the Sef Timng eG Interrupt setting ae E Fimes Limit Setting i A E Refresh Timi s Refresh Setting o Platresh S Low Speed Timer Low Speed Retentive Timer 100 ms ss Refresh by the Set Timing ree 164 OF Gz High Speed Timer High Speed Retentive Timer 10 00 ms E E Name Setting Long Timer Long Retentive Timer 0 001 ms a g Operation Related Setting RUN PAUSE Contact Setting oe Timer Limit Setting RUN vo RUN PAUSE Contact Setting C PAUSE pe Remote Reset Setting R angoen l Qutput Mode Setting of STOP P emote Reset Seting Module Synchronous Setting Remote Reset Disable jhe Clock Related Setting Output Mode Setting of STOP to RUN a Be Interrupt Settings Output Mode of STOP to RUN Output the Output Y Status before STOP cfe Service Processing Setting E Module Synchronous Setting isi File Setting Module Risin Synchronize aenal a RAS Setting Clock Related Setting H Program Setting Time Zone UTC 9 GZ SFC Setting Comment H P Refresh Setting between Multiple C H Routing Setting Explanation Please set when change the timer limit value of timer T retentive timer ST long timer LT and long retentive a timer LST Item List Find Result TH i A
333. memory card setting file in use flag OFF Not used ON In use SM1202 Data memory setting file in use flag OFF Not used ON In use 4 APPENDICES APPENDIX 3 6 Appendix 5 Using Simulation Function SM1210 Data logging setting No 1 OFF Not prepared Data logging preparation ON Prepared SM1211 Data logging setting No 1 OFF Suspended waiting for start Data logging start ON Start SM1212 Data logging setting No 1 OFF No data logging collection operation Data logging data collection in progress ON Data logging data collection in progress SM1213 Data logging setting No 1 OFF Data logging is not completed Data logging completion ON Data logging is completed SM1214 Data logging setting No 1 OFF gt ON triggering occurs Data logging triggering SM1215 Data logging setting No 1 OFF Not post triggering Post data logging triggering ON Post triggering SM1216 Data logging setting No 1 OFF No error Data logging error ON Error state SM1217 Data logging setting No 1 OFF Data saving is not in progress Data logging data saving into memory card in progress ON Data saving is in progress SM1218 Data logging setting No 1 OFF Storage file switching is not in progress Logging data storage file switching in progress ON Storage file switching is in progress SM1220 to SM1228 Data logging setting No 2 Same configuration as the setting No 1 SM1230 to SM1238 Data logging setting No 3 Same configuration as the setting No 1 SM1240 to SM1248 Data logging settin
334. ment Argument gt I O Argument gt Delete Argument gt Easy Edit gt Invert Contact Open Close gt Easy Edit gt Switch Pulse gt Edit Step Transition Page 166 Common operations of SFC elements Page 163 Changing a step name step No step attribute step attribute target Page 164 Changing a transition name Transition No Page 164 Creating a transition Page 159 Configuration of SFC diagram editor Page 163 Changing a step name step No step attribute step attribute target Page 163 Changing a step name step No step attribute step attribute target Page 164 Changing a transition name Transition No Page 165 Switching a jump connection line Page 163 Inserting a step Page 164 Inserting a transition Page 165 Inserting an action Page 165 Inserting a jump Page 166 Inserting a branch below a step transition Page 166 Adding a selection branch on the right side of a transition selection condition Page 166 Adding a simultaneous branch on the right side of a step simultaneous branch Page 155 Adding deleting arguments Page 154 Switching methods for contacts instructions Page 172 Editing Step No Transition No 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS 2 4 Menu List 43 44 gt Properties gt Convert Block gt Toolbar gt SFC gt Comment Display gt Display Step Transition gt Grid Display gt Open SFC Block List gt Open Zoom List gt Open Label S
335. ming registration or conversion Precautions Names are not case sensitive Unusable character string for project name work space name Category Character string Invalid Symbol Space 3 lt gt 0x007f character Surrogate pair 0xD800 to OxDBFF 0xDCO00 to OxDFFF Control code U 0000 to U 001F U 0080 to U 009F U 00A0 to U 00BF U FFFE U FFFF Windows reserved word COM1 COM2 COM3 COM4 COM5 COM6 COM7 COM8 COMY LPT1 LPT2 LPT3 LPT4 LPT5 LPT6 LPT7 LPT8 LPT9 AUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK END_ MARK Unusable character string for data name Category Character string Invalid Space amp SG thasshnS gt gt 2 brubrs 0x007f onaraciey 0xD800 to OxDBFF 0xDC00 to 0xDFFF U 0000 to U 001F U 0080 to U 009F U 00A0 to U 00BF U FFFE U FFFF COMMENT GLBLINF Windows reserved word COM1 COM2 COM3 COM4 COMS COM6 COM7 COMB COM9 LPT1 LPT2 LPT3 LPT4 LPT5 LPT6 LPT7 LPT8 LPT9 AUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK END_ MARK Data type Class VAR VAR_RETAIN VAR_ACCESS VAR_CONSTANT VAR_INPUT VAR_INPUT_RETAIN VAR_OUTPUT VAR_OUTPUT_RETAIN VAR_IN_OUT VAR_IN_EXT VAR_EXTERNAL VAR_EXTERNAL_CONSTANT VAR_EXTERNAL_RETAIN VAR_GLOBAL VAR_GLOBAL_CONSTANT VAR_GLOBAL_RETAIN VAR_PUBLIC VAR_PUBLIC_RETAIN Data type BOOL BYTE INT SINT DINT LINT UINT USINT UDINT ULINT WORD DWORD LWORD ARRAY REAL LREAL TIME STRING WSTRING TIMER LTIMER RETENTIVETIMER LRETENTIVETIMER COU
336. module is displayed in a pale color same as when the module state setting empty is set A module that is controlled by the CPU module set as a host CPU A module that is controlled by the CPU module set as other station The module is displayed in a pale color same as when the module state setting empty is set Up to four CPU modules can be placed for CPU slot and slot 0 to 6 The placed CPU modules will be in order from CPU No 1 to 4 from left to right Setting multiple CPU configuration In the multiple CPU configuration place more than two CPU modules on the base unit When changing the control CPU of the module use the Input the Configuration Detailed Information window The following explains how to change a single CPU configuration to a multiple CPU configuration and vice versa MWhen changing a single CPU configuration to a multiple CPU configuration Drag and drop the CPU module from the Element Selection window with a single CPU configuration one CPU is placed on the base unit and place the second CPU module on the base unit When changing a multiple CPU configuration to a single CPU configuration In a multiple CPU configuration two or more CPU modules are placed on a base unit delete or remove the CPU modules from the slot and remain only one module 4 CREATING MODULE CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM AND SETTING PARAMETERS 4 1 Creating Module Configuration Diagram Changing CPU number of the CPU module set as a host CPU For
337. mory is back to the initial status Each area has the default capacity Changing password Change the password for the CPU module to the same password set to a project Operating procedure Select Online gt User Authentication gt Change the Password of PLC 15 PROTECTING DATA 306 15 5 Preventing Illegal Access to CPU Module 15 6 Preventing Illegal Data Reading Writing To prevent data from being illegally read from written to CPU module use the File password function File password function By registering a password to the files in the CPU module the password authentication is required when reading writing files For FX5CPU selecting Permanent PLC Lock will enables to keep the operation to read write files prohibited and to prevent it from being canceled Setting a password is not required when Permanent PLC Lock is selected There are two kinds of protections in password and Permanent PLC Lock Read Protection and Write Protection Both of them can be set to one file E Operations that require password authentication by setting a file password O Required Not required Online operation Applicability Password to be set Read to a programmable controller Read protected password Write to a programmable controller Write protected password Online program change Online Program Change File batch online change Write protected password Verification with programmable controller Read protected password File
338. mum number In that case arrange the number of elements for example by deleting 11 Comment Comments can be put on an SFC editor The comments does not affect to the program The frame size of a comment can be adjusted to match to the comment length by placing the mouse cursor on the frame and double clicking it Poin tr A font color background color and fonts can be changed KL Page 48 Checking and Changing Colors and Fonts 1 60 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 6 6 Creating SFC Programs SFC element The following shows elements which can be used in an SFC program For details on creatable numbers of block each element action and each element refer to the following manual LA MELSEC iQ R Programming Manual Program Design Items Step Minitial step C Normal step 1 Step name 2 Step No SO an 3 Step attribute 4 Step attribute target MEnd Step Transition MSeries transition 1 Transition name 2 Transition No TRO Selection branch Simultaneous branch t Action 1 N Qualifier 2 Action name Description Indicates the head of a block An initial step is necessary in a block The operation of a step can be changed by specifying the step attribute For details refer to the following manual MELSEC iQ R Programming Manual Program Design Once a transition that places under a step is satisfied the next step is activated The operation of a step can be changed by
339. n GX Works2 and Function Block Diagram Ladder Diagram language in GX Works3 Display the execution order and check it The performances of return elements are different between programs written in Structured Ladder Function Block Diagram language of GX Works2 and programs written in Function Block Diagram Ladder Diagram language of GX Works3 For details on return elements in GX Works3 refer to the following section L Page 153 Common element The number of I O arguments of some function elements function block elements is different between Structured Ladder Function Block Diagram language in GX Works2 and Function Block Diagram Ladder Diagram language in GX Works3 In this case the element is displayed as undefined FB FUN Select Edit gt Update FB FUN to update the definition information and correct the program When a program in which members of general FB are referenced is created in Structured Ladder Function Block Diagram of GX Works2 a conversion error may occur after opening the program with GX Works3 In this case check the member name and class of the general FB and correct the program Inverting the contact is available for I O arguments of function elements function block elements in Function Block Diagram Ladder Diagram language of GX Works3 Page 154 Switching methods for contacts instructions Connectors of those elements are deleted when the elements other than above are inverted in a Structured Ladder FBD program of G
340. n between Convert and Rebuild All are shown below Item Conversion target Label assignment target Checking program Convert Newly added and changed location of Newly added and changed labels Whether or not to perform the Check the program Program function can be specified in Basic Setting by selecting Tool gt Options gt Convert Rebuild All All the programs in the project Whether to retain or reassign the labels can be Whether or not to perform the Check regardless of the change selected on the Rebuild All screen Program function can be specified on the However newly added labels or labels of which Rebuild All screen data types are changed will be reassigned even when Retain is selected Operating procedure 1 Select Convert gt Convert Rebuild All 2 For converting all programs specify the respective items for Label Assignment and Check Program on the Rebuild All screen and click the OK button Poin tr The unconverted data can be displayed on the Project view by selecting global label POU program file and right clicking it and selecting Expanded Collapse Tree gt Open Unconverted Data from the shortcut menu to display the status of unconverted data Considerations for conversion Canceling conversion The conversion is canceled in a program file unit Therefore even when the Cancel button is clicked during the conversion the conversion will not be canceled until the conv
341. nction Block fi ProgPou2 For Sarei Diagram Ladder Diagram 2 Local Label M Progran Data that composes an SFC block M Program jE Event Program SFC diagram data that is created using Sequential Function El Standby Execution type Chart fft No Execution Type Program file A file that manages a safety program S Unregistered Program Unregistered program For safety Bo Program Fk Initial l Execution type Unregistered program A folder that temporarily stores program files of which execution type is undefined The stored program files will not be executed even when writing them to a programmable controller 3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 3 1 Project File and Data Configuration FB file A file that manages function blocks Ba The FB files are written to a CPU module in unit of FB file E fr FEFILE FB file KL Page 214 Creating Function Blocks E fy FbPou Function block amp Local Label Local label Function block A data that configures the program of function block PR Program Program POU E fey FbPoul Local label A label data that can be used only in the defined function fee Local Label Worksheet block EY WorkSheet Program ae FB file Program A function block data that is created using Ladder Diagram pa e For safety or Structured Text l Say This data is referred to as FB program in this manual ES Local Label AR Program Worksheet A function block data that is created using Function Block gt FUNFILE
342. nd refresh settings of each module There are two kinds of parameters Module Parameter and Module Extended Parameter e Module parameter A parameter that is set to an I O module and Intelligent function module The initial setting values and refresh settings are included e Module extended parameter A parameter that is set to a specific Intelligent function module This parameter is read written separately from module parameters Page 95 Setting system parameters Page 96 Setting parameters of control CPU Page 97 Setting parameters of I O module and Intelligent function module 4 CREATING MODULE CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM AND SETTING PARAMETERS 93 4 2 Setting Parameters 94 Common operations of parameter settings parameter editor oe The parameter items of the system parameter control CPU parameter and module information are displayed corresponding to their purpose Set the items refer to the information displayed in Explanation Enter the keyword to search from the setting items and Explanation Setting ltem List Setting ltem Input the Setting Item to Search dh Station Type L Station Type Local Station Status color color background color T aa Network Number Hedired Settings Network Number 1 E No errors T fans Een ge Default setting Blue White aia ari Station Number Other than default Black White aramete
343. ne sensensensusansessanes esseeseses sesensenenseansaenasecasent m L Aiscvcvescoccvsescescveceacscssosncevsesevosssassossocsosvosscesoveeessoossecsooroeees Module Type i RoS a Program Language th Ladder z Operating procedure Set the items and click the OK button Precautions When creating a safety project set a screen saver in Windows to lock the personal computer automatically if the non operated state has been continued for a certain time For details refer to Windows Help and Support WUnsupported series by GX Works3 When the series QCPU Q mode LCPU FXCPU which are not supported by GX Works3 is selected GX Works2 is started up and create a new project in it When GX Works2 is installed on the personal computer it will be started up automatically If it is not installed execute the setup exe in the installation DVD ROM Disk2 of GX Workss3 Creating a project for RNENCPU RnENCPU consists of the two slots that are the CPU part and the network part Only CPU parts is placed after creating a new data on the Module Configuration Diagram Place a CPU extension module _ RJ71EN71 on the Module Configuration Diagram in the I O Assignment Setting of system parameter L Page 86 Placing module objects then set the network part 3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 1 3 2 Creating Project File 6 62 Creating new project by data read from programmable controller When the Read from PLC
344. needs Brae boa ee eee keane eae Sheba ae eee eas Goma cee os 72 EAMA DOSC o5 25 602050662 oy ee cree 55S Se Suse eo euS SS ee bee os os ee 55355 ser eee eee 73 PrOD y lt 5 cette pa ce paseo cate oe wee ade cats wm eee awe barn eee eee eee ge ee eee ot 74 3 4 Changing Module Type of Project 0 cece es 75 3 5 Veriying PIGjeCS si0crsoectitavnwt eee eta do hada eit had wee eed Meee eee ew we eed 77 Performing verification 2 2224 260n ccs emuardkeenae vo SG Heed eee y obese eceas b sabe Reenaa a wees 77 Checking verification result soc tanwoe dt oad eee deed ee eee Seekers Heeb Rade dere COLES ede de oss 78 Expono dalta om gt a a es oe ee nee ae ee ea ea ee ee ee ee es ee eee ee ee 79 3 6 Project Revision cc cece cece cece cece cece ence eaten eens teat naa aaraa ranerne 80 ep Registering revision information 00 ccc eee eee nes 80 Displaying revisi n Sts 24 44n044544400494469265e8 5805444555558 Feo oe ek ee ee ean dh hee eee eae 81 Li 3 7 Managing Pronles lt iucactsad chevadeevedettthadgedt unteeea baer donde bade hewent eae ew bw tenes 83 i Z CHAPTER 4 CREATING MODULE CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM AND SETTING O PARAMETERS 84 O 4 1 Creating Module Configuration Diagram 0 00 85 Editor configuration of Module Configuration Diagram 0 ees 85 Placing ODICCS 2 654 psaras Hee Genus Soon eee ee eae se cena eee eee dea Dee eee aeae eens eaes LA 86 Checking module information 0 000 ee ee e
345. neric term for components FB library sample programs drawing data which provide easy operation of programmable controller related modules and GOTs and various devices that are connected to them To obtain components of MELSOFT Library please consult your local Mitsubishi representative A product name for the integrated development environment included in SWnDND IQWK MELSOFT iQ Works n indicates version A local label defined in a structure or a function block A generic term for personal computer on which Windows operates A generic term for RnCPU RnENCPU RnPCPU and RnSFCPU A generic term for RO4CPU RO8CPU R16CPU R32CPU and R120CPU A generic term for RO4ENCPU RO8ENCPU R16ENCPU R32ENCPU and R120ENCPU A generic term for RO8PCPU R16PCPU R32PCPU and R120PCPU A generic term for RO8SFCPU R16SFCPU R32SFCPU and R120SFCPU Stations other than master station local station remote I O station remote device station intelligent device station etc A generic term for QQ3UDVCPU Q04UDVCPU QO6UDVCPU Q13UDVCPU and Q26UDVCPU A generic term for QQQUJCPU QOOUCPU Q01UCPU QO2UCPU QO3UDCPU QO3UDECPU QO04UDHCPU QO4UDEHCPU QO6UDHCPU QO6UDEHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU and Q100UDEHCPU A generic term for Microsoft Windows 7 Starter Operating System Microsoft Windows 7 Home Premium Operating System Microsoft Windows 7 Professiona
346. ng 224 to 225 ANGSVBTCES 20 Remote 10 Station 10ccupie Single Setting 32 Points NoSettng eabt0 227 Gra7 x inteligent Device Staton _ 1Occupie single Setting 2Points No Setting f ez SCGUB 01 Remote Device staton 1Occupie Snole Setting S2 Ports Nosa owa List of link devices Start I O No Display Option Option Slave Station List V Display Detailed Information Output Remote R Host STA Master E Host STA Master A ie RxXO 224 60 RYO 352 b0 RxO ye EEEs ee zeke ee ea s more CU PRs tid RY6 352 b6 RX6 z Displayed Content for Model Name and Buffer Memory Display Format can be selected by clicking the Display Option button Dina Start I O No Select the start I O number of master station or local station to be displayed on the list Slave Station List Displays the information of the slave stations and the range of the refresh devices assigned to the own station Multiple devices are displayed in accordance with the link refresh settings of the Module Parameter When refresh devices are not assigned the cells of the refresh device range will be blank Link Device List Displays the assignment status of refresh devices on the own station and link devices on the target station When link devices are not assigned the cells of the link device range will be blank The cells of Explanation will be blank when profile is not registered 4
347. ng a mode from the pull down menu on the mode display area located at the upper left of the ladder editor When monitoring multiple projects using a single personal computer e If an communication error has occurred in one of the projects the monitoring speed of the other projects may become slow The operation speed will be back to normal after closing the error message displayed in the project in which the communication error occurred e The following functions may not be performed normally Program List Monitor and Interrupt Program List Monitor Monitoring buffer memory and link devices Monitor the ON OFF state of the buffer memory or link devices example U0 G0 1 by setting the following option e Tool gt Options gt Monitor gt Common Item Program editor gt Operational Setting Changing display format of word devices Select Online gt Monitor gt Change Value Format Decimal Change Value Format Hexadecimal to change the display format of the monitored values EFB instance When monitoring the devices labels in an FB instance open the FB program and select the FB instance to be monitored from the monitor status bar 266 14 CHECKING OPERATION OF PROGRAMS 14 1 Monitor Status Monitoring status Monitoring status is displayed during monitoring on the work window At the start of monitoring Monitor Status Scan time status Monitoring target selection field Ta O m Max
348. ng print previews and printing data cannot be performed in the following situations e The print target data do not exist e The print target screen is being monitored Start printing after stopping the monitoring Printing large volume data Large volume data may not be printed at all or printed half way due to the limitations of printer driver or Windows print spooler In this case print the data by any of the following methods e Split the data by setting a print range e Select Print directly to the printer in the Advanced tab of the property screen select Control Panel gt Devices and Printers from Windows Start e Set Output by Item for the print job output on the Printer Setup screen 1 Select All apps on the Start screen or Start gt All Programs 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS 2 9 Printing Data MOutputting the print contents on a file e When the print content is output to a file the Save As screen may be displayed in the background of other screen Press the At Eabl keys or At Esc keys to bring the screen in the foreground e GX Works3 does not respond when the GX Works3 operation is performed while the Save As screen is displayed When the message is displayed select Wait for the program to respond Selecting Close the program results in loss of unsaved data Printing FBD LD programs Since the elements can be placed at will on the FBD LD editor
349. ng to zero refer to the following manuals LA MELSEC iQ R CPU Module User s Manual Application A MELSEC iQ F FX5 User s Manual Application Initializing data Delete files in the data memory device memory label memory of the CPU module or folders files stored in the SD memory card Note that the information for the user authentication will not be deleted To delete the information initialize all information Page 306 When a user name and a password used in the User Authentication function are lost After initializing rewrite the programmable controller data to the CPU module If the power of the CPU is turned OFF ON or the CPU module was reset the allocation for the device label memory is back to the initial status Each area has the default capacity Operating procedure 1 Select Online gt CPU Memory Operation 5 Page 330 Checking Memory Usage 2 Select Data Memory or File Storage Area on the Memory Management screen and click the Initialization button When initializing an SD memory card select SD Memory Card displayed on the left of the screen Precautions Format the memory card to be used for a CPU module by using this function If a memory card is formatted using the function such as Windows format function it may not be used on the CPU module Clearing value Clear the values of devices labels and file registers to 0 and perform latch clear operation Operating procedure 1
350. nge or ladder block and cut copy it Select a row when copying a function function block Pasting Paste a cut copied element For Insert mode press the key to switch for Overwrite mode the rung is inserted above the position of the cursor For Overwrite mode the row column will be inserted automatically and pasted by selecting Edit gt Insert and Paste Precautions If the elements as shown below are selected to set a range the vertical line on the right side cannot be pasted x100 x200 x100 fo PE o ae r L RN T z n N m i The vertical line on the right side is not pasted r In such case draw a vertical line after pasting the elements 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 1 39 6 3 Creating Ladder Programs Pasting device number label name consecutively Increment 1 and paste a device number and label name consecutively in the cut copied ladder block 2 Set the items on the Continuous Paste screen and click the Execute button Set the following on the Continuous Paste screen Number of Continuous Pastings 2 Increment Value 1 Paste direction Down x1 x2 o rT k Cut copy a ladder block or cell and _ select Edit gt Continuous Paste The device numbers are incremented and pasted for the specified number of times 140 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 6 3 Creating Ladder Programs Changing ladder blocks temporarily Change the operation of specific ladder block temp
351. nitial Valu S s 0 6 6 346645 6564 i0 es cu Getebtdeas bee betwee ie tie tenet eetde wenden ae 197 8 2 Configuration of Device Initial Value Editor 00 cc es 197 8 3 setting Device Initial Value S 0 6 6s cedcaenee code ds beeen ewe Ed ERRORS EE ee eee ees oo ee 198 CHAPTER9Y SEARCHING DATA 200 9 1 Searching Replacing Devices Labels vcas ic6s o60 cneaeeenea soe ae aeeee soo Cee ee wee 202 9 2 Searching Replacing Instructions 0 0 es 204 9 3 Searching Replacing Character StringS 0 0 cee nn nnna nnnn 205 9 4 Changing Contacts Between Open Contact and Close Contact 0 000 ccc ee 207 9 5 Batch Replacing of Devices and Labels 0 c cee es 208 9 6 Displaying Reference Information List of Devices Labels 0 0 0 ccc ee 209 Creating displaying cross reference information n a aana naaa aaa ee eee ee ees 210 9 7 Displaying Device Usage List 0 cc es 212 CHAPTER 10 SEGMENTING PROGRAMS 213 10 1 Creating Function BIOCKS o i c2400 2400504644 2000eonos0040400054406 802 A ee eee et iw ees 214 FUNCIOM DIOCKS 3 c14e ae bate e beet eee eyed ce eds weet eee ee eee bee oe ee cede eee a 214 Creating function blocks 0 ccc eee eee teen eee eee eee eens 214 Enhanced use of module FBS 2 0 0 0 0c a 216 10 2 Creating Functions 0 cc es 217 FPUNICHONG eea gens ey ee ee aes E hee Dene ee ae AGEs eRe eee ne keaeede ee 217 Creating TUNCUONS oeie Se bees 6 ee ees ba ins
352. nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2014 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION 361 TRADEMARKS Microsoft Windows Windows Vista Windows NT Windows XP Windows Server Visio Excel PowerPoint Visual Basic Visual C and Access are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States Japan and other countries Intel Pentium and Celeron are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corp The SD and SDHC logos are either registered trademarks or trademarks of SD 3C LLC MODBUS is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric SA All other company names and product names used in this manual are either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies P 362 SH NA 081215ENG F 1507 MODEL GXW3 0 E MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPAN When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications subject to change without notice
353. nosing CPU Module U 8 Operate the system Safety project Start U 1 Create a project Start GX Works3 Create a new project Register user information Save the project Ks Page 27 Start K Page 61 Creating project K Page 305 User management K Page 69 Saving project 2 Set the parameters Setting the safety device label area is required KL Page 93 Setting Parameters 3 Create a program Create a Program Organization Unit POU Set an execution order and an execution type Set the global labels local labels Edit the program of each POU Perform conversion ks Page 72 Creating projects ks Page 121 Program execution order execution type settings ks Page 107 Registering Labels ks Page 123 Creating Ladder Programs Page 214 Creating Function Blocks Page 217 Creating Functions ks Page 184 Converting Programs 4 Connect a personal computer to a CPU module and set the connection destination 1 BEFORE USING THIS PRODUCT 1 3 Procedure from Project Creation to CPU Module Operation Page 235 SETTING ROUTE TO CPU MODULE U 5 Write parameters programs to the CPU module KL Page 250 Writing data to programmable controller U 6 Check the operation Test mode Monitor the execution status and device contents of the sequence program to check the operation Check the error occurrence in the CPU module KL Page 268 Check Execution Programs on Pr
354. nt gt Left Power Rail gt Add Element gt Pulse Contact Symbol gt Rising Pulse gt Add Element gt Pulse Contact Symbol gt Falling Pulse gt Add Element gt Pulse Contact Symbol gt Rising Pulse Branch gt Add Element gt Pulse Contact Symbol gt Falling Pulse Branch gt Add Element gt Pulse Contact Symbol gt Rising Pulse Close gt Add Element gt Pulse Contact Symbol gt Falling Pulse Close gt Add Element gt Pulse Contact Symbol gt Rising Pulse Close Branch gt Add Element gt Pulse Contact Symbol gt Falling Pulse Close Branch gt Add Element gt Open Contact and Coil gt Add Element gt Variable gt Add Element gt Connector gt Add Element gt Jump gt Add Element gt Jump Label gt Add Element gt Return gt Add Element gt Comment gt Change Name gt Change FB FUN Data gt Update FB FUN gt I O Argument gt Increment Argument gt I O Argument gt Delete Argument gt Easy Edit gt Invert Contact Open Close gt Easy Edit gt Switch Pulse gt Easy Edit gt Switch SET and RST gt Toolbar gt FBD LD gt Comment Display gt Grid Display gt Display Execution Order gt Open Label Setting of Selected Element gt Open in Front gt Open Label Setting of Selected Element gt Title Horizontally Open Program Body of Selected Element
355. nt screen On the element entry dialog On the Statement Note Batch Edit screen With the keyboard Precautions cannot be prefixed to a line statement 136 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 6 3 Creating Ladder Programs MELSEC iQ R Programming Manual Program Design MELSEC iQ F FX5 Programming Manual Program Design 1 Select Edit gt Documentation gt Statement ham 2 Select the cell and press the key or double click it 3 Enter a statement Before entering P statement I statement select the cell of a pointer number or interrupt pointer number CESSE CHUIS SSO rSn fon ms InPLC Line statement a eu eaters Press the ctil Enter keys to insert a line feed In Peripheral two characters are used in the cell F Di Aal 16Character 5000 Character Display in Navigation Window TRES When Display in Navigation Window is selected Title is added in front of the line statement After entering statements is completed select Edit gt Documentation gt Edit Statement F again 1 Select the cell and press the key 2 Enter a statement after entering for In PLC and for In Peripheral When displaying a statement on the Navigation window enter Title after or For P statement I statement enter a statement following the entry of the displayed pointer number or interrupt pointer number Sle Line statement 1 Select Edit gt D
356. ntelligent Function Module Monitor window Register Intelligent function modules using shortcut menu from Intelligent Function Module Monitor window 1 Onthe Intelligent Function Module Monitor window right click and select Register Module Information from the shortcut menu 2 Select the module to be registered in Module List and click the OK button When a positioning module is selected in Module List select the item displayed in Monitor Item Category List Poin tr The module information can be copied and pasted to a file such as a text file by right clicking the arbitrary module information and selecting Copy from the shortcut menu on the Intelligent Function Module Monitor window 14 CHECKING OPERATION OF PROGRAMS 283 14 7 Checking Current Values in Intelligent Function Module 14 8 Saving and Checking Device Value Check the device values of a CPU module at any timing using the Memory Dump function of the CPU module FX5CPU does not support this function By setting the trigger conditions the data at a time when the conditions have been satisfied are collected and saved to the SD memory card The saved device values can be checked with GX Workss3 For more details on the Memory Dump function of CPU module refer to the following manual LA MELSEC iQ R CPU Module User s Manual Application How to use the Memory Dump function 1 Set the internal buffer capacity of the CPU module to be used for the Memory Dum
357. ntents of utilized elements can be accessed O Available x Not available Item Description Operation for element Enable to read Unselected It is used to edit the contents of programs or labels when O e Disable editing POU for example distributing samples or guaranteeing the Change to read only operations by users attribute Selected To prevent from manipulation the contents of programs and x labels are opened but not editable Disable to read To prevent from leakage the programs are not opened x x The contents of labels including structures are opened but not editable Precautions The utilized elements from other library maintain the settings when it was utilized regardless of the reading availability set when they were exported Example When the read protected element A is utilized and elements including the element A are exported with the settings that enables to read That time the element A will be read protected Creating a library in GX Works3 format from a library in GX Works2 format Operating procedure 1 Select Project gt Open Other Format File gt GX Works2 Format gt Open User Library and specify the library to be converted into a GX Works3 project 2 Select the series on the confirmation screen displayed then click the OK button 3 Check the project after changing the module type then edit it if necessary 4 Export the project as a library file 220 10 SEGMENTING PROGRAMS
358. ntrol instructions When using a master control instruction in an FB program use the MC instruction and the MCR instruction together MWhen using function blocks for a sequence program to be executed multiple times in a single scan If a function block which contains a rising instruction falling instruction or an instruction that requires multiple scans before the execution completion is used in a Sequence program to be executed multiple times in a single scan the program may not operate normally Item Description Program type to be executed multiple times in a single scan e Fixed scan execution type program e Interrupt program e Subroutine program e FOR NEXT instruction program Unusable instructions for FBs which are used for above Instructions which require multiple scans before the execution completion programs JP READ JP WRITE instruction SORT instruction SP FREAD SP FWRITE instruction etc Rising instruction OP instruction such as MOVP instruction PLS etc Falling instruction PLF LDF ANDF ORF MEF FCALLP EFCALLP etc 10 SEGMENTING PROGRAMS 21 10 1 Creating Function Blocks s Enhanced use of module FBs In GX Works3 Module FB which is composed of the segmented processing for each module function block is prepared By using the module FBs the operation settings can easily be performed without programming the processing of each module Note that the module FBs cannot be used in safety programs Impor
359. o Mol MS HE a A ds el IG B S S BID RRR TEL AAR Ee eS Write X 1 2 3 4 S 6 7 8 F A Connection Instruction Output Instruction Shift Instruc tion Master Control Instruction Termination Instruction Comparison Operation Instruction Arithmetic Operation Instruction Data Transfer Instruction Logical Operation Instruction Data Shift Instruction Application Instruction Program Branch Instruction Program Execution Control Instruction G gt Rotation Instruction Data Processing Instruction Drag and drop String Processing Instruction Data Control Instruction File Register Operation Instruction T ia Clock Instruction aH El aX at nie a S EA Watch 1 E Drag a dockable window to the guidance A new tab appears after the window is docked e Floating display Drag the title bar of a docked window and drop it to the arbitrary position to float from the main frame WEDocking floating work windows e Docked display Select the floating work window and select Window gt Docking e Floating display Select the docked work window and select Window gt Floating Point Docked windows can be switched between the docked display and the floating display by double clicking the title bar 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS 2
360. ocumentation gt Statement Note Batch Edit 5a 2 Enter a statement Line Statement P Statement Statement Note O e Step Line Statement ea A Title Line statement None In PLC Statement Note In Peripheral Statement Note Edit Type InPLE In Peripheral Rovt daa Add R Display Add Row Ladder Display in Navigation Window i Move Find Insert Row button Inserts a row above the cursor position Add Row button Inserts a row below the cursor position 1 Select the cell of a statement and press the key 2 Enter a statement directly HEditing statements After editing a statement the program will be in the unconverted state MDisplaying list Display the line statements used in the ladder program in a list The cursor is moved to the location where the selected line statement is used HiLine statement to be displayed in the tree Select a line statement and select Edit gt Document gt Show Hide of Navigation Window to switch display hide the line statement on the Navigation window When copying deleting the line statement displayed in the tree the ladder blocks before the next line statement in the tree are copied deleted Double click a line statement in the tree to move the cursor to the corresponding ladder block t Project Ei Module Configuration E u Program Ek Initial m Wit Scan m MAIN
361. odify gt Device gt Modify gt Switch between Jump Symbol and Connection Line gt Insert gt Step gt Insert gt Transition gt Insert gt Action gt Insert gt Jump gt Insert gt Selection Branch gt Insert gt Simultaneous Branch gt Insert gt Selection Branch Leg gt Insert gt Simultaneous Branch Leg gt Insert FBD LD Element gt Left Power Rail gt Insert FBD LD Element gt Open Contact gt Insert FBD LD Element gt Close Contact gt Insert FBD LD Element gt Open Branch gt Insert FBD LD Element gt Close Branch gt Insert FBD LD Element gt Pulse Contact Symbol gt Rising Pulse gt Insert FBD LD Element gt Pulse Contact Symbol gt Falling Pulse gt Insert FBD LD Element gt Pulse Contact Symbol gt Rising Pulse Branch gt Insert FBD LD Element gt Pulse Contact Symbol gt Falling Pulse Branch gt Insert FBD LD Element gt Pulse Contact Symbol gt Rising Pulse Close gt Insert FBD LD Element gt Pulse Contact Symbol gt Falling Pulse Close gt Insert FBD LD Element gt Pulse Contact Symbol gt Rising Pulse Close Branch gt Insert FBD LD Element gt Pulse Contact Symbol gt Falling Pulse Close Branch gt Insert FBD LD Element gt Variable gt Insert FBD LD Element gt Connector gt Insert FBD LD Element gt Comment gt I O Argument gt Incre
362. of the programs can be permitted Only one security key can be written to either a CPU module or an extended SRAM cassette FX5CPU does not support an extended SRAM cassette Additionally one security key can be written to multiple CPU modules When writing a security key create a key on the Security Key Management screen and connect a personal computer and CPU module in advance Writing deleting can be performed when a CPU module is n STOP state only For a safety project the security key can be written deleted when the safety operation mode of RNSFCPU is in the test mode Window Project gt Security gt Security Key Setting Security Key Setting Security Key Management i Transfer Setup YS Select the security key to use j ped eusuoesess sssescede sussuececous osessseacesssecesesuscssscsesssssecossonsecses Name K line A Creation Date 5 30 2014 4 34 50 PM Project CPU Select the write target of security key Write Destination Key Name Creation Date M CPUModule Body O0 Extended SRAM Cas ally Connected Device Information Data Key Name Creation Date Program Memory LI fProcramrie L mn Writing security key Operating procedure 1 Select the security key to be written from Name 2 Select the target to be written in the CPU tab and click the Write button MWhen a security key is written to an extended SRAM cassette W
363. ogram Editor KL Page 314 Diagnosing CPU Module U 7 Switch the safety operation modes Check whether the written project is correct Switch it the safety mode K Page 329 Check Safety Data Identity Ks Page 327 Switch Safety Operation Mode UU 8 Operate the system 1 BEFORE USING THIS PRODUCT 1 3 Procedure from Project Creation to CPU Module Operation 23 24 1 4 Learning Operation Method of GX Works3 This section explains how to learn the operation methods of GX Workss3 Displaying Help Open the Help to learn about operations and functions and check the error codes of a CPU module Operating procedure Select Help gt GX Works3 Help e Manual Viewer starts and a manual is displayed Find Help function Enter a character string in on the toolbar and press the Enter key to start searching in the e Manual Viewer The entered character string can be searched in the manuals which have been registered in the e Manual Viewer Help of instructions FBs and special relays special registers The corresponding location in the manual can be displayed from each program editor or screen Program editor e Place the cursor on the instruction ladder editor the cell with the instruction ST editor the character string of the instruction press the key e Place the cursor on the element on the FBD LD editor and press the key e Place the cursor on the FB cell on the ladder editor and press the ke
364. ogram name 2 2 13 WRITING READING DATA TO CPU MODULE 9 13 1 Writing Reading Programmable Controller Data Device comment After setting device comments write Common Device Comment or Each Program Device Comment For FX5CPU each program device comment cannot be written to CPU module MSetting range to be written Set the range of Common Device Comment Each Program Device Comment to be written to a CPU module on the Device Comment Detail Setting screen displayed by clicking the Detailed button of Common Device Comment or Each Program Device Comment Set this setting to limit the writing range of device comments in cases such as when the CPU module has small free capacity When the range of device comments is not set all device comments are written Item Description Number of characters per 1 Set the maximum number of comments to be written to a CPU module comment When the character length of an input value is less than the number of characters of device comment set for the project the device comment with less number of characters is written to a CPU module Therefore mismatched data may be detected when verifying project data Precautions When the sample comments are read to device comments all the sample comments are written to the CPU module Therefore the data size to be written may exceed the memory capacity of the CPU module In this case perform any of the following operations e Delete the device comments of
365. ogramming Manual Program Design Poin tr Press the ctrl lsri E keys to enter an assignment operator Precautions When an ST editor is set to read only or monitoring the program cannot be edited Inserting instructions functions and control syntaxes Instructions functions and control syntaxes can be entered by entering text using keyboard or by dragging and dropping them The input control syntaxes operators devices and TRUE FALSE are changed to the upper case characters automatically Labels can be entered with aliases Specification method for data type of device Normally the data type of a word device is handled as INT Word Signed on the ST editor By adding a suffix that indicates data type type specifier to a device name the devices in which 32 bit integer or real number is stored can be described directly in the operation formula without defining labels For details refer to the following manual MELSEC iQ R Programming Manual Program Design 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 14 6 4 Creating ST Programs 7 Inserting function blocks Insert a function block to an ST program For the creation methods of a program in a function block refer to the following section K Page 214 Creating Function Blocks Operating procedure 1 Drag and drop a function block to an arbitrary position on an ST editor from the Project view or Element Selection window 2 Enter the information of a label FB instance
366. om label editor Labels can be added to Favorites 1 Selecta line header of the label to be added and drag and drop it onto the Element Selection window 2 Select the registration destination on the Register to Favorites screen and click the OK button MAdding templates classified by purpose GX Works3 provides templates Category by Target Template that are categorized by purpose to which register the arbitrary elements as a favorite in batch By deleting unnecessary elements after registering the templates the elements can be placed on efficiency 1 Select the Favorites tab on the Element Selection window 2 Select ai from the tool bar gt Import Favorites gt Category by Target Template in the Element Selection window Poin tr By importing the exported file xml the elements registered as favorite can be used on other personal computer Select i7 on the toolbar gt Export Favorites Import Favorites History By selecting the History tab the previously used elements are displayed in order of the date used The display order can be changed in order of the number of times used from the pulldown list Module By selecting the Module tab the module labels and the module FBs which have been registered in the project are displayed For details on how to register module labels and module FBs refer to the following section K Page 115 Registering Module Labels Page 216 Importing module FBs in project
367. on Memory Dump File Name C DEBUGSMEMDUMP_16 DPD Date 2014 09 25 15 34 45 Program File Trigger Condition Device File Register File Name Trigger Information Enter the path for the memory dump result file to be displayed in Memory Dump File Name e To specify a local device for Device Name select the program file to be referred in Program File e To specify R or ZR for Device Name select the file register to be referred in File Register File Name When R is specified the device for the first block is displayed e To specify Z or LZ for Device Name select the program file to be referred in Program File 14 CHECKING OPERATION OF PROGRAMS 2 14 8 Saving and Checking Device Value 87 14 9 Checking Sampled Data on Program Editor Use the offline monitor function to check the sampled data memory dump result file from a CPU module on the program editor By using this function it is possible to reproduce the sampled data on the program editor from a remote location and investigate the causes when error occurs Open the program editor to be monitored in advance For the methods for sampling data refer to the following section K Page 284 Saving and Checking Device Value Window Debug gt Offline Monitor f Offline Monitor ea fq Start Monitoring Sq Stop Monitoring Previous Sy Next Selected File Information File Name MEMDUMP_00 DPD Last Change 5 13 2015 4 25 32 PM
368. on element and function block element this follows the operation for double clicking which is selected from Tool gt option gt Program Editor gt FBD LD Editor Replacing function elements function block elements Operating procedure 1 Select a function element function block element 2 Select Edit gt Change FB FUN Data and enter the data type to be changed Point The element also can be replaced by dragging an element from the Element Selection window and dropping it on the element to be changed For function elements similarly the data type can be changed by selecting a function element and entering a new data type directly Adding deleting arguments Only for functions of which number of arguments can be changed the arguments can be added deleted Operating procedure 1 Move the cursor on a function element 2 Select Edit gt I O Argument gt Increment Argument Delete Argument 2 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 1 6 5 Creating FBD LD Programs D9 Updating undefined FBs FUNs When a definition of a pasted element is unsure due to its deletion or change or an element without the definition information is pasted it is displayed as shown below resulting in an error Select Edit gt Update FB FUN and update the definition information When the data type of FB FUN has been changed select Edit gt Update FB FUN Adjusting position automatically The position is automatically adjusted to
369. on of FB files and FUN files Creating function data Create a function data in the project on the New Data screen Item Description Detail Setting Use EN ENO Yes Become a function with EN ENO EN ENO labels can be used in the project without registering in the local labels For details on EN ENO refer to the following manuals LA MELSEC iQ R Programming Manual Program Design LA MELSEC iQ F FX5 Programming Manual Program Design Become a function with EN ENO FUN File of Add Destination Select a storage destination file of a function to be created The storage destination files can be created by entering file name directly Setting labels Set the labels to be used in the program on the label editor The operations on the screen is the same as that of other label editor For details refer to the following section K Page 107 Registering Labels Operating procedure Select FB FUN gt file name gt Function gt Local Label on the Project view 10 SEGMENTING PROGRAMS 21 10 2 Creating Functions 7 Creating function programs Create a program of a function using labels The labels set to the local label of the function can be used The method for entering programs is same as that of each program Operating procedure 1 Select Project view gt FB FUN gt file name gt function gt Program 2 Configure the programs Converting functions e Functions POUs will not be in the converte
370. on retries Decrease the transmission speed if high speed communication cannot be performed normally MResume function suspend setting power saving function and standby mode of the personal computer A communication error may occur during communication with the CPU module when any of the settings shown above are enabled Disable these settings for communication with the CPU module 12 SETTING ROUTE TO CPU MODULE 24 12 8 Considerations of Communication with CPU module 7 1 3 WRITING READING DATA TO CPU MODULE This section explains the operations for writing reading data to from a CPU module or memory card and verifying projects For the methods for writing the clock setting to a CPU module refer to the following section KL Page 325 Setting Clock in CPU Module 13 1 Writing Reading Programmable Controller Data Write the created data to read from a CPU module or a memory card on the Online Data Operation screen Configuration of Online Data Operation screen Window Online gt Write to PLC Read from PLC Delete PLC Data The example of writing data is shown below Online Data Operation Display Setting Related Functions Parameter Program E Select All Legend Open Close AIT Deselect All N CPU Built in Memory E SD Memory Card Intelligent Function Module Module Name Data Name Detail Last Change Size Byte Untitled Project o Parameter F
371. on screen Operation Block Each program editor including a Zoom Change the current value TRUE FALSE of BLO Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor Watch window Step SFC diagram editor Select a step then select Debug gt Control SFC Step gt Activate the Selected Step Deactivate the Selected Step Activate the Selected Step Only Zoom Change the current value TRUE FALSE of SO or BLOSO Each program editor excluding a Zoom Change the current value TRUE FALSE of BLO SO A Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor Watch window Blocks steps can be activated by changing the current values of labels which were assigned BLO SO or BLO Precautions Note that the control of a CPU module is affected by activating deactivating steps blocks Changing current values device label Current values of the following devices labels can be changed on an SFC diagram during monitoring Select a device label and press the Init Erter keys e Bit devices bit type labels of transitions actions on the SFC diagram editor e Bit devices bit type labels of FBD LD elements connected to transition The methods for changing current values of devices labels in a Zoom is same as the one of each program editor For SO BLO SO BLO refer to the following section K Page 273 Changing active status Monitoring SFC block list Display current block information on an SFC block list Select View gt Open SFC Block List then open an SFC block
372. on the Undefined Label Registration screen 3 Enter the values for the input variables and output variables When the defined function block is MYTIMER Details of defined function block Label name FB_MYTIMER Input variable Setting value_1_ second Setting value_10 seconds Setting value_100 seconds Start Stop Output variable In_operation Timer_up_1 Timer_up 2 The example of entering ST program are shown below Label name Input variable Device that assigns a value to an input variable aa a FB_MYTIMER Setting_value_1_second X0 Setting_value_10_seconds X1 Setting_value_100_seconds X2 Start X3 Stop X4 In_operation gt Y70 Timer_up_1 gt Y71 Timer_up 2 gt Y72 Output variable Device that assigns a value to an output variable The output of the function block can be obtained by specifying the output variable name with a period suffixed to the function block name Enter an instruction to obtain the output after performing the function block call Y70 FB_MYTIMER In operation Inserting functions Insert a function in an ST program For the creation methods of FUN programs refer to the following section K Page 217 Creating Functions Operating procedure 1 Drag and drop a function to an arbitrary location on the ST editor from the Project view or Element Selection window 2 Enter the arguments Inserting indention A tab is inserted as an indentation at the head of a new
373. onding setting items on the parameter editor by double clicking a parameter in a table Exporting data to file Export the data displayed on the Verify Result screen to a file Operating procedure Select Edit gt Export to File i 3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 3 5 Verifying Projects 79 80 3 6 Project Revision Register the project revision and manage the revision information The old project status can be restored using the registered revision information Registering revision information Back up the project and register it with adding the revision information Window Project gt Project Revision gt Register Revision Register Revision Ea Register the following information as revisions PC Type ROS User Version LOLOL Title Title 4 Comment C Operating procedure Set the items and click the OK button 3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 3 6 Project Revision Displaying revision list Window Project gt Project Revision gt Revision List A a Revision List Sc Revision List L No Date User Title Version 3 18 2015 3 32 05 PM 2 3 18 2015 2 50 32 PM Title 4 1 010L Number of Items 2 Register R Restore E J l Delete D l Verify Select and right click on the revision information then select Details in the shortcut menu The Detailed Revision Information screen is displayed so check the information such a
374. onitor CH1 Range Setting Monit 4 to 20mA UO G430 Word Unsigned Bit String 16 Bit yCH2 Range Setting Monit 4 to 20mA UO G630 Word Unsigned Bit String 16 Bit Operating procedure 1 Register an Intelligent function module to be monitored Registering Intelligent function modules 2 Select Online gt Watch gt Start Watching Watching is added on the Watch window title during monitoring Poin tr Select and right click the module information select Copy from the shortcut menu to paste it to a text file Customizing monitoring items Select and right click the items on the Intelligent Function Module Monitor window then select Cut Copy Paste Delete from the shortcut menu to customize the items If the customized project is saved the customized items will not be retained when the project is opened next time The customized items cannot be restored again Precautions The cut copied items can only be pasted to the same project in the same window MDetailed display of history information Display the details of history information during monitoring Double click a Data Type row in which Detailed Dialog is displayed or right click it and select Detailed Dialog from the shortcut menu The unsupported menus for the module cannot be used Detailed display of error codes alarm codes Display the details of an error code alarm code on the Intelligent Function Module Monitor windows or
375. oo at Sa EES S d RT Sa Ose dda te han 237 USS COnN ETON 2 2 405545eee seer ee ees ee eee eee Pee ee ee oe ek oe obese ee Soka ee 237 BineiielCONMeCCICh oie seiss es arrr eee dees eee ae ee oad sb hee eee oad RERE a E O ean 237 Seral connec hO espia E wee E E oe ee AER A EREA EE bee 239 12 3 Accessing via Network Single Network 000 c cece eee es 240 12 4 Accessing via Network Co existence Network 200 cece eee es 241 12 5 Accessing via Serial Communication Module 0 0c cee ees 242 Connection on a 1 1 DaSIS t2ceo05 obs eeGheeeaneu dhenGateeveardbeacivaseuae bed edes ou axe oe ee 242 Connection ona tN DdslSantg a eee eee ae oe eee ey eee oe eS ore ee oe oe ee oe See oe ee aoe 243 12 6 Accessing via GOT GOT Transparent Function 000 eee es 244 Accesso Via GOV oi cos cesses oe oes Go bees Coe eee eee oe oe Ge Bee os de ee es so eeeeeee es 244 ACCESSING Vie IMOGUNG 2 2 4 5 4 ac4ce aces ooh 3 oe ee weg ob 32S 4 ee eee ee ne oS ee eee Re oo Seek 244 12 7 Accessing to Multiple CPU System 0 0 es 245 12 8 Considerations of Communication with CPU module 00 0 eee es 247 CHAPTER 13 WRITING READING DATA TO CPU MODULE 248 13 1 Writing Reading Programmable Controller Data 0 ce es 248 Configuration of Online Data Operation Screen 0 eee ee eens 248 Writing data to programmable controller 0 0 eee eee 250 Reading data from programmable controller 0 0 0 0
376. or Operation Related Setting of the CPU parameter it may be different from the time on the personal computer in use Error information Display the error history registered to the diagnostic target module in the Error Information tab MDisplay content The displayed information will differ depending on the module e CPU module Up to 16 current errors will be displayed in the chronological order The 17th and subsequence errors are not displayed e Other than CPU module Up to 16 current errors are displayed If the same error as already displayed error code occurred the display content is not updated For the errors of Q series module occurrence date is not displayed 14 16 DIAGNOSING MODULE 3 16 2 Diagnosing CPU Module MError jump Click the Error Jump button to jump to the selected error item Programs function blocks and each parameter are applicable for the Jump function A jump to parameters is available for the items supported by the Error jump function The supported items differ depending on the module For inline structured text on ladder editor the cursor will jump to the head line of the inline structured text regardless of the line that error occurs Precautions In the following conditions an error may not be found at the error jump destination e When the open project does not match with the data on the CPU module e When diagnosing programmable controller other than the one set as a connection destination
377. orarily Using the temporary changing function the program for debugging can be changed without losing the source program therefore the debug process will be improved efficiently When opening the project which contains the temporarily changed ladder program in GX Works2 Version 1 008J or earlier the background color of disabled ladder block is not changed Besides the Apply the Changes operation and the Restore the Changes operation can not be performed Temporary changing 1 Select the ladder block to be changed and then select Edit gt Temporarily Change Ladders gt Temporarily Change Ladders 2 Enter the pointer to be used When specifying a label for pointer create the label in advance Peripheral statement JMP instruction Pointer NOPLF instruction are inserted automatically as shown below and the selected ladder block is disabled Besides the copy of ladder block is created immediately below the disabled ladder block Target ladder block to be changed tmpPointer 4 M2 7 In Peripheral Statement is inserted automatically man JMP instruction is inserted automatically l Disabled ladder block n a Copy of target ladder block to be changed T emporaryM odit M Y _ s Ss NOPLF instruction is inserted automatically 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 141 6 3 Creating Ladder Programs 3 Edit the copied ladder block a sasenennensensnasanennsenens encansns
378. order of packing blocks When a structure is declared in the member of structure it will be assigned in a packing block according to the order noted previously It will be assigned from the start position of 64 bit address boundary Data Type Sau P A age on a ar Re a STRUCT1 a Name Data Type Var Word2 Word Unsigned Bit String 16 bit f ah Double Word Signed ae Word Unsigned Bit String 16 bit fe eee It is assigned from the beginning of the 64 bit address boundary Assignment of timer retentive timer counter Timer retentive timer counter Timer type retentive timer type and counter type are the maker defined structures that have the same data type as MELSEC 16 bit timer device T bit retentive timer device ST and bit counter device C The member configurations of each data type are as follows Timer rr E E The same operation as the contact TS of the timer device The same operation as the coil TC of the timer device a The same operation as the current value TN of the timer device The same operation as the contact STS of the retentive timer device The same operation as the coil STC of the retentive timer device Word Unsigned Bit String 16 bit The same operation as the current value STN of the retentive timer device Bit type The same operation as the contact CS of the counter device Bit type The same operation as the coil
379. ormance of the personal computer The simulation time gains in accordance with the actual time when the actual time takes longer than the simulation time Operation of fixed cycle execution program The program is executed in accordance with the simulation time The timer and the fixed cycle interrupt are the same 100ms elapsed END 200ms elapsed END 300ms elapsed END 400ms elapsed END Reference from reference processing from reference processing from reference processing from reference processing time time time time Fixed scan program A 200ms cycle Fixed scan program B 200ms cycle gt Handling of floating point A rounding error may occur in the operation result of an instruction using floating point The result will not the same as that of a CPU module Module m i O module Simulation of the operation does not support I O module intelligent function module The buffer memory for Intelligent function module is reserved by the system parameter setting I O Assignment Setting The buffer memory UO GD cannot be accessed when the I O Assignment Setting is not configured By selecting an Intelligent function module as the module type and setting the number of points in the I O Assignment Setting the buffer memory according to the specified number of points is created If the module type is not specified it becomes an empty slot lf the module type is specified but the number of point is not specified the specified number
380. ort File gt Export to File gt System Label gt Reservation to Register System Label gt System Label gt Reservation to Release System Label gt System Label gt Import System Label gt System Label gt Reflect to System Label Database 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS 2 4 Menu List Page 108 Editing rows Page 114 Importing exporting files Page 117 Registering labels in system label database Page 117 Releasing system labels Page 117 Importing system labels in system label database to GX Works3 Page 117 Registering labels in system label database gt System Label gt Check the changes of the System Label Database gt System Label gt Execute Verification Synchronous with System Label gt Copy Device Comment gt Delete Blank Rows gt Toolbar gt Label gt Show Hide of Label Item gt Display Program Editor ce memory editor Page 118 Importing the changes of system label database Page 118 Verifying system label information Page 113 Copying device comments Page 108 Moving a row upward gt Delete gt Enter Character String gt Clear All All Devices gt Clear All Displayed Devices FILL gt Register Import Device Initial Value gt Display Format Detailed Setting vice comment editor gt Delete gt Select All gt Detect the Mismatched Comment gt Read from Sample Comment
381. ot Specified e Double click the items underlined on the screen to set the details of each item e The icons colored yellow indicate that the settings have been applied e For FXSCPU the icons of the unsettable connection destination route are not displayed _ Displayed items Item Description Other No Specification Specify this to access the CPU module directly connected to a personal computer Station Other Station Single Specify this to access the CPU module on other station via only one kind of network including a multi tier Network 7 system Since Ethernet is regarded as equivalent to CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network and MELSECNET 10 H specify Single Network for a system in which those are mixed Setting Other Station Co existence Specify this to access the CPU module on other station via two kinds of network Network i 12 SETTING ROUTE TO CPU MODULE 2 12 1 Specification of Connection Destination 35 Network Communication Route Select the network type network number station number and start I O number of the network that is routed for accessing the CPU module on other station The setting items differ depending on the selected network type Co existence Network Route Select the network type network number station number and start I O number of the network to access The setting items differ depending on the selected network type Target System Specify the access target in the mul
382. p function Page 284 Setting internal buffer capacity for the Memory Dump function 2 Write the memory dump setting file Page 285 Writing memory dump settings Once it is written the memory dump result file is saved to SD memory card when the set trigger conditions are satisfied 3 Read the memory dump result file to the personal computer Page 286 Reading memory dump results 4 Check the read memory dump result file Page 287 Displaying memory dump results Setting internal buffer capacity for the Memory Dump function Set the internal buffer memory capacity for the Memory Dump function using Internal Buffer Capacity Setting in Memory Device Setting of the CPU parameter Write the parameter to the CPU module after the setting is configured However set the capacity within the range that meets the following conditions when the Memory Dump function is used in conjunction with the data logging function and the realtime monitor function of CPU module The total of data logging buffer capacities Memory dump buffer capacity Realtime monitor buffer capacity lt 3072KB Each buffer capacity can be checked with the following e Data logging buffer capacity Memory dump buffer capacity CPU parameter e Realtime monitor buffer capacity The realtime monitor setting of GX LogViewer 284 14 CHECKING OPERATION OF PROGRAMS 14 8 Saving and Checking Device Value Writing memory dump settings Once the memory dump setting f
383. p relay with a block specification BLO SD 21 2 9 SEARCHING DATA 9 7 Displaying Device Usage List 1 0 SEGMENTING PROGRAMS Segmenting a processing program which is used repeatedly in programs into elements the elements can be utilized in sequence programs The efficient program development reduces program errors thus the program quality will be improved Segmented program file is referred to as POU K Page 58 Data configuration Besides multiple POUs can be collected into a separate file from a project The file is referred to as a library POUs Two types of POU are able to utilize repeatedly function blocks and functions Function block Function block is a program component POU created by segmenting a program which outputs an operation result in accordance with a value of the internal memory and an input value into components It is classified into the following three types Function block A function block which is created from a program using the labels which are defined as Page 214 Creating Function User created input labels internal labels and output labels Blocks Standard function block A function block which can be used in general It is prepared in GX Works3 in advance Page 32 Element Selection window Module FB A function block which is created by segmenting a dedicated processing for modules It Page 216 Enhanced use of is prepared in GX Works3 in advance module FBs Function Function is a program
384. pace name folder l l 3 workspacelist xml l l 4 projectlist xml l 5 GX Works3 project file Same format as single file format l e ee l M M M l ee ee When editing configurations or names Do not change or delete workspace configurations or project names by using an application such as Windows Explorer The projects that do not contain actual data may remain in a project list of the function such as the Open Project function Select Project gt Delete to delete the project When copying a project For copying a project using Windows Explorer perform either of the following operations The configuration of workspace project will not be collapsed e Copy the entire save destination folder 1 above e Copy the target workspace name folder 2 above and workspacelist xml 3 above e Copy the GX Works3 project file that has the same name Single file format Single file format is a format that does not need a workspace Projects can be managed without being aware of the folder configuration and the file configuration by saving projects in the single file format Thereby operations such as changing project names copying and pasting projects and sending and receiving data can easily be performed using an application such as Windows Explorer Backup of safety project Back up safety projects by a system administrator and save the data securely so that they can be restored when required Make sure to b
385. parameter consistency can be ensured between MELSOFT Navigator and GX Works3 The operation is performed with MELSOFT Navigator For details refer to the HELP of MELSOFT Navigator 4 CREATING MODULE CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM AND SETTING PARAMETERS 1 1 4 2 Setting Parameters 0 4 3 Other settings of Intelligent function module The settings except for the parameter setting of the Intelligent function module can be configured with a module tool or a dedicated tool Setting by module tool L 3 of set ing function MMELSEC iQ R series Analog input module Offset gain setting MELSEC iQ R Analog Digital Converter Module User s Manual Startup Analog output module Offset gain setting MELSEC iQ R Digital Analog Converter Module User s Manual Startup Create wave output data Temperature input module Offset gain setting MELSEC iQ R Channel Isolated Thermocouple Input Module Channel Isolated RTD Input Module User s Manual Startup Temperature control module Temperature trace MELSEC iQ R Temperature Control Module User s Manual Startup Pulse I O positioning module Preset MELSEC iQ R High Speed Counter Module User s Manual Application Positioning monitor MELSEC iQ R Positioning Module User s Manual Application Positioning test MMELSEC iQ F series MELSEC iQ F FX5 User s Manual Analog Control Analog input offset gain setting Analog adapter module Analog output offset gain setting HQ seri
386. pecify elements of array 234 11 SIMULATING PROGRAM 11 3 External Device Operation Simulation 12 SETTING ROUTE TO CPU MODULE This chapter explains how to set the connection destination for accessing a CPU module from GX Works3 12 1 Specification of Connection Destination This section explains how to set communication routes including the interfaces both the personal computer and CPU module and the routing networks for accessing a CPU module on the Specify Connection Destination screen The module type of a project must be set to that of the CPU to be accessed Window Online gt Specify Connection Destination No specification Other stations PC side I F i FA Serial CC IE Cont CC Link Ethernet CC IE Field iQ R Series USB NET 10 H Board Board Bus USB r F A PLC CC IE Cont CC Link Ethernet C24 GOT CCIE Field Module NET 10 H Module Module Master Local Module Module a Connection Chafinel List Ii No Specification Other Station Other Station 7 Single Network Co existence Network CPU Modul Direct Coupled Setting Connection Test Time Out Sec 30 Retry Tyfes 0 PLC Type ication oe CCIE Cont CCIE Field Ethernet CC Link C24 NET 10 H System Image Co existence Network Route CCIECont CCIEField Ethernet C24 NET 10 H Accessing Host Station Mule CU Seting Spectr Redundant PU x e Ti tPLC caa Je 1 2 3 4 N
387. perform the following operations by writing parameters in a CPU module e Initial setting The parameters of the individual Intelligent function module data are set as an initial setting The data is registered to the CPU module parameters and written to the Intelligent function module automatically when the CPU module turns to the RUN state e Auto refresh For the buffer memory of an Intelligent function module set to auto refresh the data is written to read from the specified devices automatically when the END instruction is executed on the CPU module Window Project gt Intelligent Function Module gt Module Parameter List e Select Parameter gt Module Information on the Project view and right click and select Module Parameter List from the shortcut menu odule Parameter List Module Parameter Setting Status F Auto Refresh Setting Count a Ee lessee Sea SE Transfer to Intelligent Function Module Transfer to CPU 0000 RD62D2 W Setting Exist 6 v No Setting Setting Exist 4 0010 RD75P4 V Setting Exist 17 V No Setting Setting Exist 4 E Initial Setting Total Counts Auto Refresh Setting Total Counts 23 Max 4096 8 Max 2048 Explanation Check the setting status of the module and switch yvalid invalid of module parameter if necessary Checked items will be created as module parameter 4 CREATING MODULE CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM AND SETTING PARAMETERS 99
388. perform them on the Online Data operation screen in file units 1 96 7 SETTING DEVICE MEMORY 7 4 Writing Reading Data to from CPU Module S SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES This chapter explains how to set the device initial values 8 1 About Device Initial Values The device initial value managed by GX Workss3 is a data that can be read from write to the device in a CPU module For details of device initial values refer to the following manuals LA MELSEC iQ R CPU Module User s Manual Application LA MELSEC iQ F FX5 User s Manual Application Applicable devices For devices that can be set on the Device Initial Value editor refer to the following section KL Page 337 Applicable Devices in GX Works3 Writing device initial values to global devices local devices Device initial value does not distinguish the global device and local device Write device initial values to each device in a CPU module by the following methods FX5CPU does not support local devices e Global device Create device initial value data with a different name from the one for the program file and write it to a CPU module e Local device Create device initial value data with a same name as the one for the program file and write it to a CPU module The devices which cannot be used as local devices are not written even when they are set to device initial values 8 2 Configuration of Device Initial Value Editor The configuration of the Device
389. plains how to set the devices and device values Precautions e If a deletion is executed after selecting a cell the device value is cleared to 0 e When performing the copy paste operation on the Device Memory editor the result is as follows The value is pasted in a 16 bit integer signed or decimal format string delimited by tab and displayed with the format of the editor to be pasted e The entering method by prefixing to a device name to regard it as a local device is not supported Select Global Label or Local Label when reading device memory from the CPU module Setting device values in units of points Set a device and device value in units of points Set the following value in a word multi point format Device D2 Device value 12 Operating procedure 1 Setthe display format Page 192 Setting display format MAIN Device Memory Device Name D2 v Detailed Conditions S 2 Enter D2 in Device Name Device Name D2 i 3 Enter 12 to the device D2 D10 a 0 0 0 7 0 D18 Point When the display unit format is bit the device value can be changed by double clicking a cell 7 SETTING DEVICE MEMORY 1 93 7 3 Setting Device Memory Setting values in batch Set the same value to consecutive devices Set the following values in a word multi point format Device D8 to D11 Device value 1234 mQperating procedure 1 Setthe display format
390. ponding to the data type 3 FB instance name label It is used with an FB instance name assigned to each element For details on the element refer to the following section 4 Label comment Is Page 213 SEGMENTING PROGRAMS 5 Data type 6 Input output label VAR_IN_ OUT 7 Input output label other than VAR_IN_OUT 1 Input connection point 2 Output connection point Indicates a block for function corresponding to the data type 3 Data type The name is not displayed in the return value For details refer to the following section 4 Input output label argument I Page 213 SEGMENTING PROGRAMS 5 Return value Displaying hiding a comment is switched by the following option setting Tool gt Options gt Program Editor gt FBD LD Editor gt Comment gt Display Label Device Comment HCommon element For a jump element and a return element inverting contact on its connection point is not available Jump element Connector element p CONNECTOR Return element al RETURN lt 2 et E Comment element Comment 1 1 Input connection point 2 Label It is used to jump the execution processing from a jump element to a jump label element 1 Label Enter a label to be specified as the jump destination 1 Input connection point 2 Output connection point 3 Connector label It is used instead of a connector when pla
391. pply Nrite to Read from PLC function The created sequence programs can be written to read from a CPU module with the Write to PLC Read from PLC function In addition the sequence programs can be modified while the CPU module is in RUN state by the performing online program change function Writing data Reading data Vlonitor debug function Data such as device values during operation can be monitored by writing a created sequence program to a CPU module If a CPU module is not connected programs can be debugged by using the virtual programmable controller the Simulation function shift Enter Turning ON OFF by pressing the contact each time gt Programs can be monitored and debugged 1 BEFORE USING THIS PRODUCT 1 1 Main Functions of GX Works3 17 18 The current error status and the error history of the CPU module or the network can be diagnosed By using the Diagnostic function recovery work can be completed in a short time The detailed information of modules such as Intelligent function module can be obtained by using the System Monitor function This helps to shorten the recovery time when an error occurs Diagnosing the CPU module Module Diagnostics screen Supplementary Function Module Name Production information ROSCPU Ethernet diagnostics X Stop Monitoring Diagnosing the CPU module status Error Information Module Information Lis
392. ption While CPU is in RUN Printing data e Printing the product information list is supported Page 51 Printing Data Opening GX Works2 format e The automatic input of the start XY for I O assignment is Page 64 Opening GX Works2 projects supported format project The basic settings for I O assignment base power supply cable is succeeded e The device memory and device initial value are succeeded Interaction with iQ Works e The system label is supported Page 106 REGISTERING LABELS e The parameter reflection function of MELSOFT Navigator is supported Memory dump 2 e The Memory Dump function is supported Page 284 Saving and Checking Device Value Module tool list e Offset gain setting under Temperature Input for iQ R Series Page 102 Other settings of is supported Intelligent function module e Q61LD Two Point Calibration Setting under Analog Module for Q Series is supported e Q61LD Default Setting under Analog Module for Q Series is supported Diagnostics e The CC Link IE Controller Network diagnostics Twisted pair Page 317 CC Link IE Controller cable is supported Network diagnostics Version 1 007H Function Block Diagram e Function Block Diagram Ladder Diagram language is Page 151 Creating FBD LD Ladder Diagram language 2 supported Programs RnPCPU e RnPCPU RO8PCPU R16PCPU R32PCPU and R120PCPU is supported FX5CPU e FX5CPU FX5UCPU and FX5UCCPU is supported Simulation e T
393. ptions gt Program Editor gt Ladder Editor gt Enter Ladder gt Operational Setting For the check target instructions devices of duplicated coils refer to the following section KL Page 183 Check targets for duplicated coil Displaying MC MCR instructions When the MC instruction is inserted to a ladder program the double line symbol is displayed on the left vertical line As for MCR instruction the left vertical line is delimited M2 Automatically inserted after MC instruction nama is inserted Read only x0 Yo cm i Displayed after MCR instruction is entered a Entering comments statements notes This section explains the basic operations for editing comments statements and notes Entering editing comments Enter or edit a device label comment To check the entered comments on the ladder editor change the setting to display comments e View gt Comment Display The device comments edited or added on the ladder editor are reflected to the device comments set to the following option e Tool gt Options gt Project gt Device Comment Reference Reflection Target Entering editing method Operating procedure On the Input Device Comment 1 Select Edit gt Documentation gt Edit Device Label Comment 5 screen 2 Select the cell and press the Enter key or double click it 3 Enter a comment in the Comment column ic Input Device Comment Device Labe
394. r Setting Method Parameter Setting Method Settings Setting Method of Basic Setting and Application Setting Bev efresh Setting ation Settings upplementary Cyclic Settings terrupt Settings Bone arameter Name ynamic Routing i vent Reception from Other St fuan odule Operation Mode Parameter Editor E With errors MUDE RE E No settings required Black Gray Explanation Set station number of CC Link IE field network module a Setting Range 1 to 120 Master station is not required to set because O is fixed If Sub Master setting select the work by Host parameter please configure the Station No for master station by Network Configuration Setting Restore the Default Settings Apply Status icons Changed from default fa Error SA gt AL mi TE E Checkit ameters There are two methods for checking parameters e Check if there is an input error on the parameter editor Click the Check button on the parameter editor e Check if there is an error in the parameter set in the project Select Tool gt Check Parameter 4 CREATING MODULE CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM AND SETTING PARAMETERS 4 2 Setting Parameters Setting system parameters Set the parameters such as I O Assignment Setting Multiple CPU Setting and Synchronization Setting within the Modules that affect whole system FXSCPU does not support the Multiple CPU Setting and Synchroniz
395. r actions Each action has a different type The type can be checked on the Action Properties screen Creation method Operating procedure Type In a Zoom Create an action with a KL Page 172 Creating displaying Zooms action transition Detailed expression program On an SFC Use ON OFF of bit device bit Select an action then enter a bit device bit specified word device or a bit type Label device diagram type label as an action label in the action name Inserting editing jumps Minserting a jump Insertion position Method 1 Select a transition then select Edit gt Insert gt Jump EJ 2 Select a step name of jump destination 1 Select a transition then select Edit gt Modify gt Switch between Jump Symbol and Connection Line 2 Select a step name of jump destination All SFC diagram written below the inserted jump are deleted Changing a jump destination 1 Select the transition which is immediately before the jump then select Edit gt Modify gt Switch between Jump Symbol and Connection Line Alternatively select the jump and press the key 2 Select the step name of jump destination which is to be changed Switching a jump connection line Select a jump then select Edit gt Modify gt Switch between Jump Symbol and Connection Line To restore a connection line to a jump select the connection line then select Edit gt Modify gt Switch between Jump Symbol and Connection
396. r settingS 0 cc eee ee eee eee teenies 121 Program execution typeS ea s2es 5nd ends o S64 dunes DREW s LSSSE RS GRRE eRe eeu S44 Seu oe bee ee ds dae 122 6 3 Creating Ladder Programs sss 5 0 65 6505 3 00 05 6k Kee ee Te dene Be a a ee Se ee a a ade 123 Configuration of ladder editor 1 eee eee eens 123 Entering ladder programs 2424 4s500 4 ee eos be dw dee ewe ees ds HeGee weed ded Soden de ewedcegede nce 127 Entering comments statements notes 00 0 ee ee eee ee eens 135 Inserting deleting NOP instruction 2 0 0 0 eee eee eee eee 139 Copying pasting GlOMe NS lt 2 lt 2 e6004 4405444 ee aes bd oe shun dda ewe 268s da wae eee bie eee beeen ee 139 Changing ladder blocks temporarily 0 0 eee eee ee tees 141 Searching for replacing data in program 1 ee eee ee ees 143 Displaying instruction help 2 0 2 0 aaae eee eens 144 6 4 Creating ST Programs crescini tra whdan dt ee sd Owns eee bao e hee Ree ee 8a ee es 145 Coniguraton oro T COU 244 at ea hoe ete eo eee A ee eed Pe ee ne ed ee eee 145 EFIVOTING MOTAS s cise 2 ace Soe ee arent ote ded Soe ah Gs cs Sik le de Bosra ees BR Hew Beas Se Saeed UA See eee 147 Searching for replacing data in program 1 ee eee eee 150 Displaying instruction help icccseeceas 3426426 eeb ead de66ene ae Eee ss 42 6 6 o90 544565 R Ea 150 6 5 Creating FBD LD Programs oci 5 64 st es cen eS amp hee ede ae hee Roe eden ae ee 151 Configuration of FBD LD editor 0 0
397. rameter for MELSOFT connection is required For details refer to the following manual LA MELSEC iQ R Serial Communication Module User s Manual Application RJ71C24 RJ71C24 Station number 0 Station number 1 1 PC side I F Serial USB COM port COM1 Transmission Speed Transmission Speed 115 2Kbps 2 PLC side I F RJ71C24 Station No No mee ooo Parity Odd Sum Check Check Other Station Setting Other Station Single Network a at Communication Time 30 seconds Retry Times 0 time 3 Network Communication Route C24 Start I O Station No Ae z Direct connection of a CPU module The following shows the setting example for accessing the CPU module on other station via serial communication module by connecting a personal computer and CPU module directly RJ71C24 RJ71C24 Station number 0 Station number 1 1 PC side I F Serial USB USB 2 PLC side I F PLC Module PLC Mode RCPU Other Station Setting Other Station Single Network Check at Communication Time 30 seconds 3 Network Communication Route C24 Start I O 20 12 SETTING ROUTE TO CPU MODULE 243 12 5 Accessing via Serial Communication Module 12 6 Accessing via GOT GOT Transparent Function This section explains how to access the CPU module from GX Works3 via GOT using the GOT transparent function Precautions Considerations when performing online operations from GX Works3 Do not perform online operations from GT Designer2 or GT Des
398. range for the number of device points may differ between the CPU type of a project created with GX Works2 and a MELSEC iQ R series MELSEC iQ F series module When the value which has been set to the parameter cannot be set for MELSEC iQ R series MELSEC iQ F series modules it will be corrected to the value configurable by a MELSEC iQ R series module or it will be returned to the default value of MELSEC iQ F series after changing the module type Mincrease of the number of device points due to the differences in local device setting units Although the bit devices and word devices of local devices are set in one point units for Q series the bit devices word devices excluding T ST C and T ST C for MELSEC iQ R series are set in 64 point units 4 point units and 32 point units respectively Since the setting units are different between Q series and MELSEC iQ R series the CPU parameters are automatically changed after changing the module type resulting in the increase of the number of device points mMDevice name and label name display e For a device that has been set as the local device with GX Worksz2 is added in front of the device name e When a label used in GX Works2 has a name starting with M or P the of the label name is replaced with _ 3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 3 2 Creating Project File M Structured Ladder FBD program The execution order is handled differently between Structured Ladder Function Block Diagram language i
399. rched for in All Devices Labels column To specify the range to be searched select the search location of devices labels by clicking I on the tool bar Multiple selections allowed Press the key or double click or right click with selecting a row on the result list then select Jump from the shortcut menu The editor in which the devices labels are used opens and the corresponding devices labels are selected Poin tr Pressing the key c L moves the focus between the editor and the Cross Reference window Pressing the key le 1y rite Et keys l r moves the cursor to the previous next row Displaying comments For a ladder the comments specified in Tool gt Options gt Project gt Device Comment Reference Reflection Target are displayed as device comments KL Page 176 Device comments Creating cross reference information Cross reference information can also be created by right clicking a device label on the program editor and selecting Cross Reference from the shortcut menu After the Cross Reference window is displayed cross reference information can be created based on all devices labels by selecting All Devices Labels and press the key Automatic synchronization A function to create the cross reference information of devices labels selected on the editor automatically The Cross Reference window which displays the result of automatic synchronization can be specified in Opera
400. rd The remote password can be set for up to 8 modules Up to 8 CPU modules for a multiple CPU configuration Window Project view gt Parameter gt Remote Password Remote Password Setting Set the password which authenticated the access connection from external devices Required Settings NotSet Already Set _ Operating procedure Click the Password button 2 Set the items on the Register Password screen and click the OK button Product Name Select the module of which remote connection is to be enabled For CPU modules integrated network module such as RNENCPU select the followings to use the CPU part and the network part as a separate module e CPU part CPU Module Built in Ethernet Function e Network part CC Link IE Built in Ethernet I F Module Start I O No Enter the start I O number The specification using module labels is applicable Module conditions Set the remote password to enable disable for the user connection number or system connection For FX5CPU Intelligent Module No is displayed 15 PROTECTING DATA 31 1 15 7 Restricting Access from Other Than Specific Communication Route 16 DIAGNOSING MODULE This function displays the state of modules networks and whole system At an error occurrence it displays an error content and corrective action The diagnostic functions of GX Works3 are as follows System monitor 1 Page 313 Checking Module Status of
401. red and then drag and drop it onto the Watch window with pressing key e SFC diagram editor Select a step to be registered or a transition action that set device label and then drag and drop it onto the Watch window e Label editor Select the header of a label to be registered and then drag and drop it onto the Watch window For RCPU step relays SO cannot be registered except in a Zoom Step relays SO are registered as step relays with a block specification BLO SO automatically in a Zoom Point Rectangular selection can be made by dragging the devices labels while pressing the Atl key on the ST editor The devices labels only in the selected range can be registered Automatic registration to Watch window Automatically register the devices labels in the specified range on the program editor to the Watch window The registration target for watch window is updated each time when a specified range is changed The following table shows the range of automatic registration for each program language structured text Ladder Device label on the ladder block which contains the selected cell The devices labels in FB and inline structured text are excluded Ladder Inline Devices labels in the selected line within the selected inline structured box It follows the option setting for the ladder editor ST Devices labels in the selected line Operating procedure 1 Setthe following option Tool gt Options gt Monitor
402. rings except for instruction names e Monitoring part displayed on the right side of the screen during monitoring The omitted portion of the collapsed display example IF END_IF All character strings All character strings Character strings except for the following e Data type of a function e Data type of a function block e Input output label of FB FUN e Character string RETURN of a return element Character strings except for the following e Qualifier e Comment of Step No Transition No e Step name specified to the jump destination Character strings except for class name Character strings except for the following e Class name data type device name Character strings in the comment column The NOP instructions used in the ladder programs cannot be searched Window Find Replace gt Find String Replace String Find String Q Find String Entire Projects X x Find String Find Next AllFind Find Replace Options Fnd Direction E Match Case E Match Whole Word Only E Do Not Search Comments in Program mQperating procedure Replace String if Replace Character String Entire Projects X fea Replace v Find Next All Find Replace Replace All Find Replace Options Find Direction Match Case Match Whole Word Only Do Not Search Comments in Program Set the items on the screen and click the Find Next button 9 SEARCHIN
403. rint E x Print Item Setting by Item Ladder Print All Select Program Do Not Print Print Read protected ProgPou3 Ta ProgPou aAddal gt Move Up Device Comment Device Memory lt Delete Move Down X Device Initial value System Parameter lt Delete All O i Control CPU f Module Information Additional Information Project Contents List EF Device Comment Product Information List Statement Note Display Labels and Devices X Cross Reference 2 inf verification Result Set Print Order Move up _Brinter Setup Page setup When no data exist or only read protected data exist in Print and Do Not Print list X is displayed on the checkbox of the Print Item 1 Select the data to be printed and configure each setting 2 Setthe printer and page by clicking the Printer Setup button and Page Setup button 3 Click the Print button 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS 1 2 9 Printing Data s 52 Ladder 5 27 2014 Data Name ProgPou lal 1 w YTO x10 All lavalz a i a aa TP PS 1 au Too wT 4 3 1 Select Project gt Print Preview 2 Click the Print Preview button on the Print screen 3 When switching the data to be previewed select Print Item and Data Name and click the Display button Considerations MDisplay of print previews and printing data Displayi
404. rk No Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat 27 28 2 30 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 2 23 24 5 25 7 2 2 31 Explanation 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Time with time zone can be got in C Today 5 30 2014 Get Time from PC Please execute it after the time zone of PLC and PC 5 30 2014 5 03 41 PM Get Time from PC Set the items and click the Execute button ITIC Currently Specified Station Select this to set the clock only upon the station specified in the connection destination setting All Stations Specified Select this to perform the clock setting on the station specified in the connection destination setting and all the stations on the same network Set a target network with Specify Network No Specify Group No Select this to perform the clock setting on the station specified in the connection destination setting and each station of the specific group on the specified network Set a target network in Specify Target Network No and set a group number in Specify Group No The clock setting cannot be performed for CC Link IE Field Network because it does not have group number 1 Not supported by FX5CPU e The clock setting can be performed regardless of the ON OFF state of the clock setting device SM210 Note that the ON OFF status of SM210 does not change upon clock setting e In the clock setting a time lag may occur due to the time of transfer e When different time zones are sp
405. rlier Reading from programmable The projects which were created in Version 1 005F or later cannot be read in Version 1 002C or earlier controller Using the projects which were created in Version 1 007H or later in Version 1 006G or earlier Opening projects The project that contains the FBD LD program cannot be opened read in Version 1 006G or earlier Reading from a programmable controller Using the projects which were created in Version 1 010L or later in Version 1 008J or earlier Library operation e FBD LD elements which is protected from editing can be edited by opening the project in Version 1 008J For worksheet only e The edit protected ST programs will not be the editable elements if the program was opened and copied in Version 1 008J or earlier To make it editable open the project that contains the copied data in Version 1 010L or later and copy it again e When the edit protected elements are opened and copied in Version 1 008J or earlier and it ware reopened in Version 1 010L or later the icons of copied data indicate that some elements are in the state of edit protections Using the projects which were created in Version 1 015R or later in Version 1 010L or earlier Library operation The read protected elements which are utilized from a library are identified as the elements with a block password if it s opened in Version 1 010L or earlier Therefore the deletion of elements changing names are not possible APP
406. rmation device label on an SFC block list Operating procedure 1 Select Find Replace gt Block Information Find Device 2 Enter a device label to be searched then click the Find Next button Jump Specify a block No or a block name and move the cursor on an SFC block list Operating procedure 1 Select Find Replace gt Jump 2 Select a block No block name on the Jump screen then click the OK button Poin tr The Jump screen can be displayed by pressing a numeric key of the keyboard on an SFC block list Displaying SFC diagrams Display an SFC diagram of block which is pointed with the cursor from an SFC block list Operating procedure 7 Move the cursor on a block to be displayed 2 Select View gt Open SFC Body or double click a block to be displayed Displaying local label editor Display a local label editor of block which is pointed with the cursor from an SFC block list Operating procedure 7 Move the cursor on a block to be displayed 2 Select View gt Open Label Setting 1 74 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 6 6 Creating SFC Programs Searching for replacing programs The search functions that can be used in the SFC diagram editor as follows Function name Description Reference Cross reference Checks devices label declaration locations and referenced locations in a list Page 200 SEARCHING DATA Device list Checks the usage of devices being used Search and replace e Searches
407. rmed by handling CPU No 1 as the host CPU when the host CPU is set to CPU No 2 to CPU No 4 in I O Assignment Setting of the system parameter The host CPU is set to CPU No 4 in I O Assignment Setting CPU number I O Assignment Setting Simulation CPU No 1 RO4CPU R32CPU host CPU CPU No 2 RO8CPU RO8CPU CPU No 3 R16CPU R16CPU CPU No 4 R32CPU host CPU R32CPU Clock function It operates in accordance with the simulation time The clock of a personal computer is reflected to the time of the clock function every time the CPU module is reset APPENDICES APPENDIX 356 Appendix 5 Using Simulation Function Appendix 6 USB Driver Installation Procedure To communicate with a CPU module via USB installing a USB driver is required The procedure of USB driver installation is as shown below If multiple MELSOFT products are installed previously refer to their installed location Windows XP Operating procedure 1 Connect the personal computer and a CPU module with a USB cable and power ON the programmable controller 2 Select Install from a list or specific location Advanced on the Found New Hardware Wizard screen 3 Select Search for the best driver in these locations on the next screen Select Include this location in the search and specify MELSOF T Easysocket USBDrivers in the folder where GX Works3 has been installed Precautions If the driver cannot be installed check the following settings on Windows
408. rogram Design MELSEC iQ F FX5 Programming Manual Program Design Coil element Specify the device label It outputs the signal to the specified device label according to the transmitted ON OFF signal For details on the element refer to the following manuals MELSEC iQ R Programming Manual Program Design MELSEC iQ F FX5 Programming Manual Program Design Comment lt 3 Valdi lt lt 4 4 Displaying hiding a comment is switched by the following option setting Tool gt Options gt Program Editor gt FBD LD Editor gt Comment gt Display Label Device Comment 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 1 52 6 5 Creating FBD LD Programs EFBD element Variable element Comment C 3 4 t 1 2 Constant element p oa 100 1 Function block element Comment lt 4 FbPou 1 9 3 t 1 7 2 Function element AND E 1 Input connection point 2 Output connection point 3 Label comment device comment 4 Device label Specify the device label Information can be obtained stored in the specified device label It is switched to a constant element by entering a constant 1 Output connection point 2 Constant value Specify a constant The specified constant can be output It is switched to a variable element by entering a device label 1 Input connection point 2 Output connection point Indicates a block for function corres
409. rotect data prevent from manipulation and data leakage and display the system status of the CPU module 15 PROTECTING DATA 16 DIAGNOSING MODULE 17 SAMPLING DEVICE DATA 18 CHECKING CHANGING CPU MODULE OPERATION 291 292 1 5 PROTECTING DATA This chapter explains how to protect the data in a project The functions to save the data are as follows Purpose Prevents illegal access to programs in POU unit Using password Prevents illegal access to programs in program file unit Using security key Prevents illegal execution of programs Using security key Prevents illegal access to projects Using password Prevents illegal access to CPU module Using password Prevents illegal read write operation for files Using password Restricts access from other than specific communication route Using password Identifies the IP address of external devices via Ethernet to block access from an illegal IP address Setting with module parameters 15 PROTECTING DATA Target Project Project CPU module Safety project CPU module RnSFCPU only CPU module CPU module CPU module Function name Reference Block password Page 293 Preventing Illegal Access to function Program Protected by Password Page 295 Preventing Illegal Access to Program Protected by Key Security key authentication function Page 300 Preventing Illegal Program Execution User Authentication File password fun
410. roup No 0 station to specified dest station Network Type CC Link IE Control Mode Online Hodule Error IP Communication Test Check the IP communication route from the connected station to the destination station Link Start Stop can start or stop linking stations Selected Station Operation Remote Operation Able to change CPU status of the selected station 16 DIAGNOSING MODULE 1 16 3 Diagnosing Network 3 7 HTwisted pair cable Diagnostics gt CC Link IE Control Diagnostics Twisted Pair Cable 318 x Module 1 Network No 1 Change Module i ii Monitoring nee Total No of Stations Total No of Stations Current Link Number of Station Constant Link Parameter 120 Connected 3 Scan Time 2 ms Errors Detected 0 Scan Setting Value Oms Delete Disconnected Station X I O Master Station Block 1 0 Block 2 0 NetworkType Ec4ink TE Control Selected Station Communication Status Monitor RIZ1ENZI Mode Online Check the transient communication route from the connected Sta No 1 No Error Communication Test station to the destination station Network Type CC Link IE Control Check the IP communication route from the connected station to Communication Test emcee z MAC Address Transient Transfer Group No 0 r the destination station Check the cable status between the connected station and the destination station Serr stop he eva data irk Sel
411. rsion button on the Device Initial Value editor again Poin tr To check the values of the device initial values create a new device memory data and perform Register to Device Memory to it 8 SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES 1 8 3 Setting Device Initial Values 99 9 SEARCHING DATA This section explains how to search for and replace character strings devices labels instructions etc in each editor Find Device Label e Ladder editor Used to search for replace devices or labels in a program Page 202 Searching Replacing Replace Device Label e ST editor Devices Labels e FBD LD editor e SFC diagram editor e Label editor Find Instruction e Ladder editor Used for searching for replacing instructions in a program Page 204 Searching Replacing Replace Instruction e ST editor Instructions e FBD LD editor e SFC diagram editor Find String Replace e Ladder editor Used for searching for replacing character strings used in a Page 205 Searching Replacing String e ST editor program label and device comment Character Strings e FBD LD editor e SFC diagram editor e Device comment editor e Label editor Change Open Close e Ladder editor Used for switching the contact type of a specified device ina Page 207 Changing Contacts Contact e FBD LD editor program from an open contact to a close contact or from a Between Open Contact and Close e SFC diagram editor close contact to an open contact Contact Device Batch Replace e Ladder editor
412. rtcut Key screen Up to three shortcut keys can be assigned to one command Window Tool gt Shortcut Key i EEan Shortcut Key sy Shortcut Key Setting Key 2 Key 3 Fixed E Ff Project A New Ctrl N BS Open Ctrl 0 S Close FA Save Ctrl S gf Save As gf Delete gf Verify Project gf Change Module Type Intelligent Function Module Anen iin armat Proie Current Assignment Import J Export cea Operating procedure 1 Double click the command cell that will change the shortcut key to edit 2 Press the key to be assigned on the keyboard 3 Click the Close button mChange to default setting The shortcut key assignment can be changed to the default format by selecting the format to be set from the pull down list in Default The available formats are as follows e Change to GX Works3 Format Change to the default setting e Change to GPPA Format Batch change the shortcut key setting of all command keys to the same setting of GPPA e Change to GPPW Format Batch change the shortcut key setting of all command keys to the same setting of GX Developer e Change to MEDOC Format Batch change the shortcut key setting of all command keys to the same setting of MELSEC MEDOC Point By importing the exported file gks the settings can be utilized in other personal computers The setting files exported from GX Works2 can be imported 2 SCREEN CONFIGUR
413. ry Batch Monitor F4 Toolbar b 16 Uni ii s Device Buffer Memory Batch screen onitoring FA E3 Device Name DO Detailed Conditions Stop Monitoring Buffermemory Unit HEX Address z DEC Detailed Condition Program ReferencefFi i Device Comment Do Not Display X A THF 0 0 aiaiai aiaidid ol Q 0 H H H H 7 7 7 f f al Da 0 0 0 0 oj jo aa aaan I DS q0 000 0 oO aj DG aa aaan af 07 H al Da aaa a eee ee ae ag iaq a a ll H al c Dit TEH aj D12 H al WMonitoring devices in batch Enter the target start in Device name For the devices that can be entered refer to the following section KL Page 337 Applicable Devices in GX Works3 e When the target device is local device Specify Program Reference e When checking the TC setting values Enter a device of timer retentive timer long timer long retentive timer counter or long counter Example T10 ST10 LT10 LST10 C10 LC10 and specify Program Reference Monitoring buffer memory in batch Enter the start I O number and address of the Intelligent function module Unit Enter the start I O number of the Intelligent function module to be monitored in hexadecimal format e For multiple CPU configuration Specify the CPU module to be monitored CPU No 1 3E00 CPU No 2 3E10 CPU No 3 3E20 CPU No 4
414. ry function Event history function Event history function Error history system error history function Diagnostic function Module diagnostics Host CPU only 344 APPENDICES APPENDIX Appendix 5 Using Simulation Function Supported devices The devices supported by the Simulation function are the same as that of CPU module Note that the devices used in an SFC program are not supported List of special relay For details on special relays refer to the following manual LA MELSEC iQ R CPU Module User s Manual Application SMO Latest self diagnostics error including annunciator ON OFF No error ON Error state SM1 Latest self diagnostics error not including annunciator ON OFF No error ON Error state SM50 Error reset OFF gt ON Error reset request ON OFF Error reset complete SM56 Instruction execution fault OFF Normal ON Instruction execution fault state SM62 Annunciator OFF Not detected ON Detected SM80 Detailed information 1 Flag in use OFF Not used SM112 Detailed information 2 Flag in use ON muse SM203 STOP contact OFF Other than STOP state ON STOP state SM204 PAUSE contact OFF Other than PAUSE state ON PAUSE state SM210 Clock data set request OFF ON setting request is detected ON OFF setting is completed SM211 Clock data set error OFF No error ON Error state SM213 Clock data read request OFF Non processing On Reading request SM220 CPU No 1 preparation completed OFF CPU No n prepara
415. s of an FB instance differs depending on the setting of the following option e Tool gt Options gt Program Editor gt Ladder Editor gt Ladder Diagram gt Display Format gt Display Connection of Ladder Diagram Setting of the number of displayed contacts Number of contacts in input circuit Number of contacts in output circuit 9 contacts 3 contacts 1 Coil 11 contacts 4 contacts 1 coil 13 contacts 5 contacts 1 coil 17 contacts 7 contacts 1 coil 21 contacts 9 contacts 1 coil 33 contacts 15 contacts 1 coil 45 contacts 32 contacts 1 coil Instructions that exceed the number of occupied contacts cannot be entered When instructions cannot be placed by changing the number of displayed contacts the ladder block may not be displayed properly Operating procedure 1 Select Convert gt Convert The ladder block is converted and lines are connected to the input and output labels of the FB instance 2 Edit the input circuits Enter an element to the input circuit in the same manner as creating normal ladder programs Create a program in accordance with the data type of input variable 3 Enter elements to the output circuit in the same manner as the input circuit Edit the program other than function blocks as well After complete editing convert the program Poin tr A parallel circuit can be created in a input circuit on a FB instance To add an element between a parallel circuits select
416. s the comments entered at the time of registration Registering revision Click the Register button to register the project revision Restoring revision information Restore the registered revision information Operating procedure 1 Select the revision to be restored and click the Restore button 2 Click the OK button on the Restore Revision screen After restoring the project amp is displayed at the head of restored revision information on the Revision List screen Precautions e Before restoring a project register the revision of the project being edited If any of revision registered before is restored and the project is saved without registering the revision of the project being edited the project before the restoration will be overwritten e The added changed deleted user information is not restored if the revision is restored Deleting revision information Delete the registered revision information Operating procedure Select the revision to be deleted and click the Delete button 3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 1 3 6 Project Revision 8 Verifying revision Check the revision information against revision information registered before or the project being edited Operating procedure Select the revision to be verified and click the Verify button By selecting only one revision the selected revision information is checked against the project being edited To verify between revisions registered before s
417. s3 parameters of a programmable controller can be set on the Module Configuration Diagram as if to configure the actual system The parameters can be configured on the Project view in the same manner as GX Works2 About Module Configuration Diagram By using the Module Configuration Diagram the following operations can easily be performed Item Reference Display an actual programmable controller system configuration visually Page 85 Creating Module Configuration Diagram Set parameters for modules Page 89 Setting parameters on the Module Configuration Diagram Input start XY in batch Page 92 Inputting start XY in batch Input default points in batch Page 92 Inputting default points in batch Check a power supply capacity and I O points Page 92 Checking power supply capacity and I O points Check a system configuration Page 92 Checking system configurations 1 Not supported by FX5CPU About parameter settings There are two methods for setting parameters use the Module Configuration Diagram or use the Project view For the operation methods refer to the following sections KL Page 89 Setting parameters on the Module Configuration Diagram Page 93 Setting Parameters 4 CREATING MODULE CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM AND SETTING PARAMETERS 4 1 Creating Module Configuration Diagram Place the module parts object with the same configuration as an actual system configuration on the Module Configuration Diagram The Module Configuration D
418. s3 which were used for converting the program files of the verify destination was different from the one of the verify source In this case convert all programs in both the verify source and the verify destination with the same version of GX Works3 then perform the verification again Ladder programs The details of verification target ladder program is displayed by double clicking the displayed program on the Verify Result screen The display format of editor list can be selected from the pull down list on the Verify Result screen MDetailed display editor format The cursor is jumped to the corresponding instruction on the ladder editor by double clicking a instruction in a ladder diagram Precautions e When the instructions which cannot be displayed in the editor format such as NOP mismatched it is displayed as it had matched Only Mismatch is displayed in the status bar Check it by displaying in a list format e A background color is displayed in instruction units However it may be displayed to a cell that only a horizontal line is written on a ladder block Example next cell of an input argument BOOL value for function block Detailed display list format e The cursor is jumped to a corresponding instruction on the ladder editor by double clicking an instruction on the list e When the program that contains the inline structured text program is verified STB is displayed on the row of the inline structured text
419. sanenasnesnanoansansans Uasnasnesnesnasnasnenaasoaneanaanacnasnssnasnscnsansas aaa nannaanaa nes ceneensanaanea nas naa nas nasnasnennenconaanaananaaanaansnnaananaaaanaanncnasnas nan aaa a naanaa nas nas nas nea aac nannenna nan aaanaananaatnasna nas nnscnennnnanas ana aaa nas aanannaenenaa nce nea nas nas nas nad ne nannaannanannannc insane aaanananananea nas naa nan aanancna naa naa nas nasnesnennasaeaaanaanen nanannannaenananessnsasansnaennsacenessassenaeneenesasnesnasnennel WASmARENA ATA CMACANCRAMUSURNURUAMEOYESESVAURAUSNAAUDLASKAAUSG SBCRALASINUKHANY aanren o LJOUSAERAELOQRANOAUANAQUAAZRUOLUAEBNONLLAPLEQUALSRGANUAUREQLASIOASSNAAONGALAMUANANERUACLLGQACANOS nera A SAA RAO RAO EAH ESH EERE EHO EHN RHEE Copied ladder block Temporarily changed ladder block tmpPointer ee Y3 M21 M22 M23 10 e Point By changing the copied ladder block to the NOPLF instruction the specified ladder block is disabled temporarily z z z z 3 5 f 4 _ Precautions In a program of function function block a pointer device can not be used temporarily Only pointer type label is applicable Applying restoring the changes The changed ladder program is applied if no problem is found with the operation If any problems are found the change is restored _ Operating procedure Select the ladder block from TemporaryStart statement to TemporaryEnd statement and then select Edit gt T
420. sed The available functions differ depending on the access level of the user who is logging on to the personal computer For the restrictions of a safety mode refer to the following manual MELSEC iQ R CPU Module User s Manual Application For switching the safety operation modes refer to the following section K Page 327 Switch Safety Operation Mode 1 BEFORE USING THIS PRODUCT 1 2 RnSFCPU Supported Functions 19 20 Safety supported function list GX Works3 provides the functions to create a safety project Page 303 Preventing Illegal Access to Project To perform user authentication before opening a project in order to prevent User Authentication illegal access from users with no authority To perform user authentication before accessing a CPU module in order to prevent illegal access from users with no authority To check if the data in RnSFCPU is the one written by the user Check Safety Data Identity Page 329 Check Safety Data Identity To switch the safety operation mode of RnSFCPU Switch Safety Operation Mode Page 327 Switch Safety Operation Mode Display of safety data identification The icons and background colors of safety data are highlighted lcon ET Module Configuration Standard program a Program EL Initial Safety program m fit Scan m t MAIN m fi ProgPou f Local Label FS Program m fil Fixed Scan m gl MAINI m H ProgPoul es Local Label fy Program Grid
421. sh and Chinese and apply then by switching the language E Difference between device comment and label comment Device comment is a comment data to be added to devices and read from write to CPU module Label comment is a comment to be added to the defined labels Common device comment Common device comment is a device comment that is created automatically when creating a new project Use this comment data when using device comments commonly in multiple programs The common device comments can be used if multiple programs do not exist Sequence program MAIN Sequence program SUB2 Each program device comment Each program device comment is a device comment that can be created arbitrarily Create the device comments under the same data name as the program and use them linked with the program Create a new each program device comment if necessary 1 gt Page 72 Creating projects MAIN Device comments for each program p Sequence program MAIN SUB1 Device comments for each program p gt Sequence program SUB1 SUB2 Device comments for each program p gt Sequence program SUB2 Each program device comment can be created under the different data name from the sequence program However the comment will not be linked with the sequence program To make the comments relate to the sequence program the comments should have the same data names as the program name Precautions For FX5CPU each program device comment cannot be wri
422. sition m b 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 1 6 6 Creating SFC Programs 59 Displayed items SFC 1 Step Indicates one processing of a program element 2 Transition Indicates a condition transition conditions to move to the next step MDisplaying a start destination block Transitions are written in a Zoom or on an SFC diagram and they View gt Open Zoom Start Destination Block can be displayed in multiple formats For details refer to the following section K Page 162 Display format of action transition Ladder Diagram Structured Text and Function Block Diagram Ladder Diagram can be used in a Zoom 3 Action Indicates an assigned operation output to a step MDisplaying a start destination block Actions are written in a Zoom or an SFC diagram and they can be View gt Open Zoom Start Destination Block displayed in multiple formats For details refer to the following section K Page 162 Display format of action transition Ladder Diagram Structured Text and Function Block Diagram Ladder Diagram can be used in a Zoom 4 FBD LD element An FBD LD element that can be used only for a transition MFBD LD element type The elements that can be used on an SFC diagram differs from the Ks Page 152 Elements one for an FBD LD editor For details refer to the following manual MEditing method MELSEC iQ R Programming Manual Program Design K Page 154 Entering programs 5 Step No Transition No An assigned number to a
423. specifying the step attribute For details refer to the following manual MELSEC iQ R Programming Manual Program Design Indicates the end of a block Step No is not assigned to an end step Moves the processing to a next step Indicates a branch displayed with a single line for selecting one processing Indicates a branch displayed with a double line for performing multiple processing simultaneously Makes the execution processing jump to the specified step in the same SFC block A jump and a connection line can be switched Once the steps are activated the assigned action will be executed N indicates that an action perform when the step is activated Other than N cannot be set 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 1 61 6 6 Creating SFC Programs lay format of action transition There are multiple display formats types for actions transitions on the SFC editor in GX Works3 Programs can be shown in the equivalent display formats to MELSAP3 and MELSAP L start condition format in GX Works2 by changing the display formats type Detailed expression Action transition MELSAP3 Page 164 Creating a transition Label device MELSAP L start condition format Page 165 Creating an action GX Works3 GX Works2 Detailed expression MELSAP3 p a 5 1 MELSAP L start condition format he Direct expression e Action name transition name is underlined when selecting the detailed expression We e
424. splay Items e View gt Outline gt Show Hide of Outlines Tool hint The information where the mouse cursor is placed over is MChanging display contents displayed Tool gt Options gt Program Editor gt ST Editor gt Tool Hint 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 14 6 4 Creating ST Programs 5 MColors of programs default Blue are z btn TRUE eye ELSE 4 Global label Magenta fz _btnOl FALSE Error Red 6 6 Local label Magenta H bool 1 inputa ABC LDFBI Functionblock a co J Ga N fe OU Po O _1 1 7 Constant Black _ 8 String constant Black 9 Comment Green x A font color background color and fonts can be changed KL Page 48 Checking and Changing Colors and Fonts Wicon type This icon is displayed on the line jumped from the Cross Reference window oO This icon is displayed on the error line jumped from the Output window MKeywords for collapse and automatic indent A line can be outlined and displayed collapsed by using the keywords shown below Additionally pressing the key ina control syntax inserts an indent automatically OIO OO Ol x 146 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 6 4 Creating ST Programs Entering programs This section explains how to enter an ST program For the functions instructions used in ST programs refer to the following manuals LA MELSEC iQ R Programming Manual Program Design LA MELSEC iQ F FX5 Pr
425. ss of the cursor position Precautions e The program will be in converted state after the replacement e The Replace function cannot be performed during monitoring Perform the function after ending the monitoring However it can be performed when the ladder editor is in the Monitor write mode e The Find Replace function cannot be performed for the read protected data Perform the function after setting the data in editable mode by disabling the security 9 SEARCHING DATA 200 After the All Find Replace All function is performed the results and error logs are displayed Click the All Find button Replace All button on each Find Replace screen A Info 1 x x X Status Target List Location Position Untitled Project Programi Scan MAIN ProgPoui Program Unconverted La Search replace results Sub status bar Location Error logs Status Displays the number of error logs and the search error Search replace results Displays the position information to specify the location where the search replace function is performed Sub status bar Displays the search replace result Error logs Displays the errors in search replace results 1 The jump function is used to jump from any row of search replace results or logs to the corresponding character strings Right click the selected row and select Jump from the shortcut menu or double click the selected line 9 SEARCHING DATA 201
426. ssword For a safety project a file password can be set when the safety operation mode of RNSFCPU is in the test mode Only the authentication can be performed in the safety mode Registration Restrict online operations by setting password to data in the CPU module A password set to data in the transfer source memory of boot operation remains set in the transfer destination memory Change Change the password set to data in the CPU module Authentication Unlock the data in the CPU module temporarily by authenticating the password By authenticating a password the corresponding data in the CPU module can be read written until the project is closed Deletion Delete a password set to data in CPU module Window Project gt Security gt File Password Setting Register change authenticate or delete the passwords for the data in the PLC Users are able to set different passwords for every same named files stored in different drives Password Target Data Target Memory CPU Built in Memory z DataName lt Data Type Read Write CPU Parameter p System Parameter Change Authentication Delete 1 Select the target data and click the Register Change Authentication Delete button 2 Set the items on the displayed screen and click the Completed button 3 Click the Setting button on the File Password Setting screen 15 PROTECTING DATA 9 15 6 Preventing Illegal
427. stem Label Database eto It is unnecessary to change reference side project when DEEE j assigned device is changed in system label Ver 2 l Not Reflected 0 Only iQ R series GOT 2000 series is available for system label Ver 2 import System Label Total 0 To execute Online Program Change execute Online Program Change and save Reservation to Release System Label e Click the Display Setting button to select the items to be displayed e Click the Check button to check errors before converting programs e When the data type is structure or function block the corresponding hierarchy of labels is displayed Poin tr Font color background color and fonts can be changed KL Page 48 Checking and Changing Colors and Fonts 5 REGISTERING LABELS 5 2 Registering Labels 107 Editing rows Adding rows When using the New Declaration After function the selected label is copied and added it to the row right after the specified row with a value appended If a value is already appended after the label name the data is copied with an incremented value When devices are set for global labels the data is copied with an incremented device number For adding blank rows or setting increment regulation decimal hexadecimal set the following option e Tool gt Options gt Other Editor gt Label Editor Common gt Editor Setting Operating procedure Select Edit gt New Declaration Before New Dec
428. step transition automatically by conversion HShow Hide S Step relay of CPU module are assigned to steps Step relays View gt Display Step Transition SQ are used for SFC control instructions the current value change WChanging assigned numbers in monitor Watch window and the data logging Memory Dump K Page 172 Editing Step No Transition No function The assigned number can be changed 6 Device comment The device comment of a Step No SQ Transition No TRO is Hinput displayed K Page 163 Entering comments of Step No Page The device comment which was set to transitions actions is not 164 Entering comments of Transition No displayed Show Hide View gt Comment Display 7 Grid A grid line that serves as makers to place the elements MShow Hide View gt Grid Display 8 Smart tag An operation button displayed around a selected element Show Hide Relevant functions can be performed by clicking the button Tool gt Options gt Program Editor gt SFC Diagram Editor gt Smart Tag 9 Tool hint Information where the mouse cursor is placed over is displayed MChanging display contents Tool gt Options gt Program Editor gt SFC Diagram Editor gt Tool Hint 10 Information area Number of used maximum number of SFC elements are displayed The font color is changed in red when the number of used reached to the maximum number SFC elements cannot be created once the number reached to the maxi
429. t Error Ju Ero Grervews Enordump No Occurrence Date Status Code 2015 05 31 18 21 50 291 2200 EventHistoy Detail A Legend Major A Moderate AY Minor Detaled Information Parameter information E Type of parameter System parameter _ Parameter drive Data memory The system parameter file and CPU parameter file do not exist The memory card parameter file or module extension parameter file stored in the memory card cannot be accessed because the memory card is disable by SM606 SD memory card forced disable instruction Corrective Action Write the system parameter file and CPU parameter file to the CPU module Turn off SM606 Cancel the disabled state Create File 1 BEFORE USING THIS PRODUCT 1 1 Main Functions of GX Works3 1 2 RnSFCPU Supported Functions GX Works3 is supported by MELSEC iQ R series RnSFCPU In this manual a project for RNSFCPU is defined as a safety project and a project other than one for RnSFCPU is defined as a standard project There are two types of data In a safety project safety data and standard data Both safety programs and standard programs can be created in a safety project Data Safety data Indicates safety programs safety FBs FUNs safety global labels and parameters for RnSFCPU Standard data Indicates standard programs standard FBs FUNs standard global labels standard safety shared global labels and parameters for CPU module oth
430. t Monitor Execution Status of Programs Execution type Scan includes the time which executes Event and Fixed Scan Execution count can be displayed from 0 to 65535 When exceeding 65535 counts return to 0 time Entire Execution Time Details of Execution Time for Scan Execution B Time Total Execution Time ms Program Processing Time ms 0 010 a aT END Processing Time ms Scan 200 0 067 Constant Waiting Time ms 0 000 Execution Status of Programs Execution Time ms Displays the actual scan time current value The display contents are differ depending on the program execution type At the program stop standby state 0 000 ms Displays the number of executions counted from 0 at the point of turning the CPU module to the RUN state It is stored even after the program stops Execution Count Entire Execution Time Monitoring Time ms Displays the program execution monitoring time set to PLC RAS of the CPU parameter Displays the total scan time of the programs executed in the CPU module Details of Execution Time for Displays the total execution time of scan execution type program Scan Execution Displays the END processing time Displays the waiting time of the constant scan when the constant scan is set 2 14 CHECKING OPERATION OF PROGRAMS 80 14 5 Checking Processing Time of Program 14 6 Checking Execution Counts of Interrupt Programs Check the execution count of interrupt programs used
431. ted it will not be the same security key as the deleted one Take extra caution when deleting a security key 1 Select the security key to be deleted on the Security Key Management screen 2 Click the Delete button 15 PROTECTING DATA 297 15 2 Preventing Illegal Access to Program Protected by Key Copying security key Copy import export security keys on the Security Key Management screen Exporting security key Export the security key registered to the personal computer to the file format ity which can be imported Expiration date and restrictions for operations can be added to the security key to be exported Operating procedure 1 Select the security key to be exported on the Security Key Management screen 2 Click the Export button 3 Set the following items on the Export screen Item Description Restriction Set whether to add restrictions to the security file to be exported Expiration Date Set the expiration date for the security key to be exported Export Set whether to allow exporting the security key after importing the exported security key Protection Target Selection Set whether to allow registering the security key for the program files using the exported security key Key Registration to CPU Select whether to allow writing the security key to the CPU module using the exported security key 4 Setthe password to be required when importing the security key and click the Export button
432. ted even when the sorted order of CSV file does not match with the sorted order of the device comment editor e When importing a CSV file that is exported from GX Works3 with different language edit the header title name in the CSV file to match the header title in the device comment editor of the import target GX Works3 Point The CSV files exported with GX Works2 can be imported in GX Works3 When multiple comment display setting is set import the CSV file after editing the header names in the CSV file exported from GX Works2 to match the header titles in the device comment editor of GX Works3 Searching device comments When searching device comments refer to the following section KL Page 205 Searching Replacing Character Strings 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 1 1 6 7 Registering Device Comments 8 Reading sample comments Set the sample comments of special relays special registers CPU buffer memory and Intelligent function modules automatically Open the device comment editor in advance FX5SCPU does not support sample comments of CPU buffer memory Window Edit gt Read from Sample Comment Read from Sample Comment ES Read Destination C E Japanese B 455 V English E Chinese Simplified i P3 E Korean EHH Sample Comment to Read V Special Relay Special Register CPU Buffer Memory Start xY Module Name Content of selected comment will be discarded and unable to
433. ted program is written together with one instruction after the inserted ladder block to the CPU module Therefore the online program change function may not be completed at a time depending on the number of program steps before and after addition or deletion In this case reduce the number of steps written at a time and perform the function in several times Execution of rising falling instructions after performing online program change When the raising falling instructions in the subroutine FB program were modified or added the instructions are not executed immediately after performing the online program change function even if the execution condition was satisfied The instructions are executed next time the execution condition is satisfied lt Example of project configuration gt LMAIN1 Program file FbPou1 Subroutine FB program Modified added LMAIN2 Program file _FbPou2 Subroutine FB program Modified added L FbPou3 Macro FB program Modified added The macro FB program used in the subroutine FB program is the same as subroutine FB program 260 13 WRITING READING DATA TO CPU MODULE 13 3 Writing Programs While CPU is in RUN Writing data in units of files while the CPU module Is in RUN file batch online change Write programs or data in units of files while the CPU module is in RUN state Data such as sequence programs standard programs and device comments can be written by performing the file batch on
434. ter has been configured a network module RJ71EN71 except for E E Ethernet Q series compatible needs to be placed on the right side of the CPU slot in the host CPU After changing the module type the RJ71EN71 will be in an unplaced status and a CPU extension module RJ71EN 71 which is the same network type will be placed 3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 76 3 4 Changing Module Type of Project 3 5 Verifying Projects Verify a open project with the data of other project Use this function to check whether the program contents are consistent or the modifications are reflected etc When a user information is registered to the project the user authentication is required Page 306 Logging on to CPU module Performing verification Window Project gt Project Verify 5 Project Verify Verification D Options erification Target Verify Source Editing Data verify Destination Source Project Untitled Project Destination Project erification Verify the selected source data and the destination data Users are able to change the verify destination Verify Source Verify Destination M 5 Mp Project H Program File es age O SoS SyS T e SC dSSSOSOSOSOOOTCCCSCSCSCSCSCSCS e SC dSC SCS SSOCOCOCSCSC S S ET A A Module information display only available module for verification verify Cancel _ Operating procedure 1
435. ter set to Use File Register of Each Program is used as a data with no latch such that the data is set to clear to 0 at the first time replacing the file registers to local devices avoids increase of number of steps and scan time due to the addition of the programs e When Execute END Processing between Programs is selected When monitor is requested after the program which is set not to use the file register FFFFH 1 will be monitored since the monitor is performed between programs or at the END process e When other than Execute END Processing between Programs is selected The value of the file register file that is enabled in the program executed at the right before the END processing is monitored Example When the execution order of the program is A B gt C gt END processing gt A gt B monitor the value of the file register at execution of program C Monitoring possibility for devices The following table shows the possibility to monitor devices on a program editor Possibility Device Possible X Y M L B F SB V S 1 T T TS T TC T TN ST 2 ST STS ST STC ST STN LT2 LT LTS LT LTC LT LTN LST LST LSTS LST LSTC LST LSTN C 2 C CS C CC C CN LC 2 LC LCS LC LCC LC LCN D W SW FX FY SM SD JO X JOLY JO B JOW JO SW UD G U3ED G U3EO HG Z LZ R ZR RD BL BLO S Not possible FD N P 1 J U S can be monitored in a Zoom or on an SFC diagram only Monitor BLO S when
436. ters of the modules in the information of Module Configuration Diagram can be read written After reading data from a programmable controller the coordinate position of the modules on the Module Configuration Diagram are displayed by default status The information of symbols is deleted 4 CREATING MODULE CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM AND SETTING PARAMETERS 4 1 Creating Module Configuration Diagram 4 2 Setting Parameters To operate a programmable controller setting parameters for the modules is required The following explains the settings of parameters on the Project view rat AKR IVD A LIA AE System Parameter Set the items which are required to configure the system such as a module configuration The system here indicates the system configured with a main base unit extension base unit and RQ extension base unit connected with the extension cable for RCPU and the system configured with a module and adapter connected to the module for FX5CPU Boj Parameter ge Syster Pararneter E fe ROSCPU a CPU Parameter n Module Parameter Memory Card Pararneter E Module Information Parameter of control Set the operation of the function of a CPU module itself CPU This includes the file setting memory device setting and program setting BS r O000 RX10 Module Parameter A Module POU Shortcut Module Information Parameters that is set to an I O module and Intelligent function module This includes initial values a
437. the communication with GX Works3 ex For Windows Vista Select Control Panel gt Security gt Windows Firewall gt Allow a program through Windows Firewall from the Start menu of Windows Click the Add Program button in the Exception tab Select GX Works3 on the Add a Program screen and click the OK button Select GX Works3 in the list and click the OK button gxw3 may be displayed when RCPU Ethernet module is searched on the network and access through the Windows firewall is set to allow before Ethernet port direct connection For Windows 7 or later 238 Select Control Panel gt System and Security gt Windows Firewall gt Allow a program or feature through Windows Firewall from Windows Start Click the Change settings button and click the Allow another program button Select GX Works3 on the Add a Program screen and click the Add button Select Domain Home Work Private and Public of the added GX Works3 in the list and click the OK button For Windows 8 or later Apps is displayed gxw3 may be displayed when RCPU Ethernet module is searched on the network and access through the Windows firewall is set to allow before Ethernet port direct connection 12 SETTING ROUTE TO CPU MODULE 12 2 Direct Connection Serial connection The following shows the setting example for accessing a CPU module on the own station via a serial port from GX Wor
438. the password on the Password Authentication screen and click the OK button Deleting block password Delete the block password registered to a POU Operating procedure 1 Select the POU to delete the block password and click the Delete button 2 Enter the password on the Delete Password screen and click the OK button 2 4 15 PROTECTING DATA 9 15 1 Preventing Illegal Access to Program Protected by Password 15 2 Preventing Illegal Access to Program Protected by Key To prevent an illegal access to programs in program file unit with a key use the Security key authentication function Security key authentication function The operations can be restricted by using a security key Security key setting target Program files Program file FB file FUN file 4 gt Page 58 Data e Restrict the access for program files in the project configuration e Restrict the execution of programs by CPU module A security key can be registered in program file unit however all the program files in the project will be the same security key Personal computer Enable the access for the program files protected by a security key Multiple security keys can be registered in one personal computer MCPU module Enable the execution of the program restricted by a security key Only one security key can be written to one CPU module The following operations can be restricted iF JEN E AGCUULIVUIT JIi wi NAJN I Aiii
439. ting procedure 1 Move the cursor on a function 2 Select Edit gt Change FB FUN Data Definition Name ABS 3 Scroll the screen and select the function block to be replaced and click the OK button 4 W p 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 1 33 6 3 Creating Ladder Programs Inserting inline structured text Inline structured text is a function to edit monitor a program by creating an inline structured text box that displays an ST program at the coil instruction area on the ladder editor With this function a numeric value operation or a character string process can be created easily in the ladder program Up to 2048 characters can be entered in an inline structured text box Two characters are used as the line feed Note that this function cannot be used in a safety program and a safety FB FUN Operating procedure Select Edit gt Inline Structured Text gt Insert Inline Structured Text Box HH The editing method of the inline structured text program is the same as that of Structured Text 1 gt Page 147 Entering programs Poi oint e Enter STB on the element entry dialog to insert an inline structured text box e When inserting inline structured text as a parallel circuit draw lines for the parallel circuit first and then insert the inline structured text box OK Cancel Extd Dspl VOID Insert Inline Structured Text Box OTE VOID Setting Insert Inline Structured Text Insert an in
440. ting Reading Programmable Controller Data 13 2 Verifying Programmable Controller Data This section explains how to verify the open project against the data in the CPU module The Verify with PLC function is used to compare the content of two projects or to locate the changes made in programs The projects set the security function can be verified when both the verify source data and the verify destination data are not read protected To verify data between two projects use the Project Verify function For details refer to the following section K Page 77 Verifying Projects Window Online gt Verify with PLC J ea Display Setting Related Functions Parameter Program F Select All Parameter Programit Select All E Get the title Refresh W L d Open Close All T Deselect All N Open Close All Deselect All B CPU Built in Memory E SD Memory Card Module Name Data Name g Title RO8 Parameter E 5 System Parameter CPU Parameter E a Module Parameter Ethernet CCIE Z D Global Label E amp Global Label Setting er Program MAIN O Parameter E p System Parameter CPU Parameter E B Module Parameter Ethernet CCIE Z 5 Global Label i amp Global Label Setting Program gA MAIN d Pou 0010 010 0 0 a FBFILE Display Memory Capacity Memory Capa
441. ting module FBs in project Module FBs are displayed in the Module tab in the Element Selection window when one of the following operations is performed e Place the modules on the Module Configuration Diagram and fix the parameters e Add a new module from the Project view Point The manual of a module FB can be displayed from the Element Selection window Select and right click a module FB then select Help from the shortcut menu Using module FBs in programs Operating procedure 1 Drag and drop a module FB from the Module tab of the Element Selection window onto the program 2 Enter an FB instance name After creating the FB instance the created function block Local Label Program is registered in M_FBLIB on the Project view Precautions Registering the module FBs to be used in advance at creation of new project is recommended If the module FB to be used is not registered it may take time to display the module FB after dragging and dropping it Setting operation parameter of module FB After creating FB instance of a module label display it on the label editor and enter the value in Initial Value displayed in Extended Display However the initial value of an array type label cannot be set in the operation parameter Set the operation parameter by a program When the operation parameter of module FB set in the label initial value is changed by program the module FB operates with the changed value Before chan
442. tion Action2 will be moved An action Action2 can be copied by dragging the action with pressing key Jump e Deleting a jump only is not applicable Switch the jump to a connection line first Page 171 Jump selection branch connection e It is not applicable to copy a jump only Copy a jump source and a jump destination and paste them The following is an example image when selecting and pasting a transition TransitionO When selecting an end step it is pasted as well 168 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 6 6 Creating SFC Programs MSelection branch Drag and drop a step or a transition onto the left right side of a selection branch The orders of those branches is switched LI The left side of transition is given priority to perform when both side of transitions were satisfied at a same time Check the operation of SFC program before switching branches Simultaneous branch Drag and drop a step and a transition onto the simultaneous branch The orders of those branch will be switched Changing SFC elements BEnd step gt normal step For restoring a step which has been changed to an end step exanple Step1 once to a normal step switch it to a jump then switch the jump symbol to a connection line ex 1 Select an end step Step1 and select Edit gt Modify gt End Step Jump Then select a step name Step2 which has been placed under the branch before changing 2 Select the added jump
443. tion not completed ON CPU No n preparation completed SM230 CPU No 1 error flag OFF CPU No n normal ON CPU No n stop error state SM400 Always ON ON OFF M401 Al FF SM40 ways O ON OFF SM402 After RUN ON for one scan only SM403 After RUN OFF for one scan only SM409 0 01 second clock 0 005 sec 0 005 sec SM410 0 1 second clock 0 05 sec 0 05 sec SM411 0 2 second clock 0 1 sec 0 1 sec SM412 1 second clock 0 5 sec 0 5 sec SM413 2 second clock 1 sec 1 sec SM414 2n second clock nsec n sec SM415 2n ms clock nms n ms APPENDICES APPENDIX 4 Appendix 5 Using Simulation Function 3 5 SM420 User timing clock No 0 n2 SM421 User timing clock No 1 ko Ja SM422 User timing clock No 2 N SM423 User timing clock No 3 SM424 User timing clock No 4 SM600 Memory card enabled disabled flag OFF Disabled ON Enabled SM603 Memory card drive 2 flag OFF No SD memory card inserted ON SD memory card inserted SM604 Memory card in use flag OFF Not used ON In use SM626 Extended SRAM cassette insertion flag OFF Extended SRAM cassette is not attached ON Extended SRAM cassette is attached SM628 Program memory write error OFF Write error ON No write operation normal SM629 Program memory write flag OFF Writing is in progress ON No write operation SM632 Data memory write error OFF Write error ON No write operation normal SM633 Data memory write flag OFF Writing is in progress ON No write operation SM699 D
444. tional Setting of Option by selecting Option on the Cross Reference window 21 9 SEARCHING DATA 0 9 6 Displaying Reference Information List of Devices Labels Displaying cross reference information MDisplay after creation of cross reference information is completed e The data protected by security function cannot be displayed e If the program or the option setting is changed the cross reference information does not correspond with the program In order to update the cross reference information create it again e The columns can be sorted in ascending descending order by clicking the column header However the sort cannot be performed if the structure array function block is displayed in the tree To clear the display in the tree unselect Display Hierarchically from the pull down list of View MWhen data is deleted after conversion The deleted data may be displayed as a search result To display the most recent cross reference information convert the program and create the cross reference information again Filtering display Filter the created cross reference information Operating procedure Enter select the filter condition and press the Ester key Filtering condition The previously entered keywords can be selected from the pull down list For Data Name and Program File Name search results can also be selected from the list as well as previously entered keywords MTree display of filtering condition
445. tiple CPU system 1 To specify the own station select No Specification Display the illustration of the connection route Click the System Image button to display the set connection route in an illustration to check the route 236 12 SETTING ROUTE TO CPU MODULE 12 1 Specification of Connection Destination 12 2 Direct Connection This section explains the setting method for accessing the CPU module directly connected to a personal computer Point Click the CPU Module Direct Coupled Setting button on the Specify Connection Destination screen to change the settings to direct connection USB connection The following shows the setting example for accessing the CPU module on the own station with USB from GX Workss3 FX5CPU does not support this connection Host CPU module r m 1 1 PC side I F Serial USB USB 2 PLC side I F PLC Module PLC Mode RCPU Other Station Setting No Specification Check at Communication Time 30 seconds Retry Times 0 time Ethernet connection The following shows the setting example for accessing the built in Ethernet CPU with Ethernet from GX Works3 Ethernet port a Built in Ethernet CPU 192 168 3 1 192 168 3 39 Network No Station No PC side I F Ethernet Board Protocol TCP 1 2 PLC side I F PLC Module Ethernet Port Direct Connection 1 Other Station Setting No Specification Check at Communication Time 30 seconds
446. to be consistent 8 To compare with equal inequal in bit type device and constant requires to be a set 9 For the devices that can be added suffixes type specifier refer to the following manual A MELSEC iQ R Structured Text ST Programming Guide Book 10 A to F can be entered to the device numbers written in hexadecimal format An error will occur if the numbers are specified in descending order such as X10 2 11 There is no limit to the number of brackets if the combination of open brackets and close brackets matches 12 Only bit devises such as YO can be used on conditions In this case it indicates YO TRUE Precautions The row beginning with is handled as a comment and it is skipped g setting data TT a file of edited setting data 1 Click the button in the setting data column on the I O System Setting screen 2 Selecta target file then click the Open button Language specific characters are included in the files of setting data When the language font to be displayed is not installed in the personal computer some characters may be garbled ting the I O system Execute the 10 system after checking the I O System Setting Data Select Execute on the I O System Setting screen When the check result includes an error the description will be displayed on the result screen Correct the I O system setting data then execute the system again 11 SIMU
447. ts Page 92 Checking power supply capacity and I O points gt Check gt System Configuration Page 92 Checking system configurations 38 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS 2 4 Menu List gt Parameter gt Fix gt Parameter gt Input Detailed Configuration Information Window gt Start XY Batch Input gt Default Points Batch Input gt Toolbar gt Module Configuration Diagram gt Read Module Configuration from PLC parameter editor Page 89 Setting parameters on the Module Configuration Diagram Page 92 Inputting start XY in batch Page 92 Inputting default points in batch Page 87 Reading module configuration from actual system gt Set Maximum Value gt Set Minimum Value gt Copy Positioning Data gt Paste Positioning Data gt Channel Copy gt Copy Axis gt Refresh Batch Setting gt Enable All gt Refresh Batch Setting gt Disable All gt Refresh Batch Setting gt Back to User Default gt Auto assignment gt Setting Method gt Start End gt Setting Method gt Points Start gt Device Assignment Method gt Start End gt Device Assignment Method gt Points Start gt Word Device Setting Value Input Format gt Decimal gt Word Device Setting Value Input Format gt Hexadecimal gt IP Address Input Format gt Decimal gt IP Address Input Format gt Hexadecimal Ja dder ed itor The men
448. tten to the CPU module 1 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 76 6 7 Registering Device Comments Setting device comments for each program When comments are set both in Common Device Comment and in Each Program Device Comment specify the comment to be displayed on the program editor by setting the following option e Tool gt Options gt Project gt Device Comment Reference Reflection Target ex When different device comments are set for the same device M Common device comment COMMENT Device Nane MO Detailed Conditions Y Device Nam Comment Initial Start 1 Initial Start 2 When the reference of the device M in the sequence program MAIN is set to the common device comment lt Options gt E Reference Reflection Target for Device Comment Reference Reflect the Other Device Comment When Yes ha E MAIN Mixed 7 lt Sequence program MAIN gt x1 M1 Initial Start 1 The global device comment Initial Start 1 is displayed as a device comment for M1 Device comments for each program MAIN DeviceName MO Detailed Conditions Comment Device Nam _ Stop Device 1 Stop Device 2 When the reference of the device M in the sequence program MAIN is set to the device comment for each program lt Options gt E Reference Reflection Target for Device Comment Reference Reflect the Other Device Comment When Yes E MAIN Mixed v M Each Program ha lt
449. unction Index register setting function Device label initial value setting function Device comment function File register setting function Timer device limit setting function STOP gt RUN operation setting function of output Y Communication setting Device label access service processing setting function RAS function Diagnostic function Self diagnostic application Error clear function function History function Event history function Error history module error history collecting Host CPU only function Maintenance Applied monitor function Interrupt program list monitor The operation is not performed in function actual time Scan time monitor The operation is not performed in actual time Buffer memory monitor function Applied test function Clearing device label and file register Clearing latch device and label Series common function System System configuration Input output number and point variable setting function configuration setting function function Module Data communication Direct access function UO GO JOO Access with module FB programming function dedicated instruction and common function module label is available Program creation Module label and module FB device comment auto creation function support function Sample program display function Template display function Parameter auto creation function Initial setting and refresh setting RAS function Histo
450. unit us END processing time unit ms END processing time unit us Constant scan waiting time unit ms Constant scan waiting time unit us Scan program execution time unit ms Scan program execution time unit us SD memory card type SD memory card drive 2 usage status SD memory card drive 2 capacity the lower digit unit KB SD memory card drive 2 capacity the higher digits unit KB SD memory card drive 2 free space the lower digit unit KB SD memory card drive 2 free space the higher digits unit KB Device label memory drive 3 usage status Device label memory drive 3 capacity the lower digits unit KB Device label memory drive 3 capacity the higher digits unit KB Device label memory file storage area drive 3 capacity the lower digits unit KB Device label memory file storage area drive 3 capacity the lower digits unit KB Data memory drive 4 usage status Data memory drive 4 capacity the lower digits unit KB Data memory drive 4 capacity the higher digits unit KB Capacity identification information of the Extended SRAM cassette Write transfer status display percent Write transfer status display percent Current interrupt priority Interrupt disabling for each priority setting value Specification of the number of write instruction executions to data memory Execution cycle 0 Enable 1 Disable Dummy device Latest storage file number
451. ure the following settings if needed e the SFC Setting of CPU parameter e The Act at Block Multi Activated setting to program files e The SFC information device to blocks Block information For details refer to the following manual LA MELSEC iQ R Programming Manual Program Design 4 Open the SFC diagram editor then create an SFC diagram Page 163 Creating SFC diagrams 5 Edita program of action transition 1 gt Page 172 Creating displaying Zooms action transition 158 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 6 6 Creating SFC Programs Configuration of SFC diagram editor The SFC diagram editor is a graphical language editor to show a sequence control as a state transition diagram By simply inserting the prepared SFC elements along the operation flow the each element is connected automatically and a program can be created Select Program gt execution type gt program file gt block gt Program on the Project view Immediately after creating a program SFC elements that are necessary to create a program such as an initial step and end step are placed Toolbar aS Spl tt amp gt Ie 4b te YE ee te ae Sit Se te ee See eh o ml Jb ey yl BR SFC diagram editor E WUU Block PRG SFC 44Step Actpns 1 4 an 5 6 1 LN Action 3 MO Mi 2 T 5 BX XDE 8 A Step 3 ra a 6 E Comment gra Action3 9 Ma Transition 4 a TR TR Tran
452. us of the selected station can be changed by starting remote operation of the selected station 16 DIAGNOSING MODULE 1 16 3 Diagnosing Network 3 9 MELSECNET diagnostics Monitor the network information for each station diagnose the network status and perform a test RnPCPU FX5CPU do not support this function Considerations for using MELSECNET H network module when performing the MELSECNET Diagnostics refer to the following manual MELSEC iQ R Module Configuration Manual For the operation method refer to the following manual LA GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common Window Diagnostics gt MELSECNET Diagnostics Module 1 Module 2 Module 3 Module 4 Network Information Network NET H Loop Network No 1 Type Net Control Station PLC PLC Group No 0 Station No 1 Link Information Mode Online Link Scan Time F Loop Status Data Link not Possible Max ms Loopback Station Min ms R Loop Status Data Link not Possible Current ms Loopback Station Communication Information Communication Status Suspend Communication BWY from Master Station EZR BW from Host Master Station 2 16 DIAGNOSING MODULE 3 0 16 3 Diagnosing Network CC Link diagnostics Monitor the network information of each station diagnose the network status and perform a test FX5CPU does not support it For details refer to the following manual MELSEC iQ R CC Link
453. us to be displayed differ depending on the module gt Continuous Paste gt Insert and Paste gt Delete gt Insert Row gt Delete Row gt Insert Column gt Delete Column gt NOP Batch Insert gt NOP Batch Delete gt Ladder Edit Mode gt Read Mode gt Ladder Edit Mode gt Write Mode Page 140 Pasting device number label name consecutively Page 139 Pasting Page 139 Inserting deleting NOP instruction Page 126 Read mode Write mode Monitor read mode Monitor write mode 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS 2 4 Menu List 39 40 Edit gt Ladder Symbol gt Open Contact gt Ladder Symbol gt Close Contact gt Ladder Symbol gt Open Branch gt Ladder Symbol gt Close Branch gt Ladder Symbol gt Coil gt Ladder Symbol gt Application Instruction gt Ladder Symbol gt Vertical Line gt Ladder Symbol gt Horizontal Line gt Ladder Symbol gt Delete Vertical Line gt Ladder Symbol gt Delete Horizontal Line gt Ladder Symbol gt Pulse Contact Symbol gt Rising Pulse gt Ladder Symbol gt Pulse Contact Symbol gt Falling Pulse gt Ladder Symbol gt Pulse Contact Symbol gt Rising Pulse Branch gt Ladder Symbol gt Pulse Contact Symbol gt Falling Pulse Branch gt Ladder Symbol gt Pulse Contact Symbol gt Rising Pulse Close gt Ladder Symbol gt Pulse Contact
454. vices are checked as targets The devices assigned to labels are excluded from the check Check range Type Device Check in a project Device M SM L F V S TR X Y B SB DX DY D SD R ZR RD W SW T TC T TS T TN C CC C CS C CN ST STC SC ST STS SS ST STN SN LT LTC LT LTS LT LTN LC LCC LC LCS LC LCN LST LSTC LSC LST LSTS LSS LST LSTN L P BL Link direct device JO X JOY JO B JO SB JOW JO SW Module access UD G UO HG device Safety device SA M SA SM SA X SA Y SA B SA D SA SD SAW SA T TC SA T TS SA T TN SA C CC SA C CS SA C CN SA ST STC SC SA ST STS SS SA ST STN SN Step No BLO S Transition No in an SFC program Check in file only Device M V D T TC T TS T TN C CC C CS C CN ST STC SC ST STS SS ST STN SN LT LTC LT LTS LT LTN LC LCC LC LCS LC LCN LST LSTC LSC LST LSTS LSS LST LSTN LSN P Safety device SA M SA D SA T TC SA ZT TS SA HT TN SA HC CC SA C CS SA FC CN SA ST STC SC SA FST STS SS SA HST STN SN 6 CREATING PROGRAMS 1 6 8 Checking Programs 83 6 9 Converting Programs This section explains how to convert a created program into a code that can be executed The unconverted program name is displayed red in the Project view Converting converting all programs Convert the unconverted programs in the project Check the program at the same time The differences in operatio
455. wing screen shows a main frame configuration on which a work window and docked windows are displayed i Si MELSOFT GX Works3 CAUsers Administrato j S Title ba r i je i in Online Debug Diagnostics Tool Window Help IDOBE 71 Gis e RAAF HARARE S As aABaQ AE z i FS F9 sF9 cFS cFIO si FS aF aFS saf5 saF6 saf safe aFS caf5 cat g wO lt Menu bar Navig n ProgPou PR D 94Step 1 election x rite f Find POU ty Project T ELEERI Configuration amp Wig Lm 4 Toolbar Stop Display Target All ou i g pe L La BA uction z ion ess xi x2 x3 x4 i Pii Pee My H M 1 Basic Instruc Wo rk WI nd OW H Comparison Operation Instr Arithmetic Operation Instru o on Type x ogical ructior nre ata n Sequence Instruction A main screen used for or Documents PROJECT1 gx3 ProgPou PRG LD 94 Contact Instruction Connection Instruction Outpu Shift operations such as Eee oT programming parameter abe Tr z ba P f ep rogPou setting and monitoring arabs Type O 27 Step ProgPou 25 Step ProgPou 28 Step ProgPou xO xO slalom __ 31 Step m ProgPou lt m r Comat Perera Worn No Result DataName Category Content Status bar tout ENT Navigation Cross Reference window Element Selection window Watch window etc window Doc
456. y e Place the cursor on the element on the SFC diagram editor and press the key Enter Ladder screen and argument editing screen Click the Manual button on each screen Element Selection window Select the instruction or the module FB in the list and press the key Connecting to MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA Global Website Open the MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA Global Website in a Web browser Make sure your personal computer connect to Internet in advance Operating procedure Select Help gt Connection to MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA Global Website Checking version of GX Works3 Display the information such as the software version of GX Workss3 Operating procedure Select Help gt Version Information 1 BEFORE USING THIS PRODUCT 1 4 Learning Operation Method of GX Works3 1 5 Connection Configurations between Personal Computer and CPU Module The configurations when connecting a personal computer and a CPU module are shown below Connection via USB port GX Works3 SW1DND GXW3 E USB miniB type RCPU FX5CPU does not support this connection The USB cables of which the operation is ensured by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation are shown below When using a USB cable for the first time install the USB driver For details refer to the following section K Page 357 USB Driver Installation Procedure Product name Manufacturer USB cable USB A type USB B type BUFFALO KOKUYO SUPPLY INC USB cable USB A type
457. y program E ft structured Data Types ai Structurel ie Structure shared global label System structure Defined structure Standard safety shared global label A global labels that can be used in both standard programs and safety programs Defined structure System structure A structure registered in the system label database Structures required for modula lahele A data that defines structure as data type This can be used as a data type for all labels which can be ie M RCPU_PredefinedProtoc i ge M ROPU_Titmme_Synchronize Structures required for module labels defined in the project except for recursive definitions in the defined structure The structures required for module labels are registered automatically 3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 9 3 1 Project File and Data Configuration s 60 MDevice data Creation method K Page 71 Creating Data E ie Device BS fi Device Comment E iS Each Program Dewice Comment Each program E MAN device comment E Common Device Comment Common device E fe Device Memory comment m MAIN Device memory E fee Device Initial Value os MAIN Device initial value Parameter data Each program device comment Common device comment Device memory Device initial value A device comment data that can be used in the program files which have the same name KL Page 176 Registering Device Comments A device comment data that can be commonly used in multipl
Download Pdf Manuals
Related Search
Related Contents
焙煎機能付コーヒーメーカー カフェプロ502 Protection de la vie privée : enjeux et méthodes GXP-‐ 2000 User`s Manual ver 2.0 TTXL Series Installation, Operation and Samsung GT-I6410 Εγχειρίδιο χρήσης WEATHERPAK® TRx User Manual - Coastal Environmental Systems 1 エコマーク商品類型 No.132「トナーカートリッジ Version1.4」 認定基準 User Manual iPanda Shopping eCart Version 4.1 By iPanda Solutions 取扱説明書 - Gentos Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file